7RW80 Manual A4 V040300 Us

Preface
Table of Contents
Introduction 1
SIPROTEC 4 Functions 2
Voltage and Frequency
Protection 7RW80
Mounting and Commissioning 3
Technical Data 4
V4.6
Ordering Information and Accessories A
Terminal Assignments B
Manual
Connection Examples C
Default Settings and Protocol-dependent
Functions D
Functions, Settings, Information E
Literature
Glossary
Index
C53000-G1140-C233-4
NOTE
i For your own safety, observe the warnings and safety instructions contained in this document, if available.
Disclaimer of Liability Copyright

We have checked the contents of this manual against the Copyright © Siemens AG 2018. All rights reserved.
hardware and software described. However, deviations Dissemination or reproduction of this document, or evalua-
from the description cannot be completely ruled out, so tion and communication of its contents, is not authorized
that no liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions except where expressly permitted. Violations are liable for
contained in the information given. damages. All rights reserved, particularly for the purposes
The information given in this document is reviewed regu- of patent application or trademark registration.
larly and any necessary corrections will be included in
subsequent editions. We appreciate any suggested Registered Trademarks
improvements.
SIPROTEC, SINAUT, SICAM and DIGSI are registered trade-
We reserve the right to make technical improvements
marks of Siemens AG. Other designations in this manual
without notice.
might be trademarks whose use by third parties for their
Document version V04.03.00 own purposes would infringe the rights of the owner.
Release date 07.2018
Preface
Purpose of the Manual

This manual describes the functions, operation, installation, and commissioning of devices 7RW80. In partic-
ular, one will find:
• Information regarding the configuration of the scope of the device and a description of the device func-
tions and settings → Chapter 2;
• Instructions for Installation and Commissioning → Chapter 3;
• Compilation of the Technical Data → Chapter 4;
• As well as a compilation of the most significant data for advanced users → Appendix.
General information with regard to design, configuration, and operation of SIPROTEC 4 devices are set out in
the SIPROTEC 4 System Description /1/ SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
Target Audience
Protection-system engineers, commissioning engineers, persons entrusted with the setting, testing and main-
tenance of selective protection, automation and control equipment, and operating personnel in electrical
installations and power plants.
Scope
This manual applies to: SIPROTEC 4 Voltage and Frequency Protection 7RW80; Firmware-Version V4.6.
Indication of Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC Council Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within
specified voltage limits (Low-voltage Directive 2006/95 EC).
This conformity is proved by tests conducted by Siemens AG in accordance with the Council
Directive in agreement with the generic standards EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 for EMC
directive, and with the standard EN 60255-27 for the low-voltage directive.
The device has been designed and produced for industrial use.
The product conforms with the international standards of the series IEC 60255 and the
German standard VDE 0435.
Additional Standards IEEE Std C37.90 (see Chapter 4 "Technical Data")
This product is UL-certified according to the Technical Data. file E194016
[ul-schutz-7sx80-100310, 1, --_--]
SIPROTEC 4, 7RW80, Manual 3

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Preface
Additional Support
For questions about the system, please contact your Siemens sales partner.
Support
Our Customer Support Center provides a 24-hour service.
Phone: +49 (180) 524-7000
Fax: +49 (180) 524-2471
E-Mail: support.energy@siemens.com
Training Courses
Inquiries regarding individual training courses should be addressed to our Training Center:
Siemens AG
Siemens Power Academy TD
Humboldtstraße 59
90459 Nürnberg
Germany
Phone: +49 (911) 433-7415

Fax: +49 (911) 433-7929
E-Mail: poweracademy@siemens.com
Internet: www.siemens.com/poweracademy
Notes on Safety
This document is not a complete index of all safety measures required for operation of the equipment (module
or device). However, it comprises important information that must be followed for personal safety, as well as
to avoid material damage. Information is highlighted and illustrated as follows according to the degree of
danger:
! DANGER
DANGER means that death or severe injury will result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.
! WARNING
WARNING means that death or severe injury may result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.
! CAUTION
CAUTION means that medium-severe or slight injuries can occur if the specified measures are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid moderate or minor injuries.
4 SIPROTEC 4, 7RW80, Manual

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Preface
NOTICE
NOTICE means that property damage can result if the measures specified are not taken.
² Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid property damage.
NOTE
i Important information about the product, product handling or a certain section of the documentation
which must be given particular attention.
Qualified Electrical Engineering Personnel

Only qualified electrical engineering personnel may commission and operate the equipment (module, device)
described in this document. Qualified electrical engineering personnel in the sense of this manual are people
who can demonstrate technical qualifications as electrical technicians. These persons may commission,
isolate, ground and label devices, systems and circuits according to the standards of safety engineering.
Proper Use
The equipment (device, module) may be used only for such applications as set out in the catalogs and the
technical description, and only in combination with third-party equipment recommended and approved by
Siemens.
Problem-free and safe operation of the product depends on the following:
• Proper transport
• Proper storage, setup and installation
• Proper operation and maintenance

When electrical equipment is operated, hazardous voltages are inevitably present in certain parts. If proper
action is not taken, death, severe injury or property damage can result:
• The equipment must be grounded at the grounding terminal before any connections are made.
• All circuit components connected to the power supply may be subject to dangerous voltage.
• Hazardous voltages may be present in equipment even after the supply voltage has been disconnected
(capacitors can still be charged).
• Operation of equipment with exposed current-transformer circuits is prohibited. Before disconnecting the
equipment, ensure that the current-transformer circuits are short-circuited.
• The limiting values stated in the document must not be exceeded. This must also be considered during
testing and commissioning.
Typographic and Symbol Conventions

The following text formats are used when literal information from the device or to the device appear in the
text flow:
Parameter Names
Designators of configuration or function parameters which may appear word-for-word in the display of the
device or on the screen of a personal computer (with operation software DIGSI), are marked in bold letters in
monospace type style. The same applies to titles of menus.
1234A
Parameter addresses have the same character style as parameter names. Parameter addresses contain the
suffix A in the overview tables if the parameter can only be set in DIGSI via the option Display additional
settings.
Parameter Options
Possible settings of text parameters, which may appear word-for-word in the display of the device or on the
screen of a personal computer (with operation software DIGSI), are additionally written in italics. The same
applies to the options of the menus.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Preface
Indications
Designators for information, which may be output by the relay or required from other devices or from the
switch gear, are marked in a monospace type style in quotation marks.
Deviations may be permitted in drawings and tables when the type of designator can be obviously derived
from the illustration.
The following symbols are used in drawings:
Device-internal logical input signal
Device-internal logical output signal
Internal input signal of an analog quantity

External binary input signal with number (binary input,
input indication)
External binary output signal with number
(example of a value indication)
External binary output signal with number (device indication) used as
input signal
Example of a parameter switch designated FUNCTION with address

1234 and the possible settings ON and OFF
Besides these, graphical symbols are used in accordance with IEC 60617-12 and IEC 60617-13 or similar.
Some of the most frequently used are listed below:
Analog input variable
AND-gate operation of input values
OR-gate operation of input values
Exclusive OR gate (antivalence): output is active, if only one of the

inputs is active
Coincidence gate: output is active, if both inputs are active or inactive

at the same time
Dynamic inputs (edge-triggered) above with positive, below with

negative edge
Formation of one analog output signal from a number of analog input

signals
Limit stage with setting address and parameter designator (name)
Timer (pickup delay T, example adjustable) with setting address and

parameter designator (name)

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Preface
Timer (dropout delay T, example non-adjustable)
Dynamic triggered pulse timer T (monoflop)
Static memory (SR flipflop) with setting input (S), resetting input (R),
output (Q) and inverted output (Q), setting input dominant
Static memory (RS-flipflop) with setting input (S), resetting input (R),
output (Q) and inverted output (Q), resetting input dominant

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
Preface.......................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................15
1.1 Overall Operation..............................................................................................................16
1.2 Application Scope............................................................................................................. 18
1.3 Characteristics.................................................................................................................. 20
2 Functions.................................................................................................................................................... 23
2.1 General.............................................................................................................................24
2.1.1 Functional Scope......................................................................................................... 24
2.1.1.1 Functional Description........................................................................................... 24
2.1.1.2 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 24
2.1.1.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 25
2.1.2 Device, General Settings.............................................................................................. 26
2.1.2.2 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 27
2.1.2.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 27
2.1.2.4 Information List..................................................................................................... 27
2.1.3 Power System Data 1................................................................................................... 28
2.1.3.2 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 29
2.1.3.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 31
2.1.4 Oscillographic Fault Records........................................................................................ 32
2.1.4.2 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 33
2.1.4.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 34
2.1.5 Settings Groups........................................................................................................... 34
2.1.5.2 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 34
2.1.5.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 35
2.1.6 Power System Data 2................................................................................................... 35
2.1.6.2 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 35
2.1.6.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 35
2.1.7 EN100-Module............................................................................................................ 36
2.1.7.2 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 36
2.2 Voltage Protection 27, 59..................................................................................................37
2.2.1 Measurement Principle................................................................................................ 37

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
2.2.2 Overvoltage Protection 59........................................................................................... 38

2.2.3 Undervoltage Protection 27......................................................................................... 39
2.2.4 Setting Notes...............................................................................................................41
2.2.5 Settings.......................................................................................................................44
2.2.6 Information List........................................................................................................... 45
2.3 Frequency Protection 81 O/U.............................................................................................46
2.3.1 Functional Description................................................................................................. 46
2.3.2 Setting Notes...............................................................................................................47
2.3.3 Settings.......................................................................................................................48
2.4 Load Restoration............................................................................................................... 50
2.4.2 Setting Notes...............................................................................................................54
2.4.3 Settings.......................................................................................................................57
2.5 Supervision Functions....................................................................................................... 61
2.5.1 Measurement Supervision........................................................................................... 61
2.5.1.1 General..................................................................................................................61
2.5.1.2 Hardware Monitoring ............................................................................................ 61
2.5.1.3 Software Monitoring ............................................................................................. 61
2.5.1.4 Monitoring of the Transformer Circuits................................................................... 62
2.5.1.5 Broken Wire Monitoring of Voltage Transformer Circuits......................................... 63
2.5.1.6 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 64
2.5.1.7 Settings................................................................................................................. 64
2.5.2 Trip Circuit Supervision 74TC....................................................................................... 65
2.5.2.2 Setting Notes......................................................................................................... 68
2.5.2.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 68
2.5.3 Malfunction Responses of the Monitoring Functions.................................................... 69
2.6 Flexible Protection Functions.............................................................................................71
2.6.2 Setting Notes...............................................................................................................74
2.6.3 Settings.......................................................................................................................77
2.7 Synchrocheck................................................................................................................... 80
2.7.1 Allgemeines................................................................................................................ 80
2.7.2 Functional Sequence................................................................................................... 81
2.7.3 De-energized Switching............................................................................................... 82
2.7.4 Direct Command / Blocking.......................................................................................... 83
2.7.5 Interaction with Control and External Control...............................................................84
2.7.6 Setting Notes...............................................................................................................84
2.7.7 Settings.......................................................................................................................88
2.8 24 Overexcit. Protection (Volt/Hertz)................................................................................. 91
2.8.2 Setting Notes...............................................................................................................93

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
2.8.3 Settings.......................................................................................................................95
2.9 Jump of Voltage Vector..................................................................................................... 96
2.9.2 Setting Notes...............................................................................................................98
2.9.3 Settings.......................................................................................................................99
2.10 Phase Rotation................................................................................................................ 100
2.10.1 Functional Description............................................................................................... 100
2.10.2 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................100
2.11 Function Logic................................................................................................................ 101
2.11.1 Pickup Logic of the Entire Device................................................................................101
2.11.2 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device............................................................................. 101
2.11.3 Setting Notes.............................................................................................................102
2.12 Auxiliary Functions..........................................................................................................103
2.12.1 Message Processing...................................................................................................103
2.12.1.1 LED Displays and Binary Outputs (Output Relays).................................................. 103
2.12.1.2 Information on the Integrated Display (LCD) or Personal Computer....................... 103
2.12.1.3 Information to a Control Center............................................................................105
2.12.2 Statistics....................................................................................................................105
2.12.2.1 Functional Description......................................................................................... 105
2.12.2.2 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 105
2.12.2.3 Information List................................................................................................... 105
2.12.3 Measurement............................................................................................................ 105
2.12.3.1 Display of Measured Values.................................................................................. 106
2.12.3.2 Transfer of Measured Values................................................................................ 107
2.12.4 Min/Max Measurement Setup.................................................................................... 108
2.12.4.2 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 108
2.12.4.3 Settings............................................................................................................... 108
2.12.5 Set Points for Measured Values.................................................................................. 109
2.12.5.1 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 109
2.12.6 Set Points for Statistic................................................................................................ 109
2.12.6.2 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 109
2.12.7 Energy Metering........................................................................................................110
2.12.7.1 Setting Notes....................................................................................................... 110
2.12.7.2 Settings............................................................................................................... 110
2.12.8 Commissioning Aids.................................................................................................. 110
2.13 Breaker Control............................................................................................................... 112
2.13.1 Control Device........................................................................................................... 112
2.13.1.2 Informationsübersicht.......................................................................................... 113
2.13.2 Types of Commands.................................................................................................. 113

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
2.13.3 Command Sequence..................................................................................................113

2.13.4 Switchgear Interlocking............................................................................................. 114
2.13.5 Command Logging.................................................................................................... 118
2.14 Notes on Device Operation..............................................................................................120
2.14.1 Different operation.................................................................................................... 120
3 Mounting and Commissioning................................................................................................................. 123

3.1 Mounting and Connections............................................................................................. 124
3.1.1 Configuration Information......................................................................................... 124
3.1.2 Hardware Modifications.............................................................................................127
3.1.2.1 Disassembly......................................................................................................... 127
3.1.2.2 Connections of the Voltage Terminals...................................................................131
3.1.2.3 Interface Modules................................................................................................ 132
3.1.2.4 Reassembly.......................................................................................................... 134
3.1.3 Installation................................................................................................................ 135
3.1.3.1 General................................................................................................................135
3.1.3.2 Panel Flush Mounting...........................................................................................136
3.1.3.3 Cubicle Mounting.................................................................................................137
3.1.3.4 Panel Surface Mounting....................................................................................... 138
3.2 Checking Connections.....................................................................................................140
3.2.1 Checking the Data Connections of the Interfaces........................................................140
3.2.2 Checking the System Connections............................................................................. 142
3.3 Commissioning............................................................................................................... 144
3.3.1 Test Mode and Transmission Block............................................................................. 145
3.3.2 Testing the System Interface ..................................................................................... 145
3.3.3 Configuring Communication Modules........................................................................ 146
3.3.4 Checking the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs...................................................... 150
3.3.5 Testing User-Defined Functions..................................................................................152
3.3.6 Voltage and Phase Rotation Testing........................................................................... 152
3.3.7 Polarity Check for Voltage Input V3.............................................................................153
3.3.8 Trip/Close Tests for the Configured Operating Devices................................................ 155
3.3.9 Creating Oscillographic Recordings for Tests.............................................................. 156
3.4 Final Preparation of the Device........................................................................................ 157
4 Technical Data.......................................................................................................................................... 159

4.1 General Device Data........................................................................................................160
4.1.1 Analog Inputs............................................................................................................ 160
4.1.2 Auxiliary voltage........................................................................................................160
4.1.3 Binary Inputs and Outputs......................................................................................... 160
4.1.4 Communication Interfaces......................................................................................... 161
4.1.5 Electrical Tests...........................................................................................................164
4.1.6 Mechanical Tests....................................................................................................... 165
4.1.7 Climatic Stress Tests.................................................................................................. 166
4.1.8 Service Conditions..................................................................................................... 167
4.1.9 Constructive Design...................................................................................................167
4.1.10 UL certification conditions......................................................................................... 167

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Table of Contents
4.2 Voltage Protection.......................................................................................................... 169

4.3 Frequency Protection 81 O/U...........................................................................................171
4.4 Load Restoration............................................................................................................. 172
4.5 Flexible Protection Functions ..........................................................................................173
4.6 Synchrocheck 25 ............................................................................................................175
4.7 Overecxitation Protection 24........................................................................................... 177
4.8 Jump of Voltage Vector................................................................................................... 179
4.9 User-defined Functions (CFC).......................................................................................... 180
4.10 Auxiliary Functions..........................................................................................................185
4.11 Switching Device Control................................................................................................ 188
4.12 Dimensions.....................................................................................................................189
4.12.1 Panel Flush and Cubicle Mounting (Housing Size 1/6) ................................................ 189
4.12.2 Panel Surface Mounting (Housing Size 1/6) ............................................................... 190
4.12.3 Bottom view.............................................................................................................. 190
A Ordering Information and Accessories.....................................................................................................191

A.1 Ordering Information 7RW80 V4.6 ................................................................................. 192
A.2 Accessories..................................................................................................................... 195
B Terminal Assignments.............................................................................................................................. 197

B.1 7RW80 — Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Mounting...................................198
B.2 7RW80 — Housing for panel surface mounting................................................................199
C Connection Examples............................................................................................................................... 201

C.1 Connection Examples for Voltage Transformers............................................................... 202
D Default Settings and Protocol-dependent Functions............................................................................... 207

D.1 LEDs............................................................................................................................... 208
D.2 Binary Input.................................................................................................................... 209
D.3 Binary Output................................................................................................................. 210
D.4 Function Keys................................................................................................................. 211
D.5 Default Display................................................................................................................212
D.6 Protocol-dependent Functions.........................................................................................213
E Functions, Settings, Information..............................................................................................................215

E.1 Functional Scope............................................................................................................ 216
E.2 Settings.......................................................................................................................... 217
E.3 Information List.............................................................................................................. 226
E.4 Group Indications............................................................................................................246
E.5 Measured Values.............................................................................................................247
Literature.................................................................................................................................................. 249
Glossary.................................................................................................................................................... 251
Index.........................................................................................................................................................261

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
1 Introduction
The device family SIPROTEC 7RW80 devices is introduced in this section. An overview of the devices is
presented in their application, characteristics, and scope of functions.
1.1 Overall Operation 16
1.2 Application Scope 18
1.3 Characteristics 20

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Introduction
1.1 Overall Operation

The Voltage and Frequency protection SIPROTEC 7RW80 is equipped with a high performance microprocessor.
This provides numerical processing of all functions in the device, from the acquisition of the measured values
up to the output of commands to the circuit breakers. Figure 1-1 shows the basic structure of the device
7RW80.
Analog Inputs
The measuring inputs MI transform the voltages derived from the instrument transformers and match them to
the internal signal levels for processing in the device. Three voltage inputs are available in the MI section.
[hw-struktur-7rw80-100519, 1, en_US]
Figure 1-1 Hardware structure of the numerical Voltage and Frequency Protection Device 7RW80
Voltage inputs can either be used to measure the three phase-to-ground voltages, or two phase-to-phase
voltages and the displacement voltage (e–n voltage) or for any other voltage. It is also possible to connect two
phase-to-phase voltages in open-delta connection.
The analog input quantities are passed on to the input amplifiers (IA). The input amplifier IA element provides
a high-resistance termination for the input quantities. It consists of filters that are optimized for measured-
value processing with regard to bandwidth and processing speed.
The analog-to-digital (AD) transformer group consists of a an analog-to-digital converter and memory compo-
nents for the transmission of data to the microcomputer.
Microcomputer System
Apart from processing the measured values, the microcomputer system (μC) also executes the actual protec-
tion and control functions. They especially include:

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Introduction
• Filtering and preparation of the measured quantities
• Continuous monitoring of the measured quantities
• Monitoring of the pickup conditions for the individual protective functions
• Interrogation of limit values and sequences in time
• Control of signals for the logic functions
• Output of control commands for switching devices
• Recording of messages, fault data and fault values for analysis
• Management of the operating system and the associated functions such as data recording, real-time
clock, communication, interfaces, etc.
• The information is distributed via output amplifiers (OA).
Binary Inputs and Outputs

The computer system obtains external information through the binary input/output boards (inputs and
outputs). The computer system obtains information from the system (e.g remote resetting) or from external
equipment (e.g. blocking commands). These outputs include, in particular, trip commands to circuit breakers
and signals for the remote indication of important events and conditions.
Front Panel
Information such as messages related to events, states, measured values and the functional status of the
device are visualized by light-emitting diodes (LEDs) and a display screen (LCD) on the front panel.
Integrated control and numeric keys in conjunction with the LCD enable interaction with the remote device.
These elements can be used to access the device for information such as configuration and setting parame-
ters. Similarly, setting parameters can be accessed and changed if needed.
In addition, control of circuit breakers and other equipment is possible from the front panel of the device.
Interfaces
Communication with a PC can be implemented via the USB DIGSI interface using the DIGSI software, allowing
all device functions to be easily executed.
Communication with a PC is also possible via port A (Ethernet interface) and port B (System/Service interface)
using DIGSI.
In addition to the device communication via DIGSI, port B can also be used to transmit all device data to a
central evaluator or a control center. This interface may be provided with various protocols and physical trans-
mission schemes to suit the particular application.
Power Supply
A power supply unit (Vaux or PS) delivers power to the functional units using the different voltage levels.
Voltage dips may occur if the voltage supply system (substation battery) becomes short-circuited. Usually,
they are bridged by a capacitor (see also Technical Data).
A buffer battery is located under the flap at the lower end of the front cover.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Introduction
1.2 Application Scope

The digital voltage and frequency protection SIPROTEC 4 7RW80 is a versatile device designed for protection,
control, and monitoring of transformers, electrical machines and distribution systems.
The device can be used for
• System decoupling or for load shedding if ever there is a risk of a system collapse as a result of inadmis-
sibly large frequency drops
• Monitoring voltage and frequency thresholds

Voltage, frequency and overexcitation protection can be used to protect generators and transformers in the
event of
• Defective voltage control or defective frequency control
• Full load rejection
• Islanding generation systems.
Protection Functions
Multilevel voltage and frequency protection is the basic function of the device.
Further protection functions included are load restoration, synchrocheck, overexcitation protection, vector
jump and flexible protective functions.
Control Functions
The device provides a control function which can be accomplished for activating and deactivating the switch-
gear via operator buttons, port B, binary inputs and - using a PC and the DIGSI software - via the front inter-
face.
The status of the primary equipment can be transmitted to the device via auxiliary contacts connected to
binary inputs. The present status (or position) of the primary equipment can be displayed on the device, and
used for interlocking or alarm condition monitoring. The number of operating equipments to be switched is
limited by the binary inputs and outputs available in the device or the binary inputs and outputs allocated for
the switch position indications. Depending on the primary equipment being controlled, one binary input
(single point indication) or two binary inputs (double point indication) may be used for this process.
The capability of switching primary equipment can be restricted by a setting associated with switching
authority (Remote or Local), and by the operating mode (interlocked/non-interlocked, with or without pass-
word request).
Processing of interlocking conditions for switching (e.g. switchgear interlocking) can be established with the
aid of integrated, user-configurable logic functions.
Messages and Measured Values; Recording of Event and Fault Data

The operational indications provide information about conditions in the power system and the device. Meas-
urement quantities and values that are calculated can be displayed locally and communicated via the serial
interfaces.
Device messages can be assigned to a number of LEDs on the front cover (allocatable), can be externally
processed via output contacts (allocatable), linked with user-definable logic functions and/or issued via serial
interfaces.
During a fault (system fault) important events and changes in conditions are saved in fault protocols (Event
Log or Trip Log). Instantaneous fault values are also saved in the device and may be analyzed subsequently.
Communication
The following interfaces are available for communication with external operating, control and memory
systems.
The USB DIGSI interface on the front cover serves for local communication with a PC. By means of the
SIPROTEC 4 operating software DIGSI, all operational and evaluation tasks can be executed via this operator
interface, such as specifying and modifying configuration parameters and settings, configuring user-specific

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Introduction
logic functions, retrieving operational messages and measured values, inquiring device conditions and meas-
ured values, issuing control commands.
Depending on the ordered variant, additional interfaces are located at the bottom of the device. They serve for
establishing extensive communication with other digital operating, control and memory components:
Port A serves for DIGSI communication directly on the device or via network.
Port B serves for central communication between the device and a control center. It can be operated via data
lines or fiber optic cables. For the data transfer, there are standard protocols in accordance with IEC 60870-5-
103 available. The integration of the devices into the SINAUT LSA and SICAM automation systems can also be
implemented with this profile.
Alternatively, additional connection options are available with PROFIBUS DP and the DNP3.0 and MODBUS
protocols. If an EN100 module is available, you can use the protocol IEC 61850.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Introduction
1.3 Characteristics
1.3 Characteristics
General Characteristics
• Powerful 32-bit microprocessor system
• Complete digital processing and control of measured values, from the sampling of the analog input quan-
tities to the initiation of outputs, for example, tripping or closing circuit breakers or other switchgear
devices
• Total electrical separation between the internal processing stages of the device and the external trans-
former, control, and DC supply circuits of the system because of the design of the binary inputs, outputs,
and the DC or AC converters
• Easy device operation through an integrated operator panel or by means of a connected personal
computer running DIGSI
• Continuous calculation and display of measured and metered values on the front of the device
• Storage of min./max. measured values (slave pointer function) and storage of long-term mean values
• Recording of event and fault data for the last 8 system faults (fault in a network) with real-time informa-
tion as well as instantaneous values for fault recording for a maximum time range of 20 s
• Constant monitoring of the measured quantities, as well as continuous self-diagnostics covering the
hardware and software
• Communication with SCADA or substation controller equipment via serial interfaces through the choice
of data cable, modem, or optical fibers
• Battery-buffered clock which can be synchronized via a synchronization signal at the binary input or via a
protocol
• Statistics: Recording of the number of trip signals instigated by the device.
• Commissioning aids such as connection and direction check, status indication of all binary inputs and
outputs, easy testing of port B, and influencing of information at port B during test operation.
Voltage Protection 27, 59
• Three-element undervoltage detection via the positive sequence system of the voltages, phase-to-phase
or phase-ground voltages
• Separate overvoltage detection of the voltages applied or detection of the positive or negative sequence
component of the voltages
• Settable dropout ratio for all elements of the undervoltage and overvoltage protection
• User-defined characteristic
Frequency Protection 81 O/U
• Monitoring of falling below (f<) and/or exceeding (f>) with 4 frequency limits and time delays that are
independently adjustable
• Insensitive to harmonics and abrupt phase angle changes
• Adjustable undervoltage threshold.
Load Restoration
• 4 separately adjustable load restoration stages
• Individually assignable low frequency stages, which start the load restoration stage (1 to 4 for each load
restoration element)
• Settable dropout ratio for all stages of the load restoration
• Monitoring of the settable restoration cycles (no ON/OFF chattering)

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Introduction
1.3 Characteristics
Monitoring Functions
• Increased reliability due to monitoring of the internal measurement circuits as well as the hardware and
software
• Monitoring of the current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits using sum and
symmetry supervision with optional protection function blocking
• Broken-wire Monitoring of Voltage Transformer Circuits
• Trip circuit monitoring possible
• Phase rotation check.
Flexible Protective Functions
• Up to 20 customizable protection functions with three-phase or single-phase operation
• Any calculated or directly measured quantity can be evaluated on principle
• Standard protection logic with definite time characteristic
• Internal and configurable pickup and dropout delay
• Modifiable message texts.
Synchrocheck
• Check of the synchronism conditions or de-energized state before manual closing of the circuit breaker
• Fast measurement of the voltage difference ΔV, the phase angle difference Δϕ and the frequency differ-
ence Δf
• Setable minimum and maximum voltage
• Measurement also possible via transformer without external intermediate matching transformer
• Measuring voltages optionally phase–to–phase or phase–to–ground.
Overecxitation Protection
• Calculation of the V/f ratio V/f
• Adjustable warning and tripping stage
• Standard characteristic or arbitrary trip characteristic selectable for calculation of the thermal stress.
Jump of Voltage Vector
• Sensitive phase jump detection to be used for network disconnection.
Phase Rotation
• Selectable ABC or ACB by setting (static) or binary input (dynamic).
User Defined Functions
• Freely programmable linking of internal and external signals in order to implement user-defined logic
functions
• All standard logic functions (AND, OR, NOT, EXCLUSIVE-OR, etc.)
• Time delays and limit value interrogations
• Processing of measured values, including zero suppression, adding a knee curve for a transducer input,
and live-zero monitoring.
• Linking of multiple devices for load restoration with prioritization of the stages

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Introduction
1.3 Characteristics
Breaker Control
• Switching devices can be opened and closed manually using control keys, programmable function keys,
via port B (e.g. of SICAM or LSA), or via the user interface (using a personal computer and the DIGSI oper-
ating software)

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
2 Functions
This chapter describes the numerous functions available on the SIPROTEC 4 device 7RW80. It shows the
setting possibilities for each function in maximum configuration. Information with regard to the determina-
tion of setting values as well as formulas, if required, are also provided.
Based on the following information, it can also be determined which of the provided functions should be
used.
2.1 General 24
2.2 Voltage Protection 27, 59 37
2.3 Frequency Protection 81 O/U 46
2.4 Load Restoration 50
2.5 Supervision Functions 61
2.6 Flexible Protection Functions 71
2.7 Synchrocheck 80
2.8 24 Overexcit. Protection (Volt/Hertz) 91
2.9 Jump of Voltage Vector 96
2.10 Phase Rotation 100
2.11 Function Logic 101
2.12 Auxiliary Functions 103
2.13 Breaker Control 112
2.14 Notes on Device Operation 120

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.1 General
2.1 General
The settings associated with the various device functions can be modified using the operating or service inter-
face in DIGSI in conjunction with a personal computer. Some parameters can also be changed using the
controls on the front panel of the device. The procedure is described in detail in the SIPROTEC System Descrip-
tion /1/ SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
2.1.1 Functional Scope
The 7RW80 relay contains protection functions as well as auxiliary functions. The hardware and firmware is
designed for this scope of functions. Additionally, the control functions can be matched to the system require-
ments. Individual functions can be enabled or disabled during the configuration procedure. The interaction of
functions may also be modified.
2.1.1.1 Functional Description
Setting the Functional Scope

The available protection and additional functions can be configured as Enabled or Disabled. For individual
functions, a choice between several alternatives may be possible, as described below.
Functions configured as Disabled are not processed by the 7RW80. There are no messages and corre-
sponding settings (functions, limit values) queried during configuration.
NOTE
i Available functions and default settings are depending on the order variant of the relay (see A Ordering
Information and Accessories).
2.1.1.2 Setting Notes
Setting the Functional Scope

Your protection device is configured using the DIGSI software. Connect your personal computer either to the
USB port on the device front or to port A or port B on the bottom side of the device depending on the device
version (ordering code). The operation via DIGSI is explained in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
The Device Configuration dialog box allows you to adjust your device to the specific system conditions.
Password no. 7 is required (for parameter set) for changing configuration parameters in the device. Without
the password the settings can only be read but not edited and transmitted to the device.
Special Features
Most settings are self-explanatory. The special cases are described in the following.
If you want to use the setting group change function, set address 103 Grp Chge OPTION to Enabled. In
this case, you can select up to four different groups of function parameters between which you can switch
quickly and conveniently during operation. Only one setting group can be used when selecting the option
Disabled.
The synchronization function is activated in address 161 25 Function 1 by the setting SYNCHROCHECK or it
is set to Disabled.
Under address 182 74 Trip Ct Supv it can be selected whether the trip-circuit supervision works with two
(2 Binary Inputs) or only one binary input (1 Binary Input), or whether the function is configured
Disabled.
In address 617 ServiProt (CM) you can specify for which purpose port B is used. T103 means that the
device is connected to a control and protection facility via serial port, DIGSI means that you are using the port
to connect DIGSI or you are not using port B (Disabled).
The flexible protection functions can be configured via parameter FLEXIBLE FUNC.. You can create up to 20
flexible functions by setting a checkmark in front of the desired function. If the checkmark of a function is

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.1 General
removed, all settings and configurations made previously will be lost. After re-selecting the function, all
settings and configurations are in default setting. Setting of the flexible function is done in DIGSI under
“Parameters”, “Additional Functions” and “Settings”. The configuration is done, as usual, under “Parameters”
and “Configuration”.
2.1.1.3 Settings
Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments

103 Grp Chge OPTION Disabled Disabled Setting Group Change Option
Enabled
104 OSC. FAULT REC. Disabled Enabled Oscillographic Fault Records
Enabled
143 24 V/f Disabled Disabled 24 Overexcit. Protection (Volt/
Enabled Hertz)
146 VECTOR JUMP Disabled Disabled Jump of Voltage Vector
Enabled
150 27/59 Disabled Enabled 27, 59 Under/Overvoltage Protec-
Enabled tion
152 VT BROKEN WIRE Disabled Enabled VT broken wire supervision
Enabled
154 81 O/U Disabled Enabled 81 Over/Underfrequency Protec-
Enabled tion
155 Load Restore Disabled Disabled Load Restoration
Enabled
161 25 Function 1 Disabled Disabled 25 Function group 1
SYNCHROCHECK
182 74 Trip Ct Supv Disabled Disabled 74TC Trip Circuit Supervision
2 Binary Inputs
1 Binary Input
617 ServiProt (CM) Disabled T103 Port B usage
T103
DIGSI

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.1 General

- FLEXIBLE FCT. 1...20 Flexible Function 01 Please select Flexible Functions 1...20
Flexible Function 02
2.1.2 Device, General Settings
The device requires some general information. This may be, for example, the type of annunciation to be
issued in the event of an occurrence of a power system fault.
Command-Dependent Messages "No Trip – No Flag"

The storage of indications assigned to local LEDs and the availability of spontaneous indications can be made
dependent on whether the device has issued a trip command. This information is then not issued if during a
system disturbance one or more protection functions have picked up but the 7RW80 did not trip because the
fault was cleared by another device (e.g. on another line). These messages are then limited to faults in the line
to be protected.
The following figure illustrates the generation of the reset command for stored indications. The instant the
device drops out, the presetting of parameter 610 FltDisp.LED/LCD decides whether the new fault
remains stored or is reset.
[dw_ruecksetzbefehl-fuer-n-speicher-led-lcd-meld, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-1 Creation of the reset command for the latched LED and LCD messages

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.1 General
Spontaneous Messages on the Display

You can determine whether or not the most important data of a fault event is displayed automatically after
the fault has occurred (see also Subsection "Fault Messages" in Section "Auxiliary Functions").
Fault Messages
A new pickup of a protection function generally turns off any previously set light displays so that only the
latest fault is displayed at any one time. It can be selected whether the stored LED displays and the sponta-
neous messages on the display appear after the new pickup or only after a new trip signal is issued. In order to
select the desired mode of display, select the Device submenu in the SETTINGS menu. Under address 610
FltDisp.LED/LCD the two options Target on PU and Target on TRIP ("No trip – no flag") can be
selected.
For devices with graphic display, use parameter 611 Spont. FltDisp. to specify whether a spontaneous
fault message should appear automatically on the display (YES) or not (NO). For devices with text display such
indications will appear after a system fault in any case.
Selection of Default Display

The start page of the default display appearing after startup of the device can be selected in the device data
via parameter640 Start image DD. The pages available for each device version are listed in the Appendix
D Default Settings and Protocol-dependent Functions.
2.1.2.3 Settings

610 FltDisp.LED/LCD Target on PU Target on PU Fault Display on LED / LCD
Target on TRIP
611 Spont. FltDisp. YES NO Spontaneous display of flt.annun-
NO ciations
640 Start image DD image 1 image 1 Start image Default Display
image 2
image 3
2.1.2.4 Information List
No. Information Type of Comments

Informa-
tion
- >Light on SP >Back Light on
- Reset LED IntSP Reset LED
- DataStop IntSP Stop data transmission
- Test mode IntSP Test mode
- Feeder gnd IntSP Feeder GROUNDED
- Brk OPENED IntSP Breaker OPENED
- HWTestMod IntSP Hardware Test Mode
- SynchClock IntSP_Ev Clock Synchronization
- Distur.CFC OUT Disturbance CFC
1 Not configured SP No Function configured
2 Non Existent SP Function Not Available
3 >Time Synch SP_Ev >Synchronize Internal Real Time Clock
5 >Reset LED SP >Reset LED
15 >Test mode SP >Test mode

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.1 General

Informa-
tion
16 >DataStop SP >Stop data transmission
51 Device OK OUT Device is Operational and Protecting
52 ProtActive IntSP At Least 1 Protection Funct. is Active
55 Reset Device OUT Reset Device
56 Initial Start OUT Initial Start of Device
67 Resume OUT Resume
68 Clock SyncError OUT Clock Synchronization Error
69 DayLightSavTime OUT Daylight Saving Time
70 Settings Calc. OUT Setting calculation is running
71 Settings Check OUT Settings Check
72 Level-2 change OUT Level-2 change
73 Local change OUT Local setting change
110 Event Lost OUT_Ev Event lost
113 Flag Lost OUT Flag Lost
125 Chatter ON OUT Chatter ON
140 Error Sum Alarm OUT Error with a summary alarm
160 Alarm Sum Event OUT Alarm Summary Event
177 Fail Battery OUT Failure: Battery empty
178 I/O-Board error OUT I/O-Board Error
181 Error A/D-conv. OUT Error: A/D converter
191 Error Offset OUT Error: Offset
193 Alarm NO calibr OUT Alarm: NO calibration data available
236.2127 BLK. Flex.Fct. IntSP BLOCK Flexible Function
301 Pow.Sys.Flt. OUT Power System fault
302 Fault Event OUT Fault Event
303 sens Gnd flt OUT sensitive Ground fault
320 Warn Mem. Data OUT Warn: Limit of Memory Data exceeded
321 Warn Mem. Para. OUT Warn: Limit of Memory Parameter exceeded
322 Warn Mem. Oper. OUT Warn: Limit of Memory Operation exceeded
323 Warn Mem. New OUT Warn: Limit of Memory New exceeded
502 Relay Drop Out SP Relay Drop Out
510 Relay CLOSE SP General CLOSE of relay
545 PU Time VI Time from Pickup to drop out
546 TRIP Time VI Time from Pickup to TRIP
10080 Error Ext I/O OUT Error Extension I/O
10081 Error Ethernet OUT Error Ethernet
10083 Error Basic I/O OUT Error Basic I/O
2.1.3 Power System Data 1

The device requires certain basic data regarding the protected equipment so that the device can adapt to its
desired application. These may be, for instance, nominal power system and transformer data, measured quan-
tity polarities and their physical connections, breaker properties (where applicable) etc. There are also certain
parameters that are common to all functions, i.e. not associated with a specific protection, control or moni-
toring function. The following section discusses these parameters.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.1 General
General
Some P.System Data 1 can be entered directly at the device. See Section 2.14 Notes on Device Operation
for more information regarding this topic.
In DIGSI double-click Settings to open the corresponding dialog box. In doing so, a dialog box with tabs will
open under P.System Data 1 where individual parameters can be configured. The following descriptions
are therefore structured according to these tabs.
Rated Frequency (Power System)

The nominal frequency of the system is set under the Address 214 Rated Frequency. The factory pre-
setting in accordance with the model need only be changed if the device will be employed for a purpose other
than that which was planned when ordering.
In the US device versions (ordering data position 10= C), parameter 214 is preset to 60 Hz. 214.
Voltage Connection (Power System)

Address 213 specifies how the voltage transformers are connected.
VT Connect. 3ph = Van, Vbn, Vcn means that the three phase voltages are wye connected, i.e. the
three phase-to-ground voltages are measured.ground.
VT Connect. 3ph = Vab, Vbc, VGnd means that two phase-to-phase voltages (open delta voltage) and
the displacement voltage VGND are connected.
VT Connect. 3ph = Vab, Vbc means that two phase-to-phase voltages (open delta voltage) are
connected. The third voltage transformer of the device is not used.
VT Connect. 3ph = Vab, Vbc, Vx means that two phase-to-phase voltages (open delta voltage) are
connected. Furthermore, any third voltage Vx is connected that is used exclusively for the flexible protection
functions. The transformer nominal voltages for Vx are set at address 232 and 233.
VT Connect. 3ph = Vab, Vbc, VSyn means that two phase-to-phase voltages (open delta voltage) and
the reference voltage for VSYN are connected. This setting is enabled if the synchronization function of the
device is used.
VT Connect. 3ph = Vph-g, VSyn is used if the synchronization function of the device is used and only
phase-to-ground voltages are available for the protected object to be synchronized. One of these voltages is
connected to the first voltage transformer; the reference voltage VSYN is connected to the third voltage trans-
former.
The selection of the voltage transformer connection affects the operation of all device functions that require
voltage input.
The settings Vab, Vbc or Vab, Vbc, Vx or Vab, Vbc, VSyn or Vph-g, VSyn do not allow determining
the zero sequence voltage. The associated protection functions are inactive in this case.
The table gives an overview of the functions that can be activated for the corresponding connection type
(depends also on the ordering number). The functions which are not shown are available for all connection
types.
Table 2-1 Connection Types of the Voltage Transformers
Connection type Synchronization

Van, Vbn, Vcn no
Vab, Vbc, VGnd no
Vab, Vbc no
Vab, Vbc, Vx no
Vab, Vbc, VSyn yes
Vph-g, VSyn yes
Measured values, which due to the chosen voltage connection cannot be calculated, will be displayed as dots.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.1 General
The Appendix provides some connection examples for all connection types atC Connection Examples.
Nominal Values of Voltage Transformers (VTs)

At addresses 202 Vnom PRIMARY and 203 Vnom SECONDARY, information is entered regarding the primary
nominal voltage and secondary nominal voltage (phase-to-phase) of the connected voltage transformers.
Transformation Ratio of Voltage Transformers (VTs)

Address 206 Vph / Vdelta informs the device of the adjustment factor between the phase voltage and the
displacement voltage. This information is relevant for the processing of ground faults (in grounded systems
and ungrounded systems), for the operational measured value VN and measured-variable monitoring.
If the voltage transformer set provides open delta windings and if these windings are connected to the device,
this must be specified accordingly in address 213 (see above margin heading “Voltage Connection”). Since the
voltage transformer ratio is normally as follows:
[uebersetzung-spannungswandler-020313-kn, 1, en_US]
the factor Vph/VN (secondary voltage, address 206 Vph / Vdelta) must be set to 3/ √3 = √3 = 1.73 which
must be used if the VN voltage is connected. For other transformation ratios, i.e. the formation of the
displacement voltage via an interconnected transformer set, the factor must be corrected accordingly.
Please take into consideration that also the calculated secondary V0-voltage is divided by the value set in
address 206. Thus, even if the V0-voltage is not connected, address 206 has an impact on the secondary
operational measured value VN.
If Vab, Vbc, VGnd is selected as voltage connection type, parameter Vph / Vdelta is used to calculate
the phase-to-ground voltages and is therefore important for the protection function. With voltage connection
type Van, Vbn, Vcn, this parameter is used only to calculate the operational measured value of the secon-
dary voltage VN.
Trip and Close Command Duration (Breaker)

In address 210 the minimum trip command duration TMin TRIP CMD is set. This setting applies to all protec-
tion functions that can initiate tripping.
In address 211 the maximum close command duration TMax CLOSE CMD is set. It applies to the integrated
reclosing function. It must be set long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker has securely closed. An exces-
sive duration causes no problem since the closing command is interrupted in the event another trip is initiated
by a protection function.
Pickup Thresholds of the Binary Inputs (Thresholds BI)

At address 220 Threshold BI 1 to 226 Threshold BI 7 you can set the pickup thresholds of the binary
inputs of the device. The settings Thresh. BI 176V, Thresh. BI 88V or Thresh. BI 19V are possible.
Voltage Protection (Protection Operating Quantities)

In a three-phase connection, the fundamental harmonic of the three phase-to-phase voltages (Vphph) or
phase-ground voltages (Vph-n) or the positive sequence voltage (V1) or the negative sequence voltage (V2)
is supplied to the overvoltage protection elements.
In three-phase connection, undervoltage protection relies either on the positive sequence voltage (V1) or the
phase-to-phase voltages (Vphph) or the phase-to-ground voltages (Vph-n).
This is configured by setting the parameter value in address 614 OP. QUANTITY 59 and 615 OP. QUAN-
TITY 27.
Via Parameter 5009 59 Phases and 5109 27 Phases you may configure which measured quantity is to be
evaluated (All phases or Largest phase or Smallest phase).

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.1 General
With single-phase voltage transformers, a direct comparison of the measured quantities with the threshold
values is carried out and the parameterization of the characteristic quantity switchover is ignored.
NOTE
i If parameter 213 VT Connect. 3ph is set to Vph-g, VSyn, the voltage measured by voltage trans-
former 1 is always used for voltage protection. Then parameters 614 and 615 are not available.
NOTE
i If parameter 213 VT Connect. 3ph is set to Vab, Vbc, VSyn or Vab, Vbc or Vab, Vbc, Vx, the
setting option Vph-n for parameter 614 and 615 is not available.
2.1.3.3 Settings
Addresses which have an appended “A” can only be changed with DIGSI, under “Additional Settings”.
202 Vnom PRIMARY 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 20.00 kV Rated Primary Voltage
203 Vnom SECONDARY 34 .. 225 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage (L-L)
206A Vph / Vdelta 1.00 .. 3.00 1.73 Matching ratio Phase-VT To Open-
Delta-VT
209 PHASE SEQ. ABC ABC Phase Sequence
ACB
210A TMin TRIP CMD 0.01 .. 32.00 sec 0.15 sec Minimum TRIP Command Duration
211A TMax CLOSE CMD 0.01 .. 32.00 sec 1.00 sec Maximum Close Command Dura-
tion
213 VT Connect. 3ph Van, Vbn, Vcn Van, Vbn, Vcn VT Connection, three-phase
Vab, Vbc, VGnd
Vab, Vbc, VSyn
Vab, Vbc
Vph-g, VSyn
Vab, Vbc, Vx
214 Rated Frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz Rated Frequency
60 Hz
220 Threshold BI 1 Thresh. BI 176V Thresh. BI 176V Threshold for Binary Input 1
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.1 General

Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
232 VXnom PRIMARY 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 20.00 kV Rated Primary Voltage X
233 VXnom SECONDARY 100 .. 225 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage X
614A OP. QUANTITY 59 Vphph Vphph Opera. Quantity for 59 Overvolt.
Vph-n Prot.
V1
V2
615A OP. QUANTITY 27 V1 V1 Opera. Quantity for 27 Undervolt.
Vphph Prot.
Vph-n

Informa-
tion
5145 >Reverse Rot. SP >Reverse Phase Rotation
5147 Rotation ABC OUT Phase rotation ABC
5148 Rotation ACB OUT Phase rotation ACB
2.1.4 Oscillographic Fault Records
The Multifunctional Protection with Control 7RW80 is equipped with a fault record memory. The instanta-
neous values of the measured values
vA, vB, vC, vA2, vB3, vC1, vN, vX, vph-n, vSYN
(voltages depending on connection) are sampled at intervals of 1.0 ms (at 50 Hz) and stored in a revolving
buffer (20 samples per cycle). In the event of a fault, the data are recorded for a set period of time, but not for
more than 5 seconds. A maximum of 8 faults can be recorded in this buffer. The fault record memory is auto-
matically updated with every new fault, so no acknowledgment for previously recorded faults is required. In
addition to protection pickup, the recording of the fault data can also be started via a binary input or via the
serial interface.
The data of a fault event can be read out via the device interface and evaluated with the help of the SIGRA 4
graphic analysis software. SIGRA 4 graphically represents the data recorded during the fault event and also
calculates additional information from the measured values. Currents and voltages can be presented either as
primary or as secondary values. Signals are additionally recorded as binary tracks (marks), e.g. "pickup", "trip".
If port B of the device has been configured correspondingly, the fault record data can be imported by a central
controller via this interface and evaluated. Currents and voltages are prepared for a graphic representation.
Signals are additionally recorded as binary tracks (marks), e.g. "pickup", "trip".
The retrieval of the fault data by the central controller takes place automatically either after each protection
pickup or after a tipping.
Depending on the selected type of connection of the voltage transformers (address 213 VT Connect. 3ph),
the following measured values are recorded in the fault record:

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.1 General
Voltage connection
Van, Vbn, Vcn Vab, Vbc, Vab, Vbc Vab, Vbc, Vx Vab, Vbc, VSyn Vph-g, VSyn
VGnd
vAB yes yes yes yes yes
vBC yes yes yes yes yes
vCA yes yes yes yes yes
vA yes yes
vB yes yes
vC yes yes
v yes
ven yes yes
vSYN yes yes
vx yes
NOTE
i The signals used for the binary tracks can be allocated in DIGSI.
Configuration
Fault recording (waveform capture) will only take place if address 104 OSC. FAULT REC. is set to Enabled.
Other settings pertaining to fault recording (waveform capture) are found in the Osc. Fault Rec.
submenu of the SETTINGS menu. Waveform capture makes a distinction between the trigger instant for an
oscillographic record and the criterion to save the record (address 401 WAVEFORMTRIGGER). Normally, the
trigger is the pickup of a protection element, i.e. the time 0 is defined as the instant the first protection func-
tion picks up. The criterion for saving may be both the device pickup (Save w. Pickup) or the device trip
(Save w. TRIP). A trip command issued by the device can also be used as trigger instant (Start w.
TRIP), in this case it is also the saving criterion.
A fault event starts with the pickup by any protection function and ends when the last pickup of a protection
function has dropped out. Usually this is also the extent of a fault recording (address 402 WAVEFORM DATA =
Fault event). If automatic reclosing is performed by external equipments, the entire system fault — with
several reclosing attempts if necessary — can be recorded until the fault has been cleared for good (address
402 WAVEFORM DATA = Pow.Sys.Flt.). This facilitates the representation of the entire system fault history,
but also consumes storage capacity during the automatic reclosing dead time(s).
The actual storage time begins at the pre-fault time PRE. TRIG. TIME (address 404) ahead of the reference
instant, and ends at the post-fault time POST REC. TIME (address 405) after the storage criterion has reset.
The maximum storage duration of each fault record (MAX. LENGTH) is entered at address 403. Recording per
fault must not exceed 5 seconds. In maximum 8 records can be saved altogether with a maximum total time
of 20 s 18 s .
An oscillographic record can be triggered by a status change of a binary input, or from a PC via the operator
interface. Storage is then triggered dynamically. The length of the fault recording is set in address 406 BinIn
CAPT.TIME (but not longer than MAX. LENGTH, address 403). Pre-fault and post-fault times will add to this.
If the binary input time is set to ∞, the length of the record equals the time that the binary input is activated
(static), but not longer than the MAX. LENGTH (address 403).

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.1 General
2.1.4.3 Settings

401 WAVEFORMTRIGGER Save w. Pickup Save w. Pickup Waveform Capture
Save w. TRIP
Start w. TRIP
402 WAVEFORM DATA Fault event Fault event Scope of Waveform Data
Pow.Sys.Flt.
403 MAX. LENGTH 0.30 .. 5.00 sec 2.00 sec Max. length of a Waveform
Capture Record
404 PRE. TRIG. TIME 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.10 sec Captured Waveform Prior to
Trigger
405 POST REC. TIME 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.10 sec Captured Waveform after Event
406 BinIn CAPT.TIME 0.10 .. 5.00 sec 0.50 sec Capture Time via Binary Input

Informa-
tion
- FltRecSta IntSP Fault Recording Start
4 >Trig.Wave.Cap. SP >Trigger Waveform Capture
203 Wave. deleted OUT_Ev Waveform data deleted
30053 Fault rec. run. OUT Fault recording is running
2.1.5 Settings Groups
Up to four different setting groups can be created for establishing the device's function settings.
Changing Setting Groups

During operation the user can switch back and forth setting groups locally, via the operator panel, binary
inputs (if so configured), the service interface using a personal computer, or via the system interface. For
reasons of safety it is not possible to change between setting groups during a power system fault.
A setting group includes the setting values for all functions that have been selected as Enabled during
configuration (see Section 2.1.1.2 Setting Notes). In 7RW80 relays, four independent setting groups (A to D)
are available. While setting values may vary, the selected functions of each setting group remain the same.
General
If setting group change option is not required, Group A is the default selection. Then, the rest of this section is
not applicable.
If the changeover option is desired, group changeover must be set to Grp Chge OPTION = Enabled
(address 103) when the function extent is configured. For the setting of the function parameters, each of the
required setting groups A to D (a maximum of 4) must be configured in sequence. The SIPROTEC 4 System
Description gives further information on how to copy setting groups or reset them to their status at delivery
and also how to change from one setting group to another.
Section 3.1 Mounting and Connections of this manual tells you how to change between several setting groups
externally via binary inputs.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.1 General
2.1.5.3 Settings

302 CHANGE Group A Group A Change to Another Setting Group
Group B
Group C
Group D
Binary Input
Protocol

Informa-
tion
- P-GrpA act IntSP Setting Group A is active
- P-GrpB act IntSP Setting Group B is active
- P-GrpC act IntSP Setting Group C is active
- P-GrpD act IntSP Setting Group D is active
7 >Set Group Bit0 SP >Setting Group Select Bit 0
8 >Set Group Bit1 SP >Setting Group Select Bit 1
2.1.6 Power System Data 2

The general protection data (P.System Data 2) include settings associated with all functions rather than a
specific protection or monitoring function. In contrast to the P.System Data 1 as discussed before, they
can be changed with the setting group.
Applications
When the primary reference voltage and the primary reference current of the protected object are set, the
device is able to calculate and output the operational measured value percentage.
Rated Values of the System

At address 1101 FullScaleVolt. the reference voltage (phase-to-phase) of the monitored equipment is
entered. If these reference values match the primary values of the voltage transformer, they correspond to the
setting at Address 202 (Section 2.1.3.2 Setting Notes). They are generally used to show values referenced to
full scale.
2.1.6.3 Settings

1101 FullScaleVolt. 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 20.00 kV Measurem:FullScale-
Voltage(Equipm.rating)

Informa-
tion
126 ProtON/OFF IntSP Protection ON/OFF (via system port)

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.1 General

Informa-
tion
356 >Manual Close SP >Manual close signal
501 Relay PICKUP OUT Relay PICKUP
511 Relay TRIP OUT Relay GENERAL TRIP command
561 Man.Clos.Detect OUT Manual close signal detected
4601 >52-a SP >52-a contact (OPEN, if bkr is open)
4602 >52-b SP >52-b contact (OPEN, if bkr is closed)
2.1.7 EN100-Module

The Ethernet EN100-Modul enables integration of the 7RW80 in 100-Mbit communication networks in control
and automation systems with the protocols according to IEC 61850 standard. This standard permits uniform
communication of the devices without gateways and protocol converters. Even when installed in heteroge-
neous environments, SIPROTEC 4 relays therefore provide for open and interoperable operation. Parallel to the
process control integration of the device, this interface can also be used for communication with DIGSI and for
inter-relay communication via GOOSE.
Interface Selection
No special settings are required for operating the Ethernet system interface module (IEC 1850, Ethernet
EN100-Modul). If the ordered version of the device is equipped with such a module, it is automatically allo-
cated to the interface available for it, namely Port B.

Informa-
tion
009.0100 Failure Modul IntSP Failure EN100 Modul
009.0101 Fail Ch1 IntSP Failure EN100 Link Channel 1 (Ch1)
009.0102 Fail Ch2 IntSP Failure EN100 Link Channel 2 (Ch2)

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.2 Voltage Protection 27, 59

Voltage protection has the task to protect electrical equipment against undervoltage and overvoltage. Both
operational states are abnormal as overvoltage may cause for example insulation problems or undervoltage
may cause stability problems.
There are three elements each available for overvoltage protection and undervoltage protection.
Applications
• Abnormally high voltages often occur e.g. in low loaded, long distance transmission lines, in islanded
systems when generator voltage regulation fails, or after full load rejection of a generator from the
system.
• The undervoltage protection function detects voltage collapses on transmission lines and electrical
machines and prevents inadmissible operating states and a possible loss of stability.
2.2.1 Measurement Principle
Connection/Measured Values
The voltages supplied to the device may correspond to the three phase-to-ground voltages VA-N, VB-N, VC-N or
the two phase-to-phase voltages (VA-B, VB-C) and the displacement voltage (ground voltage VN) or - in the case
of a single-phase connection - any phase-to-ground voltage. The connection type has been specified during
the configuration in parameter 213 VT Connect. 3ph (see Section 2.1.3.2 Setting Notes).
The following table indicates which voltages can be evaluated by the function. The settings for this are made
in the P.System Data 1 (see Section 2.1.3.2 Setting Notes). Furthermore, it is indicated to which value the
threshold must be set. All voltages are fundamental frequency values.
Table 2-2 Voltage protection, selectable voltages
Connection, threephase Selectable voltage Threshold to be set as

(parameter213) parameter 614/ 615
Overvoltage
Van, Vbn, Vcn Vphph (largest phase-to-phase voltage) Phase-to-phase voltage
Vph-n ((largest phase-to-ground voltage) Phase-to-ground voltage
V1(positive sequence voltage) Positive sequence voltage calculated
from
phase-to-groundvoltage or
phase-tophase voltage / √3
V2 (negative sequence voltage) Negative sequence voltage
Vab, Vbc, VGnd Vphph (largest phase-to-phase voltage) Leiter-Leiter-Spannung
Vab, Vbc V1(positive sequence voltage) Positive sequence voltage
Vab, Vbc, VSyn V2 (negative sequence voltage) Negative sequence voltage
Vab, Vbc, Vx
Vph-g, VSyn None (direct evaluation of the voltage connected to Direct voltage value
voltage input 1)
Undervoltage
Van, Vbn, Vcn Vphph (smallest phase-to-phase voltage) Phase-to-phase voltage
Vph-n (smallest phase-to-ground voltage) Phase-to-ground voltage
V1 (positive sequence voltage) Positive sequence voltage· √3

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
Connection, threephase Selectable voltage Threshold to be set as

(parameter213) parameter 614/ 615
Vab, Vbc, VGnd Vphph (smallest phase-to-phase voltage) Phase-to-phase voltage
Vab, Vbc V1 ((positive sequence voltage) Positive sequence voltage· √3
Vab, Vbc, VSyn
Vab, Vbc, Vx
Vph-g, VSyn None (direct evaluation of the voltage connected to Direct voltage value
voltage input 1)
The positive and negative sequence voltages stated in the table are calculated from the phase-to-ground
voltages.
2.2.2 Overvoltage Protection 59
Function
The overvoltage protection includes three elements (59-1 PICKUP, 59-2 PICKUP, 59 Vp>). In case of a
high overvoltage, the switchoff is performed with a short-time delay, whereas in case of lower overvoltages,
the switchoff is performed with a longer time delay. When an adjustable setting is exceeded, the 59 element
picks up, and after an adjustable time delay elapses, initiates a trip signal. The time delay is not dependent on
the magnitude of the overvoltage.
Additionally the element 59 Vp> allows the definition of a user defined tripping curve with 20 value pairs
(voltage/ time). Parameterization is done via DIGSI.
For both over-voltage elements 59-1 PICKUP, 59-2 PICKUP the dropout ratio (= Vdropout/Vpickup) can be
parameterized.
A parameter is set to specify, whether the measured values of all phases or only phases with the highest value
for monitoring are being used.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the overvoltage protection function.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
[7rw80-ueberspgs-schutz-20100716, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-2 Logic diagram of the overvoltage protection
2.2.3 Undervoltage Protection 27
Funktion
Undervoltage protection consists of three elements (27-1 PICKUP, 27-2 PICKUP, 27 Vp<). Therefore, trip-
ping can be time-graded depending on how severe voltage collapses are. Voltage thresholds and time delays
can be set individually for both elements 27-1 PICKUP and 27-2 PICKUP.
Additionally the element27 Vp< allows the definition of a user defined tripping curve with 20 value pairs
(voltage/ time). Parameterization is done via DIGSI.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
For both under-voltage elements 27-1 PICKUP and 27-2 PICKUP the dropout ratio (= Vdropout/Vpickup) can be
parameterized.
A parameter is set to specify, whether the measured values of all phases or only phases with the lowest value
for monitoring are being used.
The undervoltage protection works in an additional frequency range. This ensures that the protective function
is preserved even when it is applied e.g. as motor protection in context with decelerating motors. However,
the r.m.s. value of the positive-sequence voltage component is considered too small when severe frequency
deviations exist. This function therefore exhibits an overfunction.
Figure 2-3 shows a typical voltage profile during a fault for source side connection of the voltage trans-
formers. After the voltage has decreased below the pickup setting, tripping is initiated after time delay 27-1
DELAY. As long as the voltage remains below the drop out setting, reclosing is blocked. Only after the fault
has been cleared, i.e. when the voltage increases above the drop out level, the element drops out and allows
reclosing of the circuit breaker.
[stoerfallverlauf-speiseseitig-20100525, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-3 Typical fault profile for supply-side connection of the voltage transformers
The following Figure shows the logic diagram of the undervoltage protection function.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
[7rw80-unterspgs-schutz-20100525, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-4 Logic diagram of the undervoltage protection
2.2.4 Setting Notes
General
Voltage protection is only in effect and accessible if address 150 27/59 is set to Enabled during configura-
tion of protective functions. If the function is not required Disabled is set.
The voltage to be evaluated is selected in Power System Data 1 (see Chapter 2.2 Voltage Protection 27, 59,
Table 2-2).
Overvoltage protection can be turned ON or OFF or set to Alarm Only at address 5001 FCT 59.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
Undervoltage protection can be turned ON or OFF or set to Alarm Only at address 5101 FCT 27.
With the protection function ON tripping, fault record and fault recording will occur when limit values were
exceeded and after time delays expired.
When setting Alarm Only no trip command is given, no fault is recorded and no spontaneous fault annunci-
ation is shown on the display.
For over-voltage and under-voltage protection user-defined curves with 20 value pairs (voltage/time) may be
configured. Usage of a curve has to be activated at address 5035 Pickup - Time for the element 59 Vp>
and at address 5133 Pickup - Time for the element 27 Vp<.
Overvoltage Protection (59-1, 59-2) with phase-to-phase / phase-to-ground voltage

For over-voltage protection with phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground voltages you have to configure at address
5009 59 Phases the measured quantity that is to be evaluated for the over voltage protection. While being
configuredAll phases all voltages have to exceed their threshold. AtLargest phase only one voltage has
to exceed its threshold.
The threshold values are set in the value to be evaluated (see Chapter 2.2 Voltage Protection 27, 59,
Table 2-2).
Overvoltage protection includes three elements. The pickup value of the lower threshold is set at address
5002 or 5003, 59-1 PICKUP, (depending on if the phase-to-ground or the phase-to-phase voltages are
connected), while time delay is set at address 5004, 59-1 DELAY (a longer time delay). The pickup value of
the upper element is set at address 5005 or 5006, 59-2 PICKUP, while the time delay is set at address 5007,
59-2 DELAY (a short time delay). A third element can be activated at address 5031 59 Vp>, which works
with a user-defined curve (address 5035).
There are not clear cut procedures on how to set the pickup values. However, since the overvoltage function is
primarily intended to prevent insulation damage on equipment and loads, the setting value 5002 , 5003 59-1
PICKUP should be set between 110 % and 115 % of nominal voltage, and setting value 5005, 5006 59-2
PICKUP should be set to about 130 % of nominal voltage.
The time delays of the overvoltage elements are entered at addresses 5004 59-1 DELAY, 5007 59-2 DELAY
and 5034 59 T Vp> and should be selected to allow the brief voltage spikes that are generated during
switching operations and to enable clearance of stationary overvoltages in time.
The option to choose between phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltage, allows voltage asymmetries (e.g.
caused by a ground fault) to be taken into account (phase-to-ground) or to remain unconsidered (phase–to-
phase) during evaluation.
Overvoltage Protection - Positive Sequence System V1

In a three-phase voltage transformer connection the positive sequence system can be evaluated for the over-
voltage protection by means of configuring parameter 614 OP. QUANTITY 59 to V1. In this case, the
threshold values of the overvoltage protection must be set in parameters 5019 59-1 PICKUP V1 or 5020
59-2 PICKUP V1. A third element can be activated at address 5032 59 Vp> V1, which works with a user-
defined curve (address 5035).
Overvoltage Protection - Negative Sequence System V2

In a three-phase transformer connection, parameter 614 OP. QUANTITY 59 can determine that the negative
sequence system V2 can be evaluated as a measured value for the overvoltage protection. The negative
sequence system detects voltage asymmetries.
Overvoltage protection includes three elements. Thus, with configuration of the negative system, a longer
time delay (Adresse 5004, 59-1 DELAY) may be assigned to the lower element (address 5015, 59-1
PICKUP V2) depending on whether phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase voltages are connected) and a
shorter time delay (address 5007, 59-2 DELAY) may be assigned to the upper element (Address 5016, 59-2
PICKUP V2). A third element can be activated at address 5033 59 Vp> V2, which works with a user-defined
curve (address 5035).
There are not clear cut procedures on how to set the pickup values 59-1 PICKUP V2 or 59-2 PICKUP V2,
as they depend on the respective station configuration.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
The time delays of the overvoltage elements are entered at addresses 5004 59-1 DELAY and 5007 59-2
DELAY, and should be selected in such manner that they make allowance for brief voltage peaks that are
generated during switching operations and also enable clearance of stationary overvoltages in due time.
Dropout Threshold of the Overvoltage Protection

The dropout thresholds of the 59-1 element and the 59-2 element can be configured via the dropout ratio r =
VDropout/VPickup at addresses 5017 59-1 DOUT RATIO or 5018 59-2 DOUT RATIO. The following marginal
condition applies to r:
r · (configured pickup threshold) ≤ 150 V with connection of phase-to-phase voltages and phase-to-ground
voltages or
r · (configured pickup threshold) ≤ 260 V with calculation of the measured values from the connected voltages
(e.g. phase-to-phase voltages calculated from the connected phase-to-ground voltages).
The minimum hysteresis is 0.6 V.
Undervoltage Protection - Positive Sequence System V1

The positive sequence component (V1) can be evaluated for the undervoltage protection. Especially in case of
stability problems, their acquisition is advantageous because the positive sequence system is relevant for the
limit of the stable energy transmission. Concerning the pickup values there are no specific notes on how to set
them. However, because the undervoltage protection function is primarily intended to protect induction
machines from voltage dips and to prevent stability problems, the pickup values will usually be between 60 %
and 85 % of the nominal voltage.
The threshold value is multiplied as positive sequence voltage and set to √3, thus realizing the reference to the
nominal voltage.
Undervoltage protection with evaluation of the positive sequence componentscomprises two elements. The
pickup value of the lower threshold is set at address 5110 or 5111, 27-2 PICKUP (depending on the voltage
transformer connection, phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase), while time delay is set at address 5112, 27-2
DELAY (short time delay). The pickup value of the upper element is set at address 5102 or 5103, 27-1
PICKUP, while the time delay is set at address 5106, 27-1 DELAY (a somewhat longer time delay). Setting
these elements in this way allows the undervoltage protection function to closely follow the stability behavior
of the system.
The time settings should be selected such that tripping occurs in response to voltage dips that lead to unstable
operating conditions. On the other hand, the time delay should be long enough to avoid tripping on short-
term voltage dips.
Undervoltage Protection with Phase-to-phase or Phase-to-ground Voltages

For undervoltage protection with phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground voltages you have to configure at
address 5109 27 Phases the measured quantity that is to be evaluated for the undervoltage protection.
While being configured All phases all voltages have to underrun their threshold. At Smallest phase
only one voltage has to underrun its threshold.
The threshold values are set in the value to be evaluated (see Chapter 2.2 Voltage Protection 27, 59,
Table 2-2)
Undervoltage protection includes three elements. The pickup value of the lower threshold is set at address
5110 or 5111, 27-2 PICKUP (depending on the voltage transformer connection, phase-to-ground or
phaseto- phase), while time delay is set at address 5112, 27-2 DELAY (short time delay). The pickup value of
the upper element is set at address 5102 or 5103, 27-1 PICKUP, while the time delay is set at address 5106,
27-1 DELAY (a somewhat longer time delay). Setting these elements in this matter allows the undervoltage
protection function to closely follow the stability behaviour of the system. A third element can be activated at
address 5131 27 Vp<, which works with a user-defined curve (address 5133). The corresponding delay time
can be configured at address 5132 27 T Vp<.
The time settings should be selected such that tripping occurs in response to voltage dips that lead to unstable
operating conditions. On the other hand, the time delay should be long enough to avoid tripping on short-
term voltage dips.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
Dropout Threshold of the Undervoltage Protection

The dropout thresholds of the 59-1 element and the 59-2 element can be parameterized via the dropout ratio
r = Vdropout/Vpickup (5113 27-1 DOUT RATIO or 5114 27-2 DOUT RATIO). The following marginal condition
applies to r:
r · (configured pickup threshold) ≤ 130 V with connection of phase-to-phase voltages and phase-to-ground
voltages) or
r· (configured pickup threshold) ≤ 225 V with calculation of the measured values from the connected voltages
(e.g. calculated phase-to-phase voltages from the connected phase-to-ground voltages).
The minimum hysteresis is 0.6 V.
NOTE
i If a setting is selected such that the dropout threshold (= pickup threshold · dropout ratio) results in a
greater value than 130 V/225 V, it will be limited automatically. No error message occurs.
2.2.5 Settings
5001 FCT 59 OFF OFF 59 Overvoltage Protection
ON
Alarm Only
5002 59-1 PICKUP 20 .. 260 V 110 V 59-1 Pickup
5003 59-1 PICKUP 20 .. 150 V 110 V 59-1 Pickup
5004 59-1 DELAY 0.00 .. 100.00 sec 0.50 sec 59-1 Time Delay
5005 59-2 PICKUP 20 .. 260 V 120 V 59-2 Pickup
5006 59-2 PICKUP 20 .. 150 V 120 V 59-2 Pickup
5009 59 Phases All phases Largest phase Phases for 59
Largest phase
5015 59-1 PICKUP V2 2 .. 150 V 30 V 59-1 Pickup V2
5017A 59-1 DOUT RATIO 0.90 .. 0.99 0.95 59-1 Dropout Ratio
5030 59 Vp> 20 .. 260 V 110 V 59 Pickup Vp>
5031 59 Vp> 20 .. 150 V 110 V 59 Pickup Vp>
5032 59 Vp> V1 20 .. 150 V 110 V 59 Pickup Vp> V1
5033 59 Vp> V2 2 .. 150 V 30 V 59 Pickup Vp> V2
5034 59 T Vp> 0.1 .. 5.0 sec 5.0 sec 59 T Vp> Time Delay
5035 Pickup - Time 1.00 .. 20.00 Pickup - Time
0.01 .. 999.00
5101 FCT 27 OFF OFF 27 Undervoltage Protection
ON
Alarm Only
5102 27-1 PICKUP 10 .. 210 V 75 V 27-1 Pickup
5103 27-1 PICKUP 10 .. 120 V 45 V 27-1 Pickup

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions

5109 27 Phases Smallest phase All phases Phases for 27
All phases
5110 27-2 PICKUP 10 .. 210 V 70 V 27-2 Pickup
5111 27-2 PICKUP 10 .. 120 V 40 V 27-2 Pickup
5130 27 Vp< 10 .. 210 V 75 V 27 Pickup Vp<
5131 27 Vp< 10 .. 120 V 45 V 27 Pickup Vp<
5132 27 T Vp< 0.1 .. 5.0 sec 1.0 sec 27 T Vp< Time Delay
5133 Pickup - Time 0.05 .. 1.00 Pickup - Time
0.01 .. 999.00
2.2.6 Information List

Informa-
tion
234.2100 27, 59 blk IntSP 27, 59 blocked via operation
6503 >BLOCK 27 SP >BLOCK 27 undervoltage protection
6506 >BLOCK 27-1 SP >BLOCK 27-1 Undervoltage protection
6508 >BLOCK 27-2 SP >BLOCK 27-2 Undervoltage protection
6513 >BLOCK 59 SP >BLOCK 59 overvoltage protection
6530 27 OFF OUT 27 Undervoltage protection switched OFF
6531 27 BLOCKED OUT 27 Undervoltage protection is BLOCKED
6532 27 ACTIVE OUT 27 Undervoltage protection is ACTIVE
6533 27-1 picked up OUT 27-1 Undervoltage picked up
6534 27-1 PU CS OUT 27-1 Undervoltage PICKUP w/curr. superv
6537 27-2 picked up OUT 27-2 Undervoltage picked up
6538 27-2 PU CS OUT 27-2 Undervoltage PICKUP w/curr. superv
6539 27-1 TRIP OUT 27-1 Undervoltage TRIP
6540 27-2 TRIP OUT 27-2 Undervoltage TRIP
6565 59 OFF OUT 59 Overvoltage protection switched OFF
6566 59 BLOCKED OUT 59 Overvoltage protection is BLOCKED
6567 59 ACTIVE OUT 59 Overvoltage protection is ACTIVE
6568 59-1 picked up OUT 59-1 Overvoltage V> picked up
6570 59-1 TRIP OUT 59-1 Overvoltage V> TRIP
6571 59-2 picked up OUT 59-2 Overvoltage V>> picked up
6573 59-2 TRIP OUT 59-2 Overvoltage V>> TRIP
17370 >BLOCK Vp< SP >Block Undervoltage protection Vp<
17371 >BLOCK Vp> SP >Block Overvoltage protection Vp>
17372 Vp< picked up OUT Vp< Undervoltage picked up
17373 Vp> picked up OUT Vp> Overvoltage picked up
17374 Vp< TRIP OUT Vp< Undervoltage TRIP
17375 Vp> TRIP OUT Vp> Overvoltage TRIP

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.3 Frequency Protection 81 O/U

The frequency protection function detects abnormally high and low frequencies in the system or in electrical
machines. If the frequency lies outside the allowable range, appropriate actions are initiated, such as load
shedding or separating a generator from the system.
Applications
• Decrease in system frequency occurs when the system experiences an increase in the real power
demand, or when a malfunction occurs with a generator governor or automatic generation control (AGC)
system. The frequency protection function is also used for generators which (for a certain time) operate
to an island network. This is due to the fact that the reverse power protection cannot operate in case of a
drive power failure. The generator can be disconnected from the power system by means of the
frequency decrease protection.
• Increase in system frequency occurs e.g. when large blocks of load (island network) are removed from
the system, or again when a malfunction occurs with a generator governor. This entails risk of self-excita-
tion for generators feeding long lines under no-load conditions.
2.3.1 Functional Description
Detection of Frequency
The frequency is detected preferably from the positive sequence voltage. If this voltage is too low, the phase-
to-phase voltage VA-B at the device is used. If the amplitude of this voltage is too small, one of the other phase-
to-phase voltages is used instead.
Through the use of filters and repeated measurements, the frequency evaluation is free from harmonic influ-
ences and very accurate.
Overfrequency/Underfrequency
Frequency protection consists of four frequency elements. To make protection flexible for different power
system conditions, theses elements can be used alternatively for frequency decrease or increase separately,
and can be independently set to perform different control functions.
Operating Range
The frequency can be determined as long as in a three-phase voltage transformer connection the positive-
sequence system of the voltages, or alternatively, in a single-phase voltage transformer connection, the
respective voltage is present and of sufficient magnitude. If the measured voltage drops below a settable
value Vmin, the frequency protection is blocked because no precise frequency values can be calculated from
the signal.
Time Delays / Logic

Each frequency element has an associated settable time delay. When the time delay elapses, a trip signal is
generated. When a frequency element drops out, the tripping command is immediately terminated, but not
before the minimum command duration has elapsed.
Each of the four frequency elements can be blocked individually via binary inputs.
The following figure shows the logic diagram for the frequency protection function.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
[dw_7sj6x_frequenzschutz, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-5 Logic diagram of the frequency protection
2.3.2 Setting Notes
General
Frequency protection is only in effect and accessible if address 154 81 O/U is set to Enabled during configu-
ration of protective functions. If the function is not required Disabled is set. The function can be turned ON
or OFF under address 5401 FCT 81 O/U.
By setting the parameters 5421 to 5424, the function of each of the elements 81-1 PICKUP to 81-4
PICKUP is set individually as overfrequency or underfrequency protection or set to OFF, if the element is not
required.
Minimum Voltage
Address 5402 Vmin is used to set the minimum voltage. Frequency protection is blocked as soon as the
minimum voltage is undershot.
The threshold value has to be set as phase-to-phase quantity if the connection is three-phase. With a single-
phase phase-to-ground connection the threshold is set as phase voltage.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
Pickup Values
The setting as overfrequency or underfrequency element does not depend on the parameter threshold values
of the respective element. An element can also function, for example, as an overfrequency element if its
threshold value is set below the nominal frequency and vice versa.
If frequency protection is used for load shedding purposes, the setting values depend on the actual power
system conditions. Normally, a time coordinated load shedding is required that takes into account the impor-
tance of the consumers or consumer groups.
Further application examples exist in the field of power stations. Here too, the frequency values to be set
mainly depend on the specifications of the power system / power station operator. The underfrequency
protection safeguards the power station's own demand by disconnecting it from the power system on time.
The turbo governor regulates the machine set to the nominal speed. Consequently, the station's own
demands can be continuously supplied at nominal frequency.
Under the assumption that the apparent power is reduced by the same degree, turbine-driven generators can,
as a rule, be continuously operated down to 95% of the nominal frequency. However, for inductive
consumers, the frequency reduction not only means an increased current input, but also endangers stable
operation. For this reason, only a short-term frequency reduction down to about 48 Hz (for fN = 50 Hz) or 58
Hz (for fN = 60 Hz) is permissible.
A frequency increase can, for example, occur due to a load shedding or malfunction of the speed regulation
(e.g. in an island network). In this way, the frequency increase protection can, for example, be used as over-
speed protection.
Dropout Thresholds
The dropout threshold is defined via the adjustable dropout-difference address 5415 DO differential. It
can thus be adjusted to the network conditions. The dropout difference is the absolute-value difference
between pickup threshold and dropout threshold. The default value of 0.02 Hz can usually remain. Should,
however, frequent minor frequency fluctuations be expected, this value should be increased.
Time Delays
The delay times 81-1 DELAY to 81-4 DELAY (addresses 5405, 5408, 5411 and 5414) allow the frequency
elements to be time coordinated, e.g. for load shedding equipment. The set times are additional delay times
not including the operating times (measuring time, dropout time) of the protection function.
2.3.3 Settings
5401 FCT 81 O/U OFF OFF 81 Over/Under Frequency Protec-
ON tion
5402 Vmin 10 .. 150 V 65 V Minimum required voltage for
operation
5402 Vmin 20 .. 150 V 35 V Minimum required voltage for
operation
5403 81-1 PICKUP 40.00 .. 60.00 Hz 49.50 Hz 81-1 Pickup
5411 81-3 DELAY 0.00 .. 100.00 sec 3.00 sec 81-3 Time delay

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions

5414 81-4 DELAY 0.00 .. 100.00 sec 30.00 sec 81-4 Time delay
5415A DO differential 0.02 .. 1.00 Hz 0.02 Hz Dropout differential
5421 FCT 81-1 O/U OFF OFF 81-1 Over/Under Frequency
ON f> Protection
ON f<
ON f> Protection
ON f<
ON f> Protection
ON f<
ON f> Protection
ON f<

Informa-
tion
5203 >BLOCK 81O/U SP >BLOCK 81O/U
5206 >BLOCK 81-1 SP >BLOCK 81-1
5207 >BLOCK 81-2 SP >BLOCK 81-2
5208 >BLOCK 81-3 SP >BLOCK 81-3
5209 >BLOCK 81-4 SP >BLOCK 81-4
5211 81 OFF OUT 81 OFF
5212 81 BLOCKED OUT 81 BLOCKED
5213 81 ACTIVE OUT 81 ACTIVE
5214 81 Under V Blk OUT 81 Under Voltage Block
5232 81-1 picked up OUT 81-1 picked up
5236 81-1 TRIP OUT 81-1 TRIP
5237 81-2 TRIP OUT 81-2 TRIP
5238 81-3 TRIP OUT 81-3 TRIP
5239 81-4 TRIP OUT 81-4 TRIP

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.4 Load Restoration

The Load Restoration has the task to reconnect elements of the system automatically, which have been
disconnected due to overload. Overload causes the network frequency to drop, which is detected by the
underfrequency protection and leads to separation of system components.
General
The load restoration function has 4 independently adjustable load restoration elements. Elements of the load
restoration are switched on or off separately by parameters. Every element can be assigned up to 4 underfre-
quency elements, which start the load restoration when tripped.
The process can be canceled via the binary input >LR Block.
The binary input >LR Break breaks the load restoration process.
The binary input >LR Reset resets external blocking or a blocked monitoring.
Started elements are processed in descending order. The highest number element connects first. You may find
an example in the instructions manual.
The Load Restoration can be applied across several 7RW80 devices. The Load Restoration across several
devices can be coordinated using the CFC. The procedure is described in the instructions manual.
The following figure gives an overview of the load restoration's functionality.
[7rw80-uebersicht-20100525, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-6 Load Restoration - Overview

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
Procedure
The start of a load restoration element is triggered by the tripping of the associated underfrequency element.
Processing will terminate, if the restoration signal for the circuit breaker is issued or the function has been
blocked. If the underfrequency trips again during the output of the restoration signal, the load restoration
element will restart.
The following figure shows the interaction of underfrequency protection and load restoration.
[7rw80-start-20100525, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-7 Load Restoration - Start
You can adjust the trip- and dropout time for every load restoration element. Furthermore, you can adjust the
pickup- and dropout time as a difference to the starting frequency, which together form the threshold of the
load restoration. The frequency must reach this threshold value of the set trip time, before the restoration
signal for the circuit breaker is issued. If the frequency drops below the the set pickup threshold value during
the set dropout time, the time for the pickup will be halted. If the frequency drops to a value below the
dropout threshold value, pickup and dropout time will be reset. This takes into account that the frequency is
not restored monotonously, but rather is subject to intermittent fluctuations.
The following figure shows the interaction of thresholds and timers.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
[7rw80-prozess-20100525, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-8 Load Restoration - Sequence
Blocking and Monitoring

The load restoration can be blocked by:
• Binary Input
• Tripping of another protective function of the device, which is not set to “Alarm Only”.
An exception is the underfrequency protection. Tripping of a underfrequency element initiates the load
restoration.
• Inaccurate or invalid frequency measurements at undervoltage

The blocking condition can be reset by a binary input or disappearing device pickup.
The number of restoration cycles is limited by a parameter. This prevents short-cyclical on- and off switching
of the underfrequency protection and load restoration at major frequency fluctuations. If the number of resto-
ration cycles exceeds the configured value, the load restoration will be blocked. The restoration cycle is time
monitored. The monitoring time of load restoration cycles is configurable.
Pending power system/network faults are kept open during the restoration cycle.
The following figure shows the operation of the blocking and the monitoring parameters. The overvoltage
function is an example, the same applies to other protection functions except for underfrequency.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
[7rw80-block-monitor-20100508, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-9 Load Restoration - Blocking and Monitoring
After the monitoring time of the restoration cycle has elapsed, the success of the load restoration will be eval-
uated.
Success basically depends on the following criteria:
• The load restoration is not blocked, e.g. by another protective function, binary input, undervoltage,
monitoring
• The monitoring time of restoration cycles of every started load restoration elements has elapsed
• The maximum number of configured cycles was not exceeded
• All started load restoration elements are connected

To better illustrate the mode of operation, the following examples demonstrate different scenarios of the load
restoration procedure.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
[7rw80-monitor-log-bsp-20100525, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-10 Load Restoration – Blocking and Monitoring, Example
2.4.2 Setting Notes
General
The load restoration is active, if Load Restore = Enabled has been set at address 155 during configuration.
If the function is not required Disabled is set.
The various elements of the load restoration are configured ON or OFF at addresses 5520, 5540, 5560 and
5580.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
Pickup- and Dropout Values

At addresses 5521, 5541, 5561 and 5581 you configure the start frequency LZx Start for the elements. The
start frequency must be adjusted to a value equal or higher than the tripping frequency of the underfrequency
element.
At addresses 5523, 5543, 5563 and 5583 configure the pickup frequency LRx Pickup for the elements. The
pickup frequency and the start frequency add up to the pickup threshold of the load restoration element.
At addresses 5524, 5544, 5564 and 5584 you configure the delay time LRx t pickup for the pickup of
elements.
At addresses 5525, 5545, 5565 and 5585 you configure the dropout frequency LRx Dropout the elements.
The dropout frequency and the start frequency add up to the dropout threshold of the load restoration
element.
At addresses 5526, 5546, 5566 and 5586 you may configure the dropout time LRx t dropout for the
elements.
At addresses 5527, 5547, 5567 and 5587 you may configure the close command duration of the circuit
breaker LRx t CB Close.
The following example illustrates the interaction of the pickup- and dropout values of the load restoration
elements and underfrequency elements.
The pickup threshold of the underfrequency elements 81-1, 81-2 and 81-3 are set to the following frequen-
cies:
81-1 PICKUP 5403 = 49,5 Hz
81-2 PICKUP 5406 = 49 Hz
81-3 PICKUP 5409 = 47,5 Hz
Table 2-3 Settings Example
Parameter LZ1 LZ2 LZ3

Start LR1 Start 5521 = 49,5 Hz LR2 Start 5541 = 49 Hz LR3 Start 5561 = 49 Hz
Pickup LR1 Pickup 5523 = 0,25 Hz LR2 Pickup 5543 = 0,50 Hz LR3 Pickup 5563 = 0,50 Hz
Dropout LR1 Dropout 5525 = 0 Hz LR2 Dropout 5545 = 0,25 Hz LR3 Dropout 5565 = 0,25 Hz
Pickup Time LR1 t pickup 5524 = 14 s LR2 t pickup 5544 = 13 s LR3 t pickup 5564 = 7 s
Dropout Time LR1 t dropout 5526 = 10 s LR2 t dropout 5546 = 10 s LR3 t dropout 5566 = 10 s
CB Close time LR1 t CB Close 5527 = 1 s LR2 t CB Close 5547 = 1 s LR3 t CB Close 5567 = 1s
Underfrequency LR1 after 81-1 5528 = LR2 after 81-1 5548 = NO LR3 after 81-1 5568 = NO
elements YES LR2 after 81-2 5549 = LR3 after 81-2 5569 =
LR1 after 81-2 5529 = YES YES
YES LR2 after 81-3 5550 = LR3 after 81-3 5570 =
YES LR2 after 81-4 5551 = LR3 after 81-4 5571 =
YES

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
[7rw80-beispiel-20100525, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-11 Example for Load Restoration with 3 elements
In the above example the frequency initially drops below the pickup threshold of the underfrequency element
81-1. The element 81-1 trips.
Because of the configured settings (see Table 2-3) load restoration element LR1 is started with the tripping of
81-1. LR1 is at this point the only running/started element and is therefore processed immediately.
Afterwards the network frequency drops below the pickup threshold of the underfrequency element 81-2.
Element 81-2 trips as well and initiates load restoration elements LR2 and LR3.
LR3 has at that point the highest number of all load restoration elements and is processed immediately. The
processing of element LR1 is interrupted.
When the pickup frequency of 49.5 Hz is reached, load restoration element LR3 picks up. Once the frequency
remains above the threshold during the pickup time of LR3, LR3 issues the CB Close command.
The pickup of the next restoration element LR2 will be processed immediately after the LR3 restoration CB
Close signal.
During the pickup time of LR2 the network frequency drops briefly below the pickup threshold, but not below
the dropout threshold of LR2. This stops the pickup of load restoration element LR2, but does not reset this
procedure in the dropout delay time. When the frequency reaches the pickup threshold of LR2 (49.5 Hz)
again, the pickup time of LR2 will be continued.
When pickup time has expired, the element LR2 initiates the load restoration.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
Subsequently the pickup of load restoration LR1 is processed. When the pickup frequency of LR1 (49.75 Hz) is
reached, LR1 picks up. LR1 initiates the restoration when pickup time has expired.
When the monitoring time has expired (address 5501 LR t Monitor), the message 17335 LR
Successful is displayed (not shown in the figure).
Assignments to Frequency Elements

At addresses 5528 to 5531, 5548 to 5551, 5568 to 5571 and 5588 to 5591 you may assign the underfre-
quency elements, which trigger the load restoration element (when tripping).
Monitoring
At address 5501 LR t Monitor you may configure the monitoring time of the load restoration cycles.
At address 5502 LR Max. Cycles you may configure the maximum number of restoration cycles of the load
restoration.
Load restoration across several devices

The Load Restoration can be applied across several 7RW80 devices. The Load Restoration across several
devices can be coordinated using the CFC.
To ensure the correct restoration sequence between several v devices you must connect the output 17338 LR
Process of the first restoring device with the input 17332 >LR Process of the other devices.
Furthermore you have to configure the user defined messages LZ TxBlock and LZ TxPause .
The output messages LZ TxBlock and LZ TxPause are connected to the according binary inputs of the
opposite devices 17330 >LR Block and 17331 >LR Break.
In the CFC the following logic is applied:
[7rw80-lz-cfc-20100720, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-12 Load Restoration across several devices - CFC-Logic
NOTE
i Use the fast CFC task level PLC1_BEARB.
2.4.3 Settings

5501 LR t Monitor 1 .. 3600 sec 3600 sec Load restoration monitor time
5502 LR Max. Cycles 1 .. 10 2 Load restoration maximal no. of
cycles
5520 LR1 ON OFF Load restoration element 1
OFF
OFF
5521 LR1 Start 40.00 .. 60.00 Hz 49.50 Hz Load restoration elem. 1 start
frequency

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions

frequency
5523 LR1 Pickup 0.02 .. 2.00 Hz 0.04 Hz Load restoration element 1 Pickup
5524 LR1 t pickup 0 .. 10800 sec 600 sec Load restoration element 1 Pickup
time
5525 LR1 Dropout 0.00 .. 2.00 Hz 0.02 Hz Load restoration element 1
Dropout
5526 LR1 t dropout 0 .. 10800 sec 60 sec Load restoration element 1
Dropout time
5527 LR1 t CB Close 0.01 .. 32.00 sec 1.00 sec Load restoration element 1 CB
Close time
5528 LR1 after 81-1 YES NO Load restoration element 1 after
NO 81-1
NO 81-2
NO 81-3
NO 81-4
OFF
OFF
frequency
frequency
time
Dropout
Dropout time
Close time
NO 81-1
NO 81-2
NO 81-3
NO 81-4
OFF
OFF

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions

frequency
frequency
time
Dropout
Dropout time
Close time
NO 81-1
NO 81-2
NO 81-3
NO 81-4
OFF
OFF
frequency
frequency
time
Dropout
Dropout time
Close time
NO 81-1
NO 81-2
NO 81-3
NO 81-4

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions

Informa-
tion
17330 >LR Block SP >Load restoration Block
17331 >LR Break SP >Load restoration break
17332 >LR Process SP >Load restoration Process
17333 >LR Reset SP >Load restoration Reset
17334 LR OFF OUT Load restoration is OFF
17335 LR Successful OUT Load restoration successful
17336 LR Block OUT Load restoration Block
17337 LR Break OUT Load restoration break
17338 LR Process OUT Load restoration Process
17339 LR1 Start OUT Load restoration element 1 Start
17340 LR1 Pickup OUT Load restoration element 1 Pickup
17341 LR1 CB Close OUT Load restoration element 1 CB Close
17343 LR1 Active OUT Load restoration element 1 Active
17344 LR1 Set-Error OUT Load restoration element 1 Setting Error
17345 LR1 Monitor OUT Load restoration element 1 monitor mode

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.5 Supervision Functions

The device is equipped with extensive monitoring capabilities - both for hardware and software. In addition,
the measured values are also constantly monitored for plausibility, therefore, the voltage transformer circuits
are largely integrated into the monitoring.
2.5.1 Measurement Supervision
2.5.1.1 General
The device monitoring extends from the measuring inputs to the binary outputs. Monitoring checks the hard-
ware for malfunctions and abnormal conditions.
Hardware and software monitoring described in the following are enabled continuously. Settings (including
the possibility to activate and deactivate the monitoring function) refer to the monitoring of external trans-
former circuits.
2.5.1.2 Hardware Monitoring
Auxiliary and Reference Voltages

Failure of or switching off the supply voltage removes the device from operation and a message is immedi-
ately generated by a normally closed contact. Brief auxiliary voltage interruptions of less than 50 ms do not
disturb the readiness of the device (for nominal auxiliary voltage > 110 VDC).
Buffer Battery
The buffer battery, which ensures operation of the internal clock and storage of counters and messages if the
auxiliary voltage fails, is periodically checked for charge status. If it is less than an allowed minimum voltage,
then the Fail Battery message is issued.
Memory Components
All working memories (RAMs) are checked during startup. If a malfunction occurs then, the starting sequence
is interrupted and an LED blinks. During operation the memories are checked with the help of their checksum.
For the program memory, the cross sum is formed cyclically and compared to the stored program cross sum.
For the settings memory, the cross sum is formed cyclically and compared to the cross sum that is freshly
generated each time a setting process takes place.
If a fault occurs the processor system is restarted.
Scanning
Scanning and the synchronization between the internal buffer components are constantly monitored. If any
deviations cannot be removed by renewed synchronization, then the processor system is restarted.
AD Transformer Monitoring
The digitized sampled values are being monitored in respect of their plausibility. If the result is not plausible,
message 181 Error A/D-conv. is issued. The protection is blocked, thus preventing unwanted operation.
Furthermore, a fault record is generated for recording of the internal fault.
2.5.1.3 Software Monitoring
Watchdog
For continuous monitoring of the program sequences, a time monitor is provided in the hardware (hardware
watchdog) that expires upon failure of the processor or an internal program, and causes a complete restart of
the processor system.
An additional software watchdog ensures that malfunctions during the processing of programs are discov-
ered. This also initiates a restart of the processor system.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
If such a malfunction is not cleared by the restart, an additional restart attempt is begun. After three unsuc-
cessful restarts within a 30 second window of time, the device automatically removes itself from service and
the red “Error” LED lights up. The readiness relay drops out and indicates „device malfunction“ with its normally
closed contact.
Offset Monitoring
This monitoring function checks all ring buffer data channels for corrupt offset replication of the analog/digital
transformers and the analog input paths using offset filters. Possible offset errors are detected using DC filters,
and the associated sampled values are corrected up to a specific limit. If this limit is exceeded, an indication is
generated (191 Error Offset) and integrated into the warning group indication (160). As increased offset
values impair the measurements, we recommend sending the device to the OEM plant for corrective action
should this indication persist.
The Offset monitoring can be blocked via the binary input signal >Blk.offset s. (No. 17565).
2.5.1.4 Monitoring of the Transformer Circuits

Open circuits or short circuits in the secondary circuits of the voltage transformers, as well as faults in the
connections (important during commissioning!), are detected and reported by the device. The measured
quantities are periodically checked in the background for this purpose, as long as no system fault is present.
Voltage Symmetry
During normal system operation, balance among the voltages is expected. Since the phase-to-phase voltages
are insensitive to ground faults, the phase-to-phase voltages are used for balance monitoring. If the device is
connected to the phase-to-ground voltages, then the phase-to-phase voltages are calculated accordingly,
whereas, if the device is connected to phase-to-phase voltages and the displacement voltage V0, then the third
phase-to-phase voltage is calculated accordingly. From the phase-to-phase voltages, the device generates the
rectified average values and checks the balance of their absolute values. The smallest phase voltage is
compared with the largest phase voltage.
Asymmetry is recognized if
| Vmin | / | Vmax | < BAL. FACTOR V as long as | Vmax | > BALANCE V-LIMIT. Where Vmax is the highest of the
three voltages and Vmin the smallest. The symmetry factor BAL. FACTOR V (address 8103) represents the
allowable asymmetry of the conductor voltages while the limit value BALANCE V-LIMIT (address 8102) is
the lower limit of the operating range of this monitoring (see Figure 2-70). Both parameters can be set. The
dropout ratio is about 97%.
This fault is signalled after settable delay time with Fail V balance.
[dw_spannungssymmetrieueberwachung, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-13 Voltage symmetry monitoring

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
Phase sequence of the voltages

To detect swapped phase connections in the voltage input circuits, the direction of rotation of the phase-
tophase voltages is checked. Therefore the sequence of the zero crossings of the currents (having the same
sign) is checked.
Phase rotation of measurement quantities is checked by verifying the phase sequences. Here, the phase
sequence supervision requires the phase-phase voltages VA2, VB3, VC1.
Voltages: VA2 before VB3 before VC1
Verification of the voltage phase rotation is done when each measured voltage is at least
|VA2|, |VB3|, |VC1| > 40 V.
For abnormal phase sequences, the messages Fail Ph. Seq. V or are issued, along with the switching of
this message Fail Ph. Seq..
For applications in which an opposite phase sequence is expected, the protective relay should be adjusted via
a binary input or a programmable setting PHASE SEQ. (Addresse 209). If the phase sequence is changed in
the device, phases B and C internal to the relay are reversed, and the positive and negative sequence currents
are thereby exchanged (see also Section 2.10.2 Setting Notes). The phase-related messages, malfunction
values, and measured values are not affected by this.
2.5.1.5 Broken Wire Monitoring of Voltage Transformer Circuits
Requirements
The measurement of all three phase-to-ground voltages is a requirement for the functionality. If only two
phaseto- phase voltages were measured, it would not be possible to evaluate two of the required criteria.
Task
The “Broken Wire” monitoring function monitors the voltage transformer circuits of the secondary system with
regard to failure. One distinguishes between single-phase and two-phase failures.
Mode of Operation / Logic

All three phase-to-ground voltages, the displacement voltage and the displacement voltage are measured. The
required values are calculated for the respective criteria and eventually a decision is made. The resulting alarm
message may be delayed. A blocking of the protection functions is however not effected.
The broken wire monitoring is also active during a fault. The function may be enabled or disabled.
The following logic diagram shows how the broken wire monitoring functions.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
[7rw80-broken-wire-20100716, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-14 Logic diagram of the “Broken-wire” Monitoring
Measured Value Monitoring

The sensitivity of the measured value monitor can be modified. Default values are set at the factory, which are
sufficient in most cases. If especially high operating asymmetry in the voltages is to be expected for the appli-
cation, or if it becomes apparent during operation that certain monitoring functions activate sporadically, then
the setting should be less sensitive.
Address 8102 BALANCE V-LIMIT determines the limit voltage (phase-to-phase) above which the voltage
symmetry monitor is effective. Address 8103 BAL. FACTOR V is the associated symmetry factor; that is, the
slope of the symmetry characteristic curve. In address 5208 T DELAY ALARM you set the delay time of fault
message no. 167 Fail V balance.
Measured value monitoring can be set to ON or OFF at address 8101 MEASURE. SUPERV.
2.5.1.7 Settings

5201 VT BROKEN WIRE ON OFF VT broken wire supervision
OFF
5202 Σ V> 1.0 .. 100.0 V 8.0 V Threshold voltage sum
5203 Vph-ph max< 1.0 .. 100.0 V 16.0 V Maximum phase to phase voltage
5204 Vph-ph min< 1.0 .. 100.0 V 16.0 V Minimum phase to phase voltage
5205 Vph-ph max-min> 10.0 .. 200.0 V 16.0 V Symmetry phase to phase voltages

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions

5208 T DELAY ALARM 0.00 .. 32.00 sec 1.25 sec Alarm delay time
8101 MEASURE. SUPERV OFF ON Measurement Supervision
ON
8102 BALANCE V-LIMIT 10 .. 100 V 50 V Voltage Threshold for Balance
Monitoring
8103 BAL. FACTOR V 0.58 .. 0.90 0.75 Balance Factor for Voltage
Monitor

Informa-
tion
167 Fail V balance OUT Failure: Voltage Balance
171 Fail Ph. Seq. OUT Failure: Phase Sequence
176 Fail Ph. Seq. V OUT Failure: Phase Sequence Voltage
197 MeasSup OFF OUT Measurement Supervision is switched OFF
253 VT brk. wire OUT Failure VT circuit: broken wire
255 Fail VT circuit OUT Failure VT circuit
256 VT b.w. 1 pole OUT Failure VT circuit: 1 pole broken wire
257 VT b.w. 2 pole OUT Failure VT circuit: 2 pole broken wire
6509 >FAIL:FEEDER VT SP >Failure: Feeder VT
6510 >FAIL: BUS VT SP >Failure: Busbar VT
2.5.2 Trip Circuit Supervision 74TC
Devices 7RW80 are equipped with an integrated trip circuit supervision. Depending on the number of available
binary inputs (not connected to a common potential), supervision with one or two binary inputs can be
selected. If the allocation of the required binary inputs does not match the selected supervision type, then a
message to this effect is generated (74TC ProgFail).
Applications
• When using two binary inputs, malfunctions in the trip circuit can be detected under all circuit breaker
conditions.
• When only one binary input is used, malfunctions in the circuit breaker itself cannot be detected.
Prerequisites
A requirement for the use of trip circuit supervision is that the control voltage for the circuit breaker is at least
twice the voltage drop across the binary input (Vct > 2 · VBImin).
Since at least 19 V are needed for the binary input, the supervision can only be used with a system control
voltage of over 38 V.
Supervision with Two Binary Inputs

When using two binary inputs, these are connected according to Figure 2-15, parallel to the associated trip
contact on one side, and parallel to the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts on the other.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
[dw_prinzip-ausloesekreisueberwachung-2-binein, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-15 Principle of the trip circuit supervision with two binary inputs
Supervision with two binary inputs not only detects interruptions in the trip circuit and loss of control voltage,
it also supervises the response of the circuit breaker using the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts.
Depending on the conditions of the trip contact and the circuit breaker, the binary inputs are activated (logical
condition "H" in Table 2-4), or not activated (logical condition "L").
In healthy trip circuits the condition that both binary inputs are not actuated (”L") is only possible during a
short transition period (trip contact is closed but the circuit breaker has not yet opened). A continuous state of
this condition is only possible when the trip circuit has been interrupted, a short-circuit exists in the trip circuit,
a loss of battery voltage occurs, or malfunctions occur with the circuit breaker mechanism. Therefore, it is
used as supervision criterion.
Table 2-4 Condition table for binary inputs, depending on RTC and CB position
No. Trip contact Circuit breaker 52a Contact 52b Contact BI 1 BI 2

1 Open Closed Closed Open H L
2 Open Open Open Closed H H
3 Closed Closed Closed Open L L
4 Closed Open Open Closed L H
The conditions of the two binary inputs are checked periodically. A check takes place about every 600 ms. If
three consecutive conditional checks detect an abnormality (after 1.8 s), an annunciation is reported (see
Figure 2-16). The repeated measurements determine the delay of the alarm message and avoid that an alarm
is output during short transition periods. After the malfunction in the trip circuit is cleared, the fault annuncia-
tion is reset automatically after the same time period.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
[dw_7sj6x_ausloesekreis_2_binaerein, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-16 Logic diagram of the trip circuit supervision with two binary inputs
Supervision with One Binary Input

The binary input is connected according to the following figure in parallel with the associated trip contact of
the protection relay. The circuit breaker auxiliary contact is bridged with a bypass resistor R.
Figure 2-17 Trip circuit supervision with one binary input
During normal operation, the binary input is activated (logical condition "H") when the trip contact is open and
the trip circuit is intact, because the monitoring circuit is closed by either the 52a circuit breaker auxiliary
contact (if the circuit breaker is closed) or through the bypass resistor R by the 52b circuit breaker auxiliary
contact. Only as long as the trip contact is closed, the binary input is short circuited and thereby deactivated
(logical condition "L").
If the binary input is continuously deactivated during operation, this leads to the conclusion that there is an
interruption in the trip circuit or loss of control voltage.
As the trip circuit supervision does not operate during system faults, the closed trip contact does not lead to a
fault message. If, however, tripping contacts from other devices operate in parallel with the trip circuit, then
the fault message must be delayed (see also Figure 2-18). The delay time can be set via parameter 8202
Alarm Delay. A message is only released after expiry of this time. After clearance of the fault in the trip
circuit, the fault message is automatically reset.
[dw_7sj6x_ausloesekreis_1_binaerein, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-18 Logic diagram of trip circuit supervision with one binary input

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
The following figure shows the logic diagram for the message that can be generated by the trip circuit
monitor, depending on the control settings and binary inputs.
[dw_7sj6x_ausloesekreis_meldelogik, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-19 Message logic for trip circuit supervision
General
The function is only effective and accessible if address 182 (Section 2.1.1.2 Setting Notes) was set to either 2
Binary Inputs or 1 Binary Input during configuration, the appropriate number of binary inputs has
been configured accordingly for this purpose and the function FCT 74TC is ON at address 8201. If the alloca-
tion of the required binary inputs does not match the selected supervision type, a message to this effect is
generated (74TC ProgFail). If the trip circuit monitor is not to be used at all, then Disabled is set at
address 182.
In order to ensure that the longest possible duration of a trip command can be reliably bridged, and an indica-
tion is generated in case of an actual fault in the trip circuit, the indication regarding a trip circuit interruption
is delayed. The time delay is set under address 8202 Alarm Delay.
Supervision with One Binary Input

Note: When using only one binary input (BI) for the trip circuit monitor, malfunctions, such as interruption of
the trip circuit or loss of battery voltage are detected in general, but trip circuit failures while a trip command
is active cannot be detected. Therefore, the measurement must take place over a period of time that bridges
the longest possible duration of a closed trip contact. This is ensured by the fixed number of measurement
repetitions and the time between the state checks.
When using only one binary input, a resistor R is inserted into the circuit on the system side, instead of the
missing second binary input. Through appropriate sizing of the resistor and depending on the system condi-
tions, a lower control voltage is mostly sufficient.
Information for dimensioning resistor R is given in the Chapter "Installation and Commissioning" under Config-
uration Notes in the Section "Trip Circuit Supervision".
2.5.2.3 Settings

8201 FCT 74TC ON ON 74TC TRIP Circuit Supervision
OFF
8202 Alarm Delay 1 .. 30 sec 2 sec Delay Time for alarm

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions

Informa-
tion
6851 >BLOCK 74TC SP >BLOCK 74TC
6852 >74TC trip rel. SP >74TC Trip circuit superv.: trip relay
6853 >74TC brk rel. SP >74TC Trip circuit superv.: bkr relay
6861 74TC OFF OUT 74TC Trip circuit supervision OFF
6862 74TC BLOCKED OUT 74TC Trip circuit supervision is BLOCKED
6863 74TC ACTIVE OUT 74TC Trip circuit supervision is ACTIVE
6864 74TC ProgFail OUT 74TC blocked. Bin. input is not set
6865 74TC Trip cir. OUT 74TC Failure Trip Circuit
2.5.3 Malfunction Responses of the Monitoring Functions
Im folgenden sind die Fehlerreaktionen der Überwachungseinrichtungen zusammengefasst.
Malfunction Responses
Depending on the type of malfunction discovered, an annunciation is sent, a restart of the processor system is
initiated, or the device is taken out of service. After three unsuccessful restart attempts, the device is taken out
of service. The operational readiness NC contact operates to indicate the device is malfunctioning. Also, the
red LED ”ERROR" lights up on the front cover, if the internal auxiliary voltage is present, and the green ”RUN"
LED goes out. If the internal auxiliary voltage fails, all LEDs are dark. Table 2-5 provides a summary of the
monitoring functions and the malfunction responses of the relay.
Table 2-5 Summary of malfunction responses by the protection relay
Monitoring Possible Causes Malfunction Message (No.) Output

Response
AC/DC supply voltage loss External Device shutdown All LEDs dark DOK2) drops
(Nominal voltage) out
internal (power
supply)
Buffer battery Internal (buffer Message Fail Battery (177)
battery)
Hardware watchdog Internal Device shutdown1) LED "ERROR" DOK2) drops
(processor failure) out
Software watchdog Internal Restart attempt 1) LED "ERROR" DOK2) drops
(processor failure) out
Working memory ROM Internal (hardware) Relay aborts restart, LED blinkt DOK2) drops
device shutdown out
Program memory RAM Internal (hardware) During boot sequence LED "ERROR" DOK2) drops
Detection during oper- LED "ERROR" out
ation:
Restart attempt1)
Settings memory Internal (hardware) Restart attempt 1) LED "ERROR" DOK2) drops
out
Sampling frequency Internal (hardware) Device shutdown LED "ERROR" DOK2) drops
out

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
Monitoring Possible Causes Malfunction Message (No.) Output

Response
Error in the I/O-board Internal (hardware) Device shutdown I/O-Board error DOK2) drops
(178), out
LED "ERROR"
Offset monitoring Internal (hardware) Device shutdown Error Offset (191) DOK2) drops
out
Voltage symmetry External (power Message Fail V balance As allocated
system or voltage (167)
transformer)
Voltage phase sequence External (power Message Fail Ph. Seq. V As allocated
system or connec- 176)
tion)
Trip circuit monitoring External (trip circuit Message 74TC Trip cir. As allocated
or control voltage) (6865)
Secondary voltage transformer External (voltage Message VT brk. wire (253) As allocated
circuit monitoring transformer circuit
interruption)
Calibration data fault Internal (hardware) Message Alarm NO calibr As allocated
(193)
1) After three unsuccessful restart attempts, the device is shut down.
2) DOK = "Device Okay" = Ready for service relay drops off, protection and control functions are blocked.
Group Alarms
Certain messages of the monitoring functions are already combined to group alarms. A listing of the group
alarms and their composition is given in the Appendix E.4 Group Indications. In this case, it must be noted that
message 160 Alarm Sum Event is only issued when the measured value monitoring functions (8101
MEASURE. SUPERV) are activated.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.6 Flexible Protection Functions

The flexible protection function is applicable for a variety of protection principles. The user can create up to 20
flexible protection functions and configure them according to their function. Each function can be used either
as an autonomous protection function, as an additional protective element of an existing protection function
or as a universal logic, e.g. for monitoring tasks.
General
The function is a combination of a standard protection logic and a characteristic (measured quantity or derived
quantity) that is adjustable via parameters. The characteristics listed in table 2-20 and the derived protection
functions are available.
Table 2-6 Realisierbare Schutzfunktionen
Characteristic Characteristic / Measured Quantity Protective Function ANSI-No. Mode of Operation

Group 3–phase 1–phase
Voltage V RMS value of fundamental Voltage protection 27, 59, X X
component Displacement voltage 59G
Vrms True RMS (r.m.s. value) Voltage protection 27, 59, X X
Displacement voltage 59G
3V0 Zero sequence system Displacement voltage 59N X
V1 Positive-sequence component Voltage protection 27, 59 X
V2 Negative-sequence component Voltage asymmetry 47 X
dV/dt Voltage change Voltage change protection X
Frequency f Frequency Frequency protection 81U/O without phase
df/dt Frequency change Frequency change protec- 81R reference
tion
Binary input – Binary input Direct coupling without phase
reference
The maximum 20 configurable protection functions operate independently of each other. The following
description concerns one function; it can be applied accordingly to all other flexible functions. The logic
diagram Figure 2-20 illustrates the description.
Functional Logic
The function can be switched OFF and ON or, it can be set to Alarm Only. In this status, a pickup condition
will neither initiate fault recording nor start the trip time delay. Tripping is thus not possible.
Changing the Power System Data 1 after flexible functions have been configured may cause these functions to
be set incorrectly. Message (FNo.235.2128 $00 inval.set) reports this condition. The function is inactive
in this case and function's setting has to be modified.
Blocking Functions
The function can be blocked via binary input (FNo. 235.2110 >BLOCK $00) or via local operating terminal
(“Control”->“Tagging”->“Set”). Blocking will reset the function's entire measurement logic as well as all running
times and indications. Blocking via the local operating terminal may be useful if the function is in a status of
permanent pickup which does not allow the function to be reset.
In context with voltage-based characteristics, the function can be blocked if one of the measuring voltages
fails. Recognition of this status is via auxiliary contacts of the voltage transformer CB (FNo. 6509
>FAIL:FEEDER VT and FNo. 6510 >FAIL: BUS VT). This blocking mechanism can be enabled or disabled

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
in the according parameters. The associated parameter BLK.by Vol.Loss is only available if the character-
istic is based on a voltage measurement.
When using the flexible function for power protection or power monitoring, it will be blocked if currents fall
below 0.03 · ΙNom.
Operating Mode, Measured Quantity, Measurement Method

The flexible function can be tailored to assume a specific protective function for a concrete application in
parameters OPERRAT. MODE, MEAS. QUANTITY, MEAS. METHOD and PICKUP WITH. Parameter
OPERRAT. MODE can be set to specify whether the function works 3-phase, 1-phase oder no refer-
ence, i.e. without a fixed phase reference. The three-phase method evaluates all three phases in parallel. This
implies that threshold evaluation, pickup indications and trip time delay are accomplished selectively for each
phase and parallel to each other.
When operating single-phase, the function employs a phase's measured quantity, which must be stated explic-
itly.
If the characteristic relates to the frequency or if external trip commands are used, the operating principle is
without (fixed) phase reference. Additional parameters can be set to specify the used MEAS. QUANTITY and
the MEAS. METHOD. The MEAS. METHOD determines for voltage measured values whether the function uses
the RMS value of the fundamental component or the normal RMS value (true RMS) that evaluates also
harmonics. All other characteristics use always the rms value of the fundamental component. Parameter
PICKUP WITH moreover specifies whether the function picks up on exceeding the threshold (>-element) or
on falling below the threshold (<-element).
Characteristic Curve
The function's characteristic curve is always “definite time”; this means that the time delay is not affected by
the measured quantity.
Function Logic
The following figure shows the logic diagram of a three-phase function. If the function operates on one phase
or without phase reference, phase selectivity and phase-specific indications are not relevant.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
[7rw80-flex-fkt-210100716, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-20 Logic diagram of the flexible protection functions
The parameters can be set to monitor either exceeding or dropping below of the threshold. The configurable
pickup time delay will be started once the threshold (>-element) has been exceeded. When the time delay has
elapsed and the threshold is still violated, the pickup of the phase (e.g. no. 235.2122 $00 pickup A)and of
the function (no. 235.2121 $00 picked up) is reported. If the pickup delay is set to zero, the pickup will
occur simultaneously with the detection of the threshold violation. If the function is enabled, the pickup will
start the trip time delay and the fault log. This is not the case if set to "Alarm only". If the threshold violation
persists after the trip time delay has elapsed, the trip will be initiated upon its expiration (no. 235.2126 $00
TRIP). The timeout is reported via (no. 235.2125 $00 Time Out). Expiry of the trip time delay can be
blocked via binary input (no. 235.2113 >$00 BLK.TDly). The time delay will not be started as long as the
binary input is active; a trip can thus be initiated. The time delay is started after the binary input has dropped
out and the pickup is still present. It is also possible to bypass the expiration of the time delay by activating
binary input (no. 235.2111 >$00 instant.). The trip will be launched immediately when the pickup is

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
present and the binary input has been activated. The trip command can be blocked via binary inputs (no.
235.2115 >$00 BL.TripA) and (no. 235.2114 >$00 BLK.TRIP). The phase-selective blocking of the trip
command is required for interaction with the inrush restraint (see “Interaction with other functions”). The
function's dropout ratio can be set. If the threshold (>-element) is undershot after the pickup, the dropout
time delay will be started. The pickup is maintained during that time, a started trip delay time continues to
count down. If the trip time delay has elapsed while the dropout time delay is still during, the trip command
will only be given if the current threshold is exceeded. The element will only drop out when the dropout time
delay has elapsed. If the time is set to zero, the dropout will be initiated immediately once the threshold is
undershot.
External Trip Commands

The logic diagram does not explicitly depict the external trip commands since their functionality is analogous.
If the binary input is activated for external trip commands (no. 235.2112 >$00 Dir.TRIP), it will be logically
treated as threshold overshooting, i.e. once it has been activated, the pickup time delay is started. If the
pickup time delay is set to zero, the pickup condition will be reported immediately starting the trip time delay.
Otherwise, the logic is the same as depicted in Figure 2-20.
Interaction with Other Functions

The pickup message of the flexible function is included in the general fault detection, and tripping in the
general trip (see Chapter 2.11 Function Logic). All functionalities linked to the general fault detection and
general trip therefore also apply to the flexible function.
The trip commands by the flexible protection function are maintained after reset of the pickup for at least the
configured minimum trip-command duration 210 TMin TRIP CMD.
2.6.2 Setting Notes
The setting of the functional scope determines the number of flexible protection functions to be used (see
Section 2.1.1 Functional Scope). If a flexible function in the functional scope is disabled (by removing the
checkmark), this will result in losing all settings and configurations of this function or its settings will be reset
to their default settings.
General
In the DIGSI setting dialog “General”, parameter FLEXIBLE FUNC. can be set to OFF, ON or Alarm Only. If
the function is enabled in operational mode Alarm Only, no faults are recorded, no “Effective”indication is
generated, no trip command issued and neither will the circuit-breaker protection be affected. Therefore, this
operational mode is preferred when a flexible function is not required to operate as a protection function.
Furthermore, the OPERRAT. MODE can be configured:
3-phase – functions evaluate the three-phase measuring system, i.e. all three phases are processed simultane-
ously.
1-phase functions evaluate only the individual measured value. This can be an individual phase value (e.g VB)
or Vx or a ground variable (VN).
Setting no reference determines the evaluation of measured variables irrespective of a single or threep-
hase connection of voltage. Table 2-6 provides an overview regarding which variables can be used in which
mode of operation.
Measured Quantity
In the setting dialog “Measured Variable” the measured variables to be evaluated by the flexible protection
functions can be selected, which may be a calculated or a directly measured variable. The setting options that
can be selected here are dependant on the mode of measured-value processing as predefined in parameter
OPERRAT. MODE (see the following table).

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
Table 2-7 Parameter OPERRAT. MODE and MEAS. QUANTITY
Parameter OPERRAT. MODE Parameter MEAS. QUANTITY

Setting Setting Options
1-phase Voltage
3-phase
3-phase dV/dt rising
dV/dt falling
Without Reference Frequency
df/dt rising
df/dt falling
Binray Input
Measurement Process
The following table lists configurable measurement procedures depending on parameterized measured quan-
tities.
Table 2-8 Parameter in the Setting Dialog "Measurement Procedure", Mode of Operation 3-phase
Parameter OPERRAT. MODE = 3-phase

Parameter MEAS. QUANTITY = Voltage
Parameter MEAS. METHOD
Fundamental Only the fundamental harmonic is evaluated, higher harmonics are suppressed. This is
the standard measurement procedure of the protection functions.
Important: The voltage threshold value is always parameterized as phase-to-phase
voltage. If parameter VOLTAGE SYSTEM is selected as phase-to-ground, the voltage
threshold will be devided by √3.
True RMS The "true" RMS value is determined, i.e. higher harmonics are evaluated.
Important: The voltage threshold value is always parameterized as phase-to-phase
voltage. If parameter VOLTAGE SYSTEM is selected as phase-to-ground, the voltage
threshold will be devided by √3.
Positive seq., In order to realize certain applications, the positive sequence system or negative
Negative seq., sequence system can be configured as measurement procedure for example U2 (voltage
Zero sequence asymmetry)
Via the selection zero sequence system, additional zero sequence voltage functions can
be realized that operate independent of the ground variable VN, which are measured
directly via transformers.
Important: The voltage threshold is always parameterized according to the definition of
the balanced components independently of parameter VOLTAGE SYSTEM.
Parameter VOLTAGE
SYSTEM
Phase-Phase If you have configured address 213 VT Connect. 3ph to Van, Vbn, Vcn or Vab,
Phase-Ground Vbc, VGnd, you can select whether a 3- phase voltage function will evaluate the phase-
to-ground voltage or the phase-to-phase voltages.
When selecting phase-to-phase, these variables are derived from the phase-to-ground
voltages. The selection is, for example, important for single-pole faults. If the faulty
voltage drops to zero, the affected phase-to-ground voltage is zero, whereas the affected
phase-to-phase voltages collapse to the size of a phase-to-ground voltage.
With phase-to-phase voltage connections the parameter is hidden.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
NOTE
i With regard to the phase-selective pickup messages, a special behavior is observed in the three-phase
voltage protection with phase-to-phase variables, because the phase-selective pickup message "Flx01
Pickup Lx" is allocated to the respective measured-value channel "Lx".
Single-phase faults:
If, for example, voltage VA drops to such degree that voltages VAB and VA exceed their threshold values, the
device indicates pickups “Flx01 Pickup A” and “Flx01 Pickup C”, because the undershooting was detected in
the first and third measured-value channel.
Two-phase faults:
If, for example, voltage VAB drops to such degree that its threshold value is reached, the device then indi-
cates pickup "Flx01 Pickup A", because the undershooting was detected in the first measured-value
channel.
Table 2-9 Parameter in the Setting Dialog "Measurement Procedure", Mode of Operation 1-phase
Parameter OPERRAT. MODE = 1-phase

Parameter
MEAS. METHOD
Fundamental Only the fundamental harmonic is evaluated, higher harmonics are suppressed. This is
the standard measurement procedure of the protection functions.
True RMS The “True” RMS value is determined, i.e. higher harmonics are evaluated.
Parameter VOLTAGE
Va-n It is determined which voltage-measuring channel is evaluated by the function. When
Vb-n selecting phase-to-phase voltage, the threshold value must be set as a phase-to-phase
Vc-n value, when selecting a phase-to-ground variable as phase-toground voltage. The extent
of the setting texts depends on the connection of the voltage transformer (see
Va-b
address213 VT Connect. 3ph).
Vb-c
Vc-a
Vn
Vx
Settings
The pickup thresholds, delay times and dropout ratios of the flexible protection function are set in the
“Settings” dialog box in DIGSI.
The pickup threshold of the function is configured via parameter P.U. THRESHOLD. The TRIP-command delay
time is set via parameter T TRIP DELAY. Both setting values must be selected according to the required
application.
The pickup can be delayed via parameter T PICKUP DELAY. This parameter is usually set to zero (default
setting) in protection applications, because a protection function should pick up as quickly as possible. A
setting deviating from zero may be appropriate if a trip log is not desired to be started upon each short-term
exceeding of the pickup threshold, for example, when a function is not used as a protection, but as a moni-
toring function.
The dropout of pickup can be delayed via parameter T DROPOUT DELAY. This setting is also set to zero by
default (standard setting) A setting deviating from zero may be required if the device is utilized together with
electro-magnetic devices with considerably longer dropout ratios than the digital protection device. When
utilizing the dropout time delay, it is recommended to set it to a shorter time than the OFF-command delay
time in order to avoid both times to “race”.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
Parameter BLK.by Vol.Loss determines whether a function, with measured variable based on a voltage
measurement (measured variables voltage), should be blocked in case of a measured voltage failure/loss of
potential (set to YES) or not (set to NO).
The dropout ratio for the function can be set via the parameter DROPOUT RATIO. The standard dropout ratio
of protection functions is 0.95 (default setting). If the dropout ratio is decreased, it would be sensible to test
the pickup of the function regarding possible “chatter”.
The dropout difference of the frequency elements is set under parameter DO differential. Usually, the
default setting of 0.02 Hz can be retained. A higher dropout difference should be set in weak systems with
larger, short-term frequency fluctuations to avoid chattering of the message.
The frequency change measured value (df/dt) works with a fixed dropout difference of 0.1 Hz/s.
The same applies to the voltage change (dU/dt) measurand. The permanent dropout difference here is 3 V/s.
Renaming Messages, Checking Configurations

After parameterization of a flexible function, the following steps should be noted:
• Open matrix in DIGSI
• Rename the neutral message texts in accordance with the application.
• Check configurations on contacts and in operation and fault buffer, or set them according to the require-
ments.
2.6.3 Settings
0 FLEXIBLE FUNC. OFF OFF Flexible Function
ON
Alarm Only
0 OPERRAT. MODE 3-phase 3-phase Mode of Operation
1-phase
no reference
0 MEAS. QUANTITY Please select Please select Selection of Measured Quantity
Voltage
Frequency
df/dt rising
df/dt falling
Binray Input
dV/dt rising
dV/dt falling
0 MEAS. METHOD Fundamental Fundamental Selection of Measurement Method
True RMS
Positive seq.
Negative seq.
Zero sequence
Ratio I2/I1
0 PICKUP WITH Exceeding Exceeding Pickup with
Dropping below

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions

0 VOLTAGE Please select Please select Voltage
Va-n
Vb-n
Vc-n
Va-b
Vb-c
Vc-a
Vn
Vx
0 VOLTAGE SYSTEM Phase-Phase Phase-Phase Voltage System
Phase-Ground
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 2.0 .. 260.0 V 110.0 V Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 40.00 .. 60.00 Hz 51.00 Hz Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 50.00 .. 70.00 Hz 61.00 Hz Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 0.10 .. 20.00 Hz/s 5.00 Hz/s Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD 4 .. 100 V/s 60 V/s Pickup Threshold
0 T TRIP DELAY 0.00 .. 3600.00 sec 1.00 sec Trip Time Delay
0A T PICKUP DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec Pickup Time Delay
0A T DROPOUT DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec Dropout Time Delay
0A BLK.by Vol.Loss NO YES Block in case of Meas.-Voltage
YES Loss
0A DROPOUT RATIO 0.70 .. 0.99 0.95 Dropout Ratio
0A DROPOUT RATIO 1.01 .. 3.00 1.05 Dropout Ratio
0 DO differential 0.02 .. 1.00 Hz 0.03 Hz Dropout differential

Informa-
tion
235.2110 >BLOCK $00 SP >BLOCK Function $00
235.2111 >$00 instant. SP >Function $00 instantaneous TRIP
235.2112 >$00 Dir.TRIP SP >Function $00 Direct TRIP
235.2113 >$00 BLK.TDly SP >Function $00 BLOCK TRIP Time Delay
235.2114 >$00 BLK.TRIP SP >Function $00 BLOCK TRIP
235.2115 >$00 BL.TripA SP >Function $00 BLOCK TRIP Phase A
235.2116 >$00 BL.TripB SP >Function $00 BLOCK TRIP Phase B
235.2117 >$00 BL.TripC SP >Function $00 BLOCK TRIP Phase C
235.2118 $00 BLOCKED OUT Function $00 is BLOCKED
235.2119 $00 OFF OUT Function $00 is switched OFF
235.2120 $00 ACTIVE OUT Function $00 is ACTIVE
235.2121 $00 picked up OUT Function $00 picked up
235.2122 $00 pickup A OUT Function $00 Pickup Phase A
235.2123 $00 pickup B OUT Function $00 Pickup Phase B
235.2124 $00 pickup C OUT Function $00 Pickup Phase C

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions

Informa-
tion
235.2125 $00 Time Out OUT Function $00 TRIP Delay Time Out
235.2126 $00 TRIP OUT Function $00 TRIP
235.2128 $00 inval.set OUT Function $00 has invalid settings

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.7 Synchrocheck
2.7 Synchrocheck
When connecting two sections of a power system, the synchrocheck function verifies that the switching does
not endanger the stability of the power system
Applications
• Typical applications are, for example, the synchronization of a feeder and a busbar or the synchronization
of two busbars via tie-breaker.
2.7.1 Allgemeines
Synchronous power systems exhibit small differences regarding frequency and voltage values. Before connec-
tion it is to be checked whether the conditions are synchronous or not. If the conditions are synchronous, the
system is energized; if they are asynchronous, it is not. The circuit breaker operating time is not taken into
consideration. The synchrocheck function is activated via address 161 SYNCHROCHECK.
For comparing the two voltages of the sections of the power system to be synchronized, the synchrocheck
function uses the reference voltage V1 and an additional voltage to be connected V2.
If a transformer is connected between the two voltage transformers as shown in the following example, its
vector group can be adapted in the 7RW80 relay so that there is no external adjustment required.
[synchro-fkt-einspeis-061115, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-21 Infeed

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.7 Synchrocheck
[synchro-fkt-querkuppl-061115, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-22 Cross coupling
The synchrocheck function of the 7RW80 usually coordinates with the control function. Nevertheless, it is also
possible to employ an external automatic reclosing system. In such a case, the signal exchange between the
devices is to be accomplished via binary inputs and outputs.
The release command for closing under satisfied synchronism conditions can be deactivated via parameter
6113 25 Synchron. For special applications, the deactivated closing release can, however, be activated via a
binary input (>25 synchr.) (see “De-energized Switching”).
2.7.2 Functional Sequence
Validity Check of the Configuration

Already during startup of the device, a validation check of the configuration is performed. If there is a fault,
the message 25 Set-Error is output. after a measurement request there is a condition which is not plau-
sible, the message 25 Set-Error is output. The measurement is then not started.
Concerning the configuration, it is also checked if the substation parameter 213 is set to Vab, Vbc, VSyn or
Vph-g, VSyn. Furthermore, specific thresholds and settings of the function group are checked. If there is a
condition which is not plausible, the error message 25 Set-Error is output additionally. Please ensure in
this case that address 6106 (threshold V1, V2 energized) is smaller than address 6103 (lower voltage limit
Vmin). The synchrocheck function cannot be controlled via a binary input.
SYNC Error
The synchronization is not started if a voltage transformer failure (m.c.b. tripping) is communicated to the
device via the binary input 6509 >FAIL:FEEDER VT or 6510 >FAIL: BUS VT. The message 25 Sync.
Error is output. In this case, the synchronization can be controlled directly via a binary input.
In case of a protection pickup, the complete synchronization process is reset instantaneously.
Release
The synchrocheck function only operates if it receives a measurement request. This request may be issued by
the internal control function, the automatic reclosing function or externally via a binary input, e.g. from an
external automatic reclosing system.
Before a release for closing is granted, the following conditions are checked:
• Is the reference voltage V1 above the setting value Vmin but below the maximum voltage Vmax?
• Is the voltage V2 to be synchronized above the setting value Vmin, but below the maximum voltage
Vmax?
• Is the voltage difference V2 – V1 within the permissible limit dV SYNCHK V2>V1?

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.7 Synchrocheck
• Is the voltage difference V1 – V2 within the permissible limit dV SYNCHK V2<V1?
• Are the two frequencies f1 and f2 within the permissible operating range fNom ± 3 Hz?
• Is the frequency difference f2 – f1 within the permissible limit df SYNCHK f2>f1?
• Is the frequency difference f1 – f2 within the permissible limit df SYNCHK f2<f1?
• Is the angle difference α2 – α1 within the permissible limit dα SYNCHK α2>α1?
• Is the angle difference α1 – α2 within the permissible limit dα SYNCHK α2<α1?
If there is a condition which is not plausible, the message 25 Sync. Error is output and the measurement
is not started. the conditions are plausible, the measurement is started (message25-1 meas.) and the
configured release conditions are checked.
Each condition which is met is indicated explicitly (messages 25 Vdiff ok, 25 fdiff ok, 25 αdiff ok).
Conditions which are not met are also indicated explicitly, e.g. when the voltage difference (messages 25
V2>V1, 25 V2<V1), frequency difference (messages „25 f2>f1“, „25 f2<f1“) or angle difference (messages 25
α2>α1, 25 α2<α1) is outside the limit values. The precondition for these messages is that both voltages are
within the operating range of the synchrocheck function (see “Operating Range”).
If the conditions are met, the synchrocheck function issues a release signal for closing the relay (25 CloseR-
elease). This release signal is only available for the configured duration of the CLOSE command and is
processed by the device's function control as CLOSE command to the circuit breaker (see also margin heading
“Interaction with Control”). However, the message 25 Synchron is applied as long as the synchronous condi-
tions are met.
The measurement of the the synchronism conditions can be confined to the a maximum monitoring time T-
SYN. DURATION. If the conditions are not met within T-SYN. DURATION, the release is cancelled (message
25 MonTimeExc). A new synchronization can only be performed if a new measurement request is received.
Operating Range
The operating range of the synchrocheck function is defined by the configured voltage limits Vmin and Vmax
as well as the fixed frequency band fNom ± 3 Hz
If the measurement is started and one of or both voltages are outside the operating range or one of the
voltages leaves the operating range, this is indicated by corresponding messages (25 f1>>, 25 f1<<, 25
V1>>, 25 V1<<).
Measured Values
The measured values of the synchrocheck function are displayed in separate windows for primary, secondary
and percentaged measured values. The measured values are displayed and updated only while the synchro-
check function is requested.
The following is displayed:
• Value of the reference voltage V1
• Value of the voltage to be synchronized V2
• Frequency values f1 and f2
• Differences of voltage, frequency and angle.
2.7.3 De-energized Switching
Connecting two components of a power system is also possible if at least one of the components is de-ener-
gized and if the measured voltage is greater than the threshold 6106 V>. With a multi-phase connection on
the side V1, all connected voltages must have a higher value than the threshold V> so that the side V1 is
considered as being energized. With a single-phase connection, of course, only the one voltage has to exceed
the threshold value.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.7 Synchrocheck
Besides the release under synchronous conditions, the following additional release conditions can be selected
for the check:
SYNC V1>V2< = Release on the condition that component V1 is energized and component V2 is de-
energized.
SYNC V1<V2> = Release on the condition that component V1 is de-energized and component V2 is
energized.
SYNC V1<V2< = Release on the condition that component V1 and component V2 are de-energized.
Each of these conditions can be enabled or disabled individually via parameters or binary inputs; combinations
are thus also possible (e.g. release if SYNC V1>V2< or SYNC V1<V2> are fulfilled).
For that reason synchronization with the use of the additional parameter 6113 25 Synchron (configured to
NO) can also be used for the connection of a ground electrode. In such a case, connection is only permissible
when there is no voltage on the load side.
The threshold below which a power system component is considered as being de-energized is defined by
parameter V<. If the measured voltage exceeds the threshold V>, a power system component is considered as
being energized. With a multi-phase connection on the side V1, all connected voltages must have a higher
value than the threshold V> so that the side V1 is considered as being energized. With a single-phase connec-
tion, of course, only the one voltage has to exceed the threshold value.
Before granting a release for connecting the energized component V1 and the de-energized component V2,
the following conditions are checked:
• Is the reference voltage V1 above the setting value Vmin and V> but below the maximum voltage Vmax?
• Is the voltage to be synchronized V2 below the setting value V<?
• Is the frequency f1 within the permissible operating range fNom ± 3 Hz?
After successful completion of the checks, the release is granted.

For connecting the de-energized component 1 to the energized component 2 or the de-energized component
1 to the de-energized component 2, the conditions to be fulfilled correspond to those stated above.
The associated messages indicating the release via the corresponding condition are as follows: 25 V1> V2<,
25 V1< V2> and 25 V1< V2<.
Via the binary inputs >25 V1>V2<, >25 V1<V2> and >25 V1<V2<, the release conditions can also be issued
externally, provided the synchronization is controlled externally.
The parameter TSUP VOLTAGE (address 6111) can be set to configure a monitoring time which requires the
additional release conditions stated above to be present for de-energized connection before connection is
allowed.
2.7.4 Direct Command / Blocking
Parameter 6110 Direct CO can be set to grant a release without performing any checks. In this case,
connection is allowed immediately when initiating the synchrocheck function. It is obviously not reasonable to
combine Direct CO with other release conditions.
If the synchrocheck function fails, a direct command may be issued or not, depending on the type of failure
(also see “Plausibility Check” and “SYNC Error”).
Via the binary input >25direct CO, this release can also be granted externally.
Blocking the entire synchrocheck function is possible via the binary input >BLK 25-1. The message signaling
this condition is output via 25-1 BLOCK. With the blocking, the measurement is terminated and the entire
function is reset. A new measurement can only be performed with a new measurement request.
Via the binary input >BLK 25 CLOSE it is possible to block only the release signal for closing (25 CloseRe-
lease). When the blocking is active, measurement continues. The blocking is indicated by the message 25
CLOSE BLK. When the blocking is reset and the release conditions are still fulfilled, the release signal for
closing is issued.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.7 Synchrocheck
2.7.5 Interaction with Control and External Control
With Control
Basically, the synchrocheck function interacts with the device control. The switchgear component to be
synchronized is selected via a parameter. If a CLOSE command is issued, the control takes into account that
the switchgear component requires synchronization. The control sends a measurement request (25 Measu.
req.) to the synchrocheck function which is then started. Having completed the check, the synchrocheck
function issues the release message (25 CloseRelease) to which the control responds by terminating the
switching operation either positively or negatively.
[dw_zusam-wirk-steuer-synchro-fkt, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-23 Interaction of control and synchrocheck function
With External Control

As another option, the synchrocheck function can be activated via external measurement requests via binary
inputs. If the start is effected via the pulse start signal >25 Start, the corresponding stop signal >25 Stop
must always be generated, too. Having completed the check, the synchrocheck function issues the release
message (see the following figure). Measurement is terminated as soon as the measurement request is reset
via the binary input. In this case, there is no need to configure a control device to be synchronized.
[dw_zusam-wirk-synchro-fkt-mit-ext-anst, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-24 Interaction of synchrocheck function and external control
2.7.6 Setting Notes
General
The synchronization function can only operate if 25 Function 1 with SYNCHROCHECK was enabled at
address 161 during configuration of the functional scope (see Section 2.1.1.2 Setting Notes). If this function is
not required, then Disabled is set.
While setting the Power System Data 1 (see Section Voltage Connection (Power System), Page 29) the device
was already provided with data relevant for the measured values and the operating principle of the synchroni-
zation function. This concerns the following parameters:

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.7 Synchrocheck
202 Vnom PRIMARY primary nominal voltage of the voltage transformers V1 (phase-to-phase) in kV;
203 Vnom SECONDARY secondary nominal voltage of the voltage transformers V1 phase-to-phase) in V;
213 VT Connect. 3ph specifies how the voltage transformers are connected.
When using the synchronization function the setting Vab, Vbc, VSyn is used if two phase-to-phase
voltages are open delta-connected to the device. You can use any phase-to-phase voltage as the reference
voltage VSYN
Use the setting Vph-g, VSyn if only phase-to-ground voltages are available. One of these voltages is
connected to the first voltage transformer; the reference voltage VSYN is connected to the third voltage trans-
former. V1 at the first voltage transformer and V2 at the third voltage transformer must belong to the same
voltage type (VAN or VBN or VCN).
Connection examples are given under side heading “Voltage Connections” and in the Appendix C Connection
Examples).
If you have set Vab, Vbc, VSyn or Vph-g, VSyn, the zero sequence voltage can not be determined.
Table 2-1 in Section Voltage Connection (Power System), Page 29 provides information about the conse-
quences of the different voltage connection types.
The operating range of the synchronization function (fNom ± 3 Hz) refers to the nominal frequency of the
power system, address 214 Rated Frequency.
The corresponding messages of the SYNC function group are pre-allocated for IEC 60870–5–103 (VDEW).
Selecting the SYNC function group in DIGSI opens a dialog box with tabs in which the individual parameters
for synchronization can be set.
General Settings
The general thresholds for the synchronizing function are set at addresses 6101 to 6112.
Address 6101 Synchronizing allows you to switch the entire SYNC function group ON or OFF. If switched
off, the synchrocheck does not verify the synchronization conditions and release is not granted.
Parameter 6102 SyncCB is used to select the switchgear component to which the synchronization settings are
applied. Select the option none to use the function as external synchronizing feature. It will then be triggered
via binary input messages.
Addresses 6103 Vmin and 6104 Vmax set the upper and lower limits for the operating voltage range for V1 or
V2 and thus determine the operating range for the synchronization function. Values outside this range will be
signaled.
Address 6105 V< indicates the voltage threshold below which the feeder or the busbar can safely be consid-
ered switched off (for checking a de-energized feeder or busbar).
Address 6106 V> indicates the voltage threshold above which the feeder or busbar can safely be considered
energized (for checking an energized feeder or busbar). It must be set below the anticipated operational
undervoltage.
The setting for the mentioned voltage values is made in secondary volts. When using DIGSI for configuration,
these values can also be entered as primary values. Depending on the connection of the voltages these are
phase-to-earth voltages or phase-to-phase voltages.
Addresses 6107 to 6110 are set to specify the release conditions for the voltage check: Where
6107 SYNC V1<V2> = component V1 must be de-energized, component V2 must be energized (connection
when reference is de-energized, dead line);
6108 SYNC V1>V2< = component V1 must be energized, component V2 must be de-energized (connection
when feeder is de-energized, dead bus);
6109 SYNC V1<V2< = component V1 and component V2 must both be de-energized (connection when refer-
ence and feeder are de-energized, dead bus / dead line);
6110 Direct CO = connection released without checks.
The possible release conditions are independent of each other and can be combined. It is not recommended to
combine Direct CO with other release conditions.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.7 Synchrocheck
Parameter TSUP VOLTAGE (address 6111) can be set to configure a monitoring time which requires above
stated release conditions to be present for at least de-energized switching before connection is allowed. The
preset value of 0.1 s accounts for transient responses and can be applied without modification.
Release via synchrocheck can be limited to a configurable synchronous monitoring time SYN. DURATION
(address 6112). The configured conditions must be fulfilled within this time period. Otherwise release is not
granted and the synchronizing function is terminated. If this time is set to ∞, the conditions will be checked
until they are fulfilled.
For special applications (e.g. connecting a ground switch) parameter 6113 25 Synchron allows enabling/
disabling the connection release when the conditions for synchronism are satisfied.
Power System Data

The system related data for the synchronization function are set at addresses 6121 to 6125.
The parameter Balancing V1/V2 (address 6121) can be set to account for different VT ratios of the two
parts of the power system (see example in Figure 2-25).
If a transformer is located between the system parts to be synchronized, its vector group can be accounted for
by angle adjustment so that no external adjusting measures are required. Parameter ANGLE ADJUSTM.
(address 6122) is used to this end.
The phase angle from V1 to V2 is evaluated positively.
Example:
Busbar 400 kV primary; 100 V secondary
Feeder 220 kV primary; 110 V secondary
Transformer 400 kV/220 kV; vector group Dy(n)5
The transformer vector group is defined from the high side to the low side. In the example, the reference
voltage transformers (V1) are the ones of the transformer high side, i.e. the setting angle is 5 x 30° (according
to vector group), that is 150°:
Address 6122 ANGLE ADJUSTM. = 150°.
The reference voltage transformers supply 100 V secondary for primary operation at nominal value while the
feeder transformer supplies 110 V secondary. Therefore, this difference must be balanced:
Address 6121 Balancing V1/V2 = 100 V/110 V = 0.91.
[ss-spg-ueber-trafo-gemess-061115, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-25 Busbar voltage measured across the transformer

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.7 Synchrocheck
Voltage Connections
The 7RW80 provides two voltage inputs for connecting the voltage V1 and one voltage input for connecting
the voltage V2 (see the following examples).
If two phase-to-phase voltages are open delta-connected to side V1 as reference voltage, a phase-to-phase
voltage must be connected and configured for the additional voltage V2 to be synchronized.
To correctly compare the phase-to-phase reference voltage V1 with the additional voltage V2, the device needs
to know the connection type of voltage V2. That is the task of parameter CONNECTIONof V2 (parameter
6123).
For the device to perform the internal conversion to primary values, the primary rated transformer voltage of
the measured quantity V2 must be entered via parameter 6125 VT Vn2, primary, primary if a transformer
is located between the system parts to be synchronized.
[sync-mehrphasig-anschl-061116, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-26 Phase-to-phase voltage connection (open-delta connection)
If only phase-to-ground voltages are available, the reference voltage V1 is connected to the first voltage trans-
former and the additional voltage V2 to the third voltage transformer.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.7 Synchrocheck
[sync-1phasig-anschl-le-061116, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-27 Phase-to-ground voltage connection
Voltage Difference
The parameters 6150 dV SYNCHK V2>V1 and 6151 dV SYNCHK V2<V1 can be set to adjust the permissible
voltage differences asymmetrically. The availability of two parameters enables an asymmetrical release to be
set.
Frequency Difference
The parameters 6152 df SYNCHK f2>f1 and 6153 df SYNCHK f2<f1 determine the permissible
frequency differences. The availability of two parameters enables an asymmetrical release to be set.
Operating Range
The parameters 6154 dα SYNCHK α2>α1 and 6155 dα SYNCHK α2<α1 delimit the operating range for
switching under synchronous system conditions. The availability of two parameters enables an asymmetrical
release range to be set.
2.7.7 Settings
6101 Synchronizing ON OFF Synchronizing Function
OFF
6102 SyncCB (Einstellmöglichkeiten none Synchronizable circuit breaker
anwendungsabhängig)
6103 Vmin 20 .. 125 V 90 V Minimum voltage limit: Vmin
6104 Vmax 20 .. 140 V 110 V Maximum voltage limit: Vmax
6105 V< 1 .. 60 V 5V Threshold V1, V2 without voltage
6106 V> 20 .. 140 V 80 V Threshold V1, V2 with voltage

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.7 Synchrocheck

6107 SYNC V1<V2> YES NO ON-Command at V1< and V2>
NO
6108 SYNC V1>V2< YES NO ON-Command at V1> and V2<
NO
6109 SYNC V1<V2< YES NO ON-Command at V1< and V2<
NO
6110A Direct CO YES NO Direct ON-Command
NO
6111A TSUP VOLTAGE 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.10 sec Supervision time of V1>;V2> or
V1<;V2<
6112 SYN. DURATION 0.01 .. 1200.00 sec 30.00 sec Maximum duration of
synchronism-check
6113A 25 Synchron YES YES Switching at synchronous condi-
NO tion
6121 Balancing V1/V2 0.50 .. 2.00 1.00 Balancing factor V1/V2
6122A ANGLE ADJUSTM. 0 .. 360 ° 0° Angle adjustment (transformer)
6123 CONNECTIONof V2 A-B A-B Connection of V2
B-C
C-A
6125 VT Vn2, primary 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 20.00 kV VT nominal voltage V2, primary
6150 dV SYNCHK V2>V1 0.5 .. 50.0 V 5.0 V Maximum voltage difference
V2>V1
6151 dV SYNCHK V2<V1 0.5 .. 50.0 V 5.0 V Maximum voltage difference
V2<V1
6152 df SYNCHK f2>f1 0.01 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency difference
f2>f1
6153 df SYNCHK f2<f1 0.01 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency difference
f2<f1
6154 dα SYNCHK α2>α1 2 .. 80 ° 10 ° Maximum angle difference
alpha2>alpha1
6155 dα SYNCHK α2<α1 2 .. 80 ° 10 ° Maximum angle difference
alpha2<alpha1

Informa-
tion
170.0001 >25-1 act SP >25-group 1 activate
170.0043 >25 Sync requ. SP >25 Synchronization request
170.0049 25 CloseRelease OUT 25 Sync. Release of CLOSE Command
170.0050 25 Sync. Error OUT 25 Synchronization Error
170.0051 25-1 BLOCK OUT 25-group 1 is BLOCKED
170.2007 25 Measu. req. SP 25 Sync. Measuring request of Control
170.2008 >BLK 25-1 SP >BLOCK 25-group 1
170.2009 >25direct CO SP >25 Direct Command output
170.2011 >25 Start SP >25 Start of synchronization
170.2012 >25 Stop SP >25 Stop of synchronization
170.2013 >25 V1>V2< SP >25 Switch to V1> and V2<

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.7 Synchrocheck

Informa-
tion
170.2014 >25 V1<V2> SP >25 Switch to V1< and V2>
170.2015 >25 V1<V2< SP >25 Switch to V1< and V2<
170.2016 >25 synchr. SP >25 Switch to Sync
170.2022 25-1 meas. OUT 25-group 1: measurement in progress
170.2025 25 MonTimeExc OUT 25 Monitoring time exceeded
170.2026 25 Synchron OUT 25 Synchronization conditions okay
170.2027 25 V1> V2< OUT 25 Condition V1>V2< fulfilled
170.2028 25 V1< V2> OUT 25 Condition V1<V2> fulfilled
170.2029 25 V1< V2< OUT 25 Condition V1<V2< fulfilled
170.2030 25 Vdiff ok OUT 25 Voltage difference (Vdiff) okay
170.2031 25 fdiff ok OUT 25 Frequency difference (fdiff) okay
170.2032 25 αdiff ok OUT 25 Angle difference (alphadiff) okay
170.2033 25 f1>> OUT 25 Frequency f1 > fmax permissible
170.2034 25 f1<< OUT 25 Frequency f1 < fmin permissible
170.2035 25 f2>> OUT 25 Frequency f2 > fmax permissible
170.2036 25 f2<< OUT 25 Frequency f2 < fmin permissible
170.2037 25 V1>> OUT 25 Voltage V1 > Vmax permissible
170.2038 25 V1<< OUT 25 Voltage V1 < Vmin permissible
170.2039 25 V2>> OUT 25 Voltage V2 > Vmax permissible
170.2040 25 V2<< OUT 25 Voltage V2 < Vmin permissible
170.2050 V1 = MV V1 =
170.2051 f1 = MV f1 =
170.2052 V2 = MV V2 =
170.2053 f2 = MV f2 =
170.2054 dV = MV dV =
170.2055 df = MV df =
170.2056 dα = MV dalpha =
170.2090 25 V2>V1 OUT 25 Vdiff too large (V2>V1)
170.2091 25 V2<V1 OUT 25 Vdiff too large (V2<V1)
170.2092 25 f2>f1 OUT 25 fdiff too large (f2>f1)
170.2093 25 f2<f1 OUT 25 fdiff too large (f2<f1)
170.2094 25 α2>α1 OUT 25 alphadiff too large (a2>a1)
170.2095 25 α2<α1 OUT 25 alphadiff too large (a2<a1)
170.2096 25 FG-Error OUT 25 Multiple selection of func-groups
170.2097 25 Set-Error OUT 25 Setting error
170.2101 25-1 OFF OUT Sync-group 1 is switched OFF
170.2102 >BLK 25 CLOSE SP >BLOCK 25 CLOSE command
170.2103 25 CLOSE BLK OUT 25 CLOSE command is BLOCKED

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.8 24 Overexcit. Protection (Volt/Hertz)

Overexcitation protection is used to detect inadmissibly high induction in generators and transformers, espe-
cially in power station unit transformers. The protection must intervene when the limit value for the protected
object (e.g. unit transformer) is exceeded. The transformer is endangered, for example, if the power station
block is disconnected from the system from full-load, and if the voltage regulator either does not operate or
does not operate sufficiently fast to control the associated voltage rise. Similarly a decrease in frequency
(speed), e.g. in island systems, can lead to an inadmissible increase in induction.
An increase in induction above the rated value quickly saturates the iron core and causes large eddy current
losses.
Measurement Method
The overexcitation protection feature servers to measure the voltage V/frequency f, ratio f, which is propor-
tional to the B induction and puts it in relation to the BN nominal induction. In this context, both voltage and
frequency are related to nominal values of the object to be protected (generator, transformer).
[uebereregungsschutz-020827-ho, 1, en_US]
[uebereregungsschutz2-020827-ho, 1, en_US]
The calculation is based on the maximum of the three phase-to-phase voltages. The frequency range moni-
tored extends from 25 Hz to 70 Hz.
Voltage Transformer Adaptation

Any deviation between the primary nominal voltage of the voltage transformers and of the protected object is
compensated by an internal correction factor (VNom prim/VNom Mach). For this reason pickup values and character-
istic do not need to be converted to secondary values. However the system primary nominal transformer
voltage and the nominal voltage of the object to be protected must be entered correctly (see Sections
2.1.3 Power System Data 1 and 2.1.6 Power System Data 2).
Characteristics
Overexcitation protection includes two time graded characteristics and one thermal characteristic for approxi-
mate modeling of the heating of the protection object due to overexcitation. As soon as a first pickup
threshold (warning element 4302 24-1 PICKUP) has been exceeded, a 4303 24-1 DELAY time element is
started. On its expiry a warning message is transmitted. At the same time a counter switching is activated
when the pickup threshold is exceeded. This weighted counter is incremented in accordance with the current
V/f value resulting in the trip time for the parametrized characteristic. A trip signal is transmitted as soon as the
trip counter state has been reached.
The trip signal is retracted as soon as the value falls below the pickup threshold and the counter is decre-
mented in accordance with a parametrizable cool-down time.
The thermal characteristic is specified by 8 value pairs for overexcitation V/f (related to nominal values) and
trip time t. In most cases, the specified characteristic for standard transformers provides sufficient protection.
If this characteristic does not correspond to the actual thermal behavior of the object to be protected, any
desired characteristic can be implemented by entering customer-specific trip times for the specified V/f overex-
citation values. Intermediate values are determined by a linear interpolation within the device.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
[ausloesebereich-des-uebereregungsschutz-020827-ho, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-28 Tripping Range of the Overexcitation Protection
The characteristic resulting from the device default settings is shown in the Technical Data Section Overexcita-
tion Protection. Figure 2-28 illustrates the behaviour of the protection on the assumption that within the
framework of configuration the setting for the pickup threshold (parameter 4302 24-1 PICKUP) was chosen
higher or lower than the first setting value of the thermal characteristic.
The following figure shows the logic diagram for overexcitation protection. The counter can be reset to zero
by means of a blocking input or a reset input.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
[logikdiagramm-des-uebereregungsschutzes-020827-ho, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-29 Logic diagram of the Overecxitation protection
2.8.2 Setting Notes
General
Overecxitation Protection is only in effect and accessible if address 143 24 V/f is set to Enabled during
configuration of protective functions. If the function is not required Disabled is set. Under address 4301 FCT
24 V/f the function can be turned ON or OFF.
Overexcitation protection measures the voltage/frequency quotient which is proportional to the induction B.
The protection must intervene when the limit value for the protected object (e.g. unit transformer) is
exceeded. The transformer is for example endangered if the power station block is switched off at full-load
operation and the voltage regulator does not respond fast enough or not at all to avoid related voltage
increase.
Similarly a decrease in frequency (speed), e.g. in island systems, can lead to an inadmissible increase in induc-
tion.
In this way the V/f protection monitors the correct functioning both of the voltage regulator and of the speed
regulation, in all operating states.
Independent Elements
The limit-value setting at address 4302 24-1 PICKUP is based on the induction limit value relation to the
nominal induction (B/BN) as specified by the manufacturer of the object to be protected.
A pickup message is transmitted as soon as the induction limit value V/f at address 4302 is exceeded. A
warning message is transmitted after expiry of the corresponding 4303 24-1 DELAY time delay.
The 4304 24-2 PICKUP, 4305 24-2 DELAY trip element characteristic serves to rapidly switch off particu-
larly strong overexcitations.
The time set for this purpose is an additional time delay which does not include the operating time (measuring
time, drop-out time).

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
Thermal Characteristic
A thermal characteristic is superimposed on the trip element characteristic. For this purpose, the temperature
rise created by the overexcitation is approximately modeled. Not only the already mentioned pickup signal is
generated on transgression of the V/f induction limit set at address 4302, but in addition a counter is activated
additionally which causes the tripping after a length of time corresponding to the set characteristic.
[thermische-ausloesekennlinie-020827-ho, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-30 Thermal tripping time characteristic (with presettings)
The characteristic of a Siemens standard transformer was selected as a default setting for the parameters
4306 to 4313. If the protection object manufacturer did not provide any information, the preset standard
characteristic should be used. Otherwise, any trip characteristic can be specified entering parameters point-
bypoint over a maximum of 7 straight lengths. To do this, the trip times t of the overexcitation values V/f =
1.05; 1.10; 1.15; 1.20; 1.25; 1.30; 1.35 and 1.40 are read out from predefined characteristic and entered at
the addresses 4306 24-t(V/f=1.05) to 4313 24-t(V/f=1.40) 24-t(V/f=1.40). The protection device
interpolates linearly between the points.
Limitation
The heating model of the object to be protected is limited to a 150 % overshoot of the trip temperature.
Cooling time
Tripping by the thermal image drops out by the time of the pickup threshold dropout. However, the counter
content is counted down to zero with the cooldown time parametrized at address 4314 24 T COOL DOWN. In
this context this parameter is defined as the time required by the thermal image to cool down from 100 % to
0 %.
Voltage Transformer Adaptation

Any deviation between primary nominal voltage of the voltage transformers and of the object to be protected
is compensated by an internal correction factor (VNom prim/VNom Mach). For this it is necessary that the relevant
parameters 202 Vnom PRIMARY and 1101 FullScaleVolt. have been entered correctly in accordance
with Section 2.1.3.2 Setting Notes and 2.1.6.2 Setting Notes.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.8.3 Settings

4301 FCT 24 V/f OFF OFF 24 Overexcit. Protection (Volt/
ON Hertz)
4302 24-1 PICKUP 1.00 .. 1.20 1.10 24-1 V/f Pickup
4303 24-1 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 10.00 sec 24-1 V/f Time Delay
4304 24-2 PICKUP 1.00 .. 1.40 1.40 24-2 V/f Pickup
4305 24-2 DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 1.00 sec 24-2 V/f Time Delay
4306 24-t(V/f=1.05) 0 .. 20000 sec 20000 sec 24 V/f = 1.05 Time Delay
4314 24 T COOL DOWN 0 .. 20000 sec 3600 sec 24 Time for Cooling Down

Informa-
tion
5353 >BLOCK 24 SP >BLOCK 24
5357 >24 RM th.repl. SP >24 Reset memory of thermal replica V/f
5361 24 OFF OUT 24 is swiched OFF
5362 24 BLOCKED OUT 24 is BLOCKED
5363 24 ACTIVE OUT 24 is ACTIVE
5367 24 warn OUT 24 V/f warning element
5369 24 RM th. repl. OUT 24 Reset memory of thermal replica V/f
5370 24-1 picked up OUT 24-1 V/f> picked up
5371 24-2 TRIP OUT 24-2 TRIP of V/f>> element
5372 24 th.TRIP OUT 24 TRIP of th. element
5373 24-2 picked up OUT 24-2 V/f>> picked up

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.9 Jump of Voltage Vector

Consumers with their own generating plant, for example, feed power directly into a network. The incoming
feeder line is usually the technical and legal ownership boundary between the network operator and these
consumers/ producers. A failure of the input feeder line, for example, due to a three-pole automatic reclosure,
can result in a deviation of the voltage or frequency at the feeding generator which is a function of the overall
power balance. When the incoming feeder line is switched on again after the dead time, asynchronous condi-
tions may prevail that cause damage to the generator or the gear train between generator and drive.
One way to identify an interruption of the incoming feeder is to monitor the phase angle in the voltage. If the
incoming feeder fails, the abrupt current interruption causes a phase angle jump in the voltage. This jump is
detected by means of a delta process. As soon as a preset threshold is exceeded, an opening command for the
generator or bus-tie coupler circuit-breaker is issued.
This means that the vector jump function is mainly used for network decoupling.
Frequency Behaviour on Load Shedding

The following figure shows the evolution of the frequency when a load is disconnected from a generator.
Opening of the generator circuit breaker causes a phase angle jump that can be observed in the frequency
measurement as a frequency jump. The generator is accelerated in accordance with the power system condi-
tions.
[veraenderung-der-frequenz-nach-lastabschaltg-020904-ho, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-31 Change of the Frequency after Disconnection of a Load (Fault recording with the SIPROTEC 4
device – the figure shows the deviation from the nominal frequency)
Measuring principle
For a three phase voltage connection, the vector of the positive sequence system voltage is calculated . For a
single-phase connection, the connected single-phase voltage is evaluated. The phase angle change of the
voltage vector is determined over a delta interval of 2 cycles. The presence of a phase angle jump indicates an
abrupt change of current flow. The basic principle is shown in Figure 2-32. The diagram on the left shows the

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
steady state, and the diagram on the right the vector change following a load shedding. The vector jump is
clearly visible.
[spannungszeiger-nach-entlastung-020904-ho, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-32 Voltage Vector Following Load Shedding
The function features a number of additional measures to avoid spurious tripping, such as:
• Correction of steady-state deviations from rated frequency
• Frequency operating range limited to fNom ± 3 Hz
• Detection of internal scanning frequency changeover (Scanning frequency adjustment)
• Minimum voltage for enabling
• Blocking on voltage connection or disconnection
Logic
The logic is shown in Figure 2-33. The phase angle comparison determines the angle difference, and
compares it with the set value. If this value is exceeded, the vector jump is stored in a RS flip-flop. Trippings
can be delayed by the associated time delay.
The stored pickup can be reset via a binary input, or automatically by a timer (address 4604 T RESET).
The vector jump function becomes ineffective on exiting the admissible frequency band. The same applies for
the voltage. In such a case the limiting parameters are V MIN and V MAX.
If the frequency or voltage range is not maintained, the logic generates a logical 1, and the reset input is
continuously active. The result of the vector jump measurement is suppressed. If, for instance, the voltage is
connected, and the frequency range is correct, the logical 1 changes to 0. The timer T BLOCK with reset delay
keeps the reset input active for a certain time, thus preventing a pickup caused by the vector jump function.
If a short-circuit causes the voltage to drop abruptly to a low value, the reset input is immediately activated to
block the function. The vector jump function is thus prevented from causing a trip.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
[logikdiagramm-der-vektorsprungerfassung-020827-ho, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-33 Logic diagram of the vector jump detection
2.9.2 Setting Notes
General
The vector jump protection is only effective and available if address 146 VECTOR JUMP is set to Enabled
during configuration.
Under address 4601 VECTOR JUMP the function can be turned ON or OFF.
Pickup Values
The value to be set for the vector jump (address 4602 DELTA PHI) depends on the feed and load conditions.
Abrupt active power changes cause a jump of the voltage vector. The value to be set must be established in
accordance with the particular power system. This can be done on the basis of the simplified equivalent circuit
of the diagram “Voltage Vector Following Load Shedding” in the Functional Description section, or using
network calculation software.
If a setting is too sensitive, the protection function is likely to perform a network decoupling every time loads
are connected or disconnected. Therefore the default setting is 10°.
The admissible voltage operating range can be set at addresses 4605 for V MIN and 4606 for V MAX. The
setting values for V MIN and V MAX always refer to phase-phase voltages. With a single-phase connection
they refer to the phase-to-ground voltage of the selected connection. Setting range limits are to some extent a
matter of the utility's policy. The value for V MIN should be below the admissible level of short voltage dips
for which network decoupling is desired. The default setting is 80 % of the nominal voltage. For V MAX the
maximum admissible voltage must be selected. This will be in most cases 130 % of the nominal voltage.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
Time Delays
The time delay T DELTA PHI (address 4603) should be left at zero, unless you wish to transmit the trip indi-
cation with a delay to a logic (CFC), or to leave enough time for an external blocking to take effect.
After expiry of the timer T RESET (address 4604), the protection function is automatically reset. The reset
time depends on the decoupling policy. It must have expired before the circuit breaker is reclosed. Where the
automatic reset function is not used, the timer is set to ∞. The reset signal must come in this case from the
binary input (circuit breaker auxiliary contact).
The timer T BLOCK with reset delay (address 4607) helps to avoid overfunctioning when voltages are
connected or disconnected. Normally the default setting need not be changed. Any change can be performed
with the DIGSI communication software (advanced parameters). It must be kept in mind that T BLOCK should
not be set less than the measuring window for vector jump measurement (150 ms).
2.9.3 Settings
4601 VECTOR JUMP OFF OFF Jump of Voltage Vector
ON
4602 DELTA PHI 2 .. 30 ° 10 ° Jump of Phasor DELTA PHI
4603 T DELTA PHI 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec T DELTA PHI Time Delay
4604 T RESET 0.10 .. 60.00 sec 5.00 sec Reset Time after Trip
4605A V MIN 10.0 .. 125.0 V 80.0 V Minimal Operation Voltage V MIN
4606A V MAX 10.0 .. 170.0 V 130.0 V Maximal Operation Voltage V MAX
4607A T BLOCK 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.15 sec Time Delay of Blocking

Informa-
tion
5581 >VEC JUMP block SP >BLOCK Vector Jump
5582 VEC JUMP OFF OUT Vector Jump is switched OFF
5583 VEC JMP BLOCKED OUT Vector Jump is BLOCKED
5584 VEC JUMP ACTIVE OUT Vector Jump is ACTIVE
5585 VEC JUMP Range OUT Vector Jump not in measurement range
5586 VEC JUMP pickup OUT Vector Jump picked up
5587 VEC JUMP TRIP OUT Vector Jump TRIP

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.10 Phase Rotation
2.10 Phase Rotation

A phase rotation function via binary input and parameter is implemented in 7RW80 devices.
Applications
• Phase rotation ensures that all protective and monitoring functions operate correctly even with anti-
clockwise rotation, without the need for two phases to be reversed.
General
Various functions of the 7RW80 only operate correctly if the phase rotation of the voltages is known. Among
these functions are undervoltage protection (based only on positive sequence voltages) and measured value
monitors.
If an "acb" phase rotation is normal, the appropriate setting is made during configuration of the Power System
Data.
If the phase rotation can change during operation (e.g. the direction of a motor must be routinely changed),
then a changeover signal at the routed binary input for this purpose is sufficient to inform the protective relay
of the phase rotation reversal.
Logic
Phase rotation is permanently established at address 209 PHASE SEQ. (Power System Data). Via the exclu-
sive- OR gate the binary input >Reverse Rot. inverts the sense of the phase rotation applied with setting.
[dw_meldelogikdrehfeldumschaltung, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-34 Message logic of the phase rotation reversal
Influence on Protective and Monitoring Functions

The swapping of phases directly impacts the calculation of positive and negative sequence quantities, as well
as phase-to-phase voltages via the subtraction of one phase-to-ground voltage from another and vice versa.
Therefore, this function is vital so that phase detection messages, fault values, and operating measurement
values are not correct. As stated before, this function influences the voltage protection, flexible protection
functions and some of the monitoring functions that issue messages if the defined and calculated phase rota-
tions do not match.
2.10.2 Setting Notes
Setting the Function Parameter

The normal phase sequence is set at 209 (see Section 2.1.3 Power System Data 1). If, on the system side,
phase rotation is reversed temporarily, then this is communicated to the protection device using the binary
input >Reverse Rot. (5145).

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.11 Function Logic
2.11 Function Logic

The function logic coordinates the execution of protection and auxiliary functions, it processes the resulting
decisions and information received from the system. This includes in particular:
Fault Detection / Pickup Logic
Processing Tripping Logic
2.11.1 Pickup Logic of the Entire Device
General Device Pickup

The pickup signals for all protection functions in the device are connected via an OR logic and lead to the
general device pickup. 4 It is initiated by the first function to pick up and drop out when the last function
drops out. As a consequence, the following message is reported: 501 Relay PICKUP.
The general pickup is a prerequisite for a number of internal and external consequential functions. The
following are among the internal functions controlled by general device pickup:
• Start of a trip log: From general device pickup to general device dropout, all fault messages are entered in
the trip log.
• Initialization of Oscillographic Records: The storage and maintenance of oscillographic values can also be
made dependent on the general device pickup.
Exception: Apart from the settings ON or OFF, some protection functions can also be set to Alarm Only. With
setting Alarm Only no trip command is given, no trip log is created, fault recording is not initiated and no
spontaneous fault annunciations are shown on the display.
External functions may be controlled via an output contact. Examples are:
• Automatic reclosing devices,
• Starting of additional devices, or similar.
2.11.2 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device
General Tripping
The trip signals for all protective functions are connected by OR and generate the message 511 Relay TRIP.
This message can be configured to an LED or binary output, just as the individual tripping messages can.
Terminating the Trip Signal

Once the trip command is output by the protection function, it is recorded as message Relay TRIP (see
Figure 2-35). At the same time, the minimum trip command duration TMin TRIP CMD is started. This
ensures that the command is transmitted to the circuit breaker for a sufficient amount of time, even if the
function which issued the trip signal drops out quickly. The trip commands can be terminated first when the
last protection function has dropped out (no function is in pickup mode) AND the minimum trip signal dura-
tion has expired.
Finally, it is possible to latch the trip signal until it is manually reset (lockout function). This allows the circuit-
breaker to be locked against reclosing until the cause of the fault has been clarified and the lockout has been
manually reset. The reset takes place either by pressing the LED reset key or by activating an appropriately
allocated binary input (>Reset LED). A precondition, of course, is that the circuit-breaker close coil – as usual
– remains blocked as long as the trip signal is present, and that the trip coil current is interrupted by the auxil-
iary contact of the circuit breaker.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.11 Function Logic
[dw_7sj6x-abst-ausloesekommando, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-35 Terminating the Trip Signal
2.11.3 Setting Notes
Trip Signal Duration

The minimum trip command duration TMin TRIP CMD was described already in Section 2.1.3 Power System
Data 1. This setting applies to all protective functions that initiate tripping.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.12 Auxiliary Functions

The general functions of the device are described in chapter "Auxililary Functions".
2.12.1 Message Processing
After the occurrence of a system fault, data regarding the response of the protective relay and the measured
values are saved for future analysis. For this reason the device is designed to perform message processing.
Applications
• LED Display and Binary Outputs (Output Relays)
• Information via Display Field or Personal Computer
• Information to a Control Center
Prerequisites
The SIPROTEC 4 System Description provides a detailed description of the configuration procedure
(see /1/ SIPROTEC 4 System Description).
2.12.1.1 LED Displays and Binary Outputs (Output Relays)

Important events and conditions are displayed, using LEDs at the front panel of the relay. The device further-
more has output relays for remote indication. All LEDs and binary outputs indicating specific messages can be
freely configured. The relay is delivered with a default setting. The Appendix of this manual deals in detail with
the delivery status and the allocation options.
The output relays and the LEDs may be operated in a latched or unlatched mode (each may be individually
set).
The latched conditions are protected against loss of the auxiliary voltage. They are reset:
• On site by pressing the LED key on the relay,
• Remotely using a binary input configured for that purpose,
• Using one of the serial interfaces,
• Automatically at the beginning of a new pickup.

State indication messages should not be latched. Also, they cannot be reset until the criterion to be reported
has reset. This applies to messages from monitoring functions, or similar.
A green LED displays operational readiness of the relay ("RUN“), and cannot be reset. It goes out if the self-
check feature of the microprocessor recognizes an abnormal occurrence, or if the auxiliary voltage is lost.
When auxiliary voltage is present, but the relay has an internal malfunction, then the red LED ("ERROR") lights
up and the processor blocks the relay.
2.12.1.2 Information on the Integrated Display (LCD) or Personal Computer
Events and conditions can be read out on the display at the front cover of the relay. Using the front PC inter-
face or the port B at the botton, a personal computer can be connected, to which the information can be sent.
The relay is equipped with several event buffers, for operational messages, circuit breaker statistics, etc.,
which are protected against loss of the auxiliary voltage by a buffer battery. These messages can be displayed
on the LCD at any time by selection via the keypad or transferred to a personal computer via the serial service
or PC interface. Readout of messages during operation is described in detail in the SIPROTEC 4 System Descrip-
tion.
Classification of Messages
The messages are categorized as follows:

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
• Operational messages (event log); messages generated while the device is operating: Information
regarding the status of device functions, measured data, power system data, control command logs etc.
• Fault indications; these are indications of the last 25 network faults that were processed by the device.
• Messages of "statistics"; they include a counter for the trip commands initiated by the device and possibly
reclose commands.
A complete list of all message and output functions that can be generated by the device with the maximum
functional scope can be found in the appendix. All functions are associated with an information number
(FNo). There is also an indication of where each message can be sent to. If functions are not present in a not
fully equipped version of the device, or are configured to Disabled, then the associated indications cannot
appear.
Operational Messages (Buffer: Event Log)

The operational messages contain information that the device generates during operation and about opera-
tional conditions. Up to 200 operational messages are recorded in chronological order in the device. New
messages are appended at the end of the list. If the memory is used up, then the oldest message is scrolled
out of the list by a new message.
Fault Messages (Buffer: Trip Log)

After a fault on the system, for example, important information about the progression of the fault can be
retrieved, such as the pickup of a protective element or the initiation of a trip signal. The start of the fault is
time stamped with the absolute time of the internal system clock. The progress of the disturbance is output
with a relative time referred to the instant of fault detection, so that the duration of the fault until tripping and
up to reset of the trip command can be ascertained. The resolution of the time information is 1 ms.
Spontaneous Displays on the Device Front

After occurrence of a fault, the most important fault data is output automatically on the device display,
without any further operating actions. It is displayed after a general device pickup in the sequence shown in
the following figure.
[dw_display-spontanmeldungen, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-36 Display of spontaneous messages in the HMI
Retrievable Messages
The messages for the last eight network faults can be retrieved and read out. The definition of a network fault
is such that the time period from fault detection up to final clearing of the disturbance is considered to be one
network fault. Within a network fault, several fault messages can occur (from the first pickup of a protective
function to the last dropout of a protective function). Each fault event represents a network fault.
In total 600 indications can be recorded. Oldest data are erased for newest data when the buffer is full.
General Interrogation
The general interrogation which can be retrieved via DIGSI enables the current status of the SIPROTEC 4 device
to be read out. All messages requiring general interrogation are displayed with their present value.
Spontaneous Messages
The spontaneous messages displayed using DIGSI reflect the present status of incoming information. Each
new incoming message appears immediately, i.e. the user does not have to wait for an update or initiate one.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.12.1.3 Information to a Control Center

Stored information can additionally be transferred to a central control and storage device if the relay is
connected to such a device via port B. Transmission is possible via various transmission protocols.
2.12.2 Statistics
The number of trips initiated by the 7RW80 and the operating hours under load are counted. An additional
counter enables the tripping of the count of the hours, in which the circuit breaker is positioned in condition
“open”.
The counter and memory levels are secured against loss of auxiliary voltage.
During the first start of the protection device the statistical values are pre-defined to zero.
Number of Trips
In order to count the number of trips of 7RW80, the 7RW80 relay has to be informed of the position of the
circuit breaker auxiliary contacts via binary inputs. Hereby, it is necessary that the internal pulse counter #of
TRIPs= is allocated in the matrix to a binary input that is controlled by the circuit breaker OPEN position. The
pulse count value "Number of TRIPs CB" can be found in the "Statistics" group if the option "Measured and
Metered Values Only" was enabled in the configuration matrix.
Operating Hours
Moreover, the operating hours are summed (device operating time).
Hours Meter "CB open"

A counter can be implemented as CFC application which, similarly to the operating hours counter, counts the
hours in the condition “circuit breaker open”. The universal hours counter is connected to a corresponding
binary input and starts counting if the respective binary input is active. The counter can be set or reset. A CFC
application example for such a counter is available on the Internet (SIPROTEC Download Area).
Reading/Setting/Resetting Counters
The SIPROTEC 4 System Description provides a description of how to read out the statistical counters via the
device front panel or DIGSI. Setting or resetting of these statistical counters takes place under the menu item
MESSAGES —> STATISTICS by overwriting the counter values displayed.

Informa-
tion
- #of TRIPs= PMV Number of TRIPs=
409 >BLOCK Op Count SP >BLOCK Op Counter
1020 Op.Hours= VI Counter of operating hours
2.12.3 Measurement
A series of measured values and the values derived from them are constantly available for call up on site, or
for data transfer.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
Applications
• Information on the actual status of the system
• Conversion of secondary values to primary values and percentages
Prerequisites
Except for secondary values, the device is able to indicate the primary values and percentages of the measured
values.
A precondition correct display of the primary and percentage values is the complete and correct entry of the
nominal values for the instrument transformers and the protected equipment as well as current and voltage
transformer ratios in the ground paths when configuring the device. The following table shows the formulas
which are the basis for the conversion of secondary values to primary values and percentages.
Measured values which cannot be calculated due to the selected voltage connection are shown as dots.
2.12.3.1 Display of Measured Values
Table 2-10 Conversion formulae between secondary values and primary/percentage values
Measured sekun- primary %

Values dary
VA, VB, VC, VPh-N sec.
V0, V1, V2,
Vsyn
VA–B, VB–C, VC–A VPh-Ph sec.
VN VN sec.
Vx Vx sec.
Frequency f in Hz f in Hz
Protection
Table 2-11 Legende zu den Umrechnungsformeln
Parameter Adresse
Vnom PRIMARY 202
Vnom SECONDARY 203
Vph / Vdelta 206
FullScaleVolt. 1101
Depending on the type of device ordered and the device connections, some of the operational measured
values listed below may not be available.
The phase–to–ground voltages are either measured directly, if the voltage inputs are connected phase–to–
ground, or they are calculated from the phase–to–phase voltages VA–B and VB–C and the displacement voltage
VN.
The displacement voltage VN is either measured directly or calculated from the phase-to-ground voltages:
[verlagerungsspannunguen-020315-wlk, 1, en_US]

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
Please note that value V0 is indicated in the operational measured values.

The calculation of the operational measured values is also performed during a fault. The values are updated in
intervals of > 0.3 s and < 1 s.
2.12.3.2 Transfer of Measured Values

Measured values can be transferred via the interfaces to a central control and storage unit.
The measuring range in which these values are transmitted depend on the protocol and, if necessary, addi-
tional settings.
Protocol Transmittable measuring range, format
IEC 60870-5-103 0 to 240 % of the measured value.
IEC 61850 The primary operational measured values are transmitted.
The measured values as well as their unit format are set out in detail in manual PIXIT
7SJ.
The measured values are transmitted in “Float” format. The transmitted measuring
range is not limited and corresponds to the operational measurement.
PROFIBUS, Modbus, The unit format of the measured values on the device side is at first automatically
DNP 3.0 generated by means of the selected nominal values of current and voltage within the
system data.
The current unit format can be determined in DIGSI or at the device via Menu Opera-
tional Values.
The user can select via DIGSI which operational measured values (primary, secondary
or percentage) must be transmitted.
The measured values are always transmitted as 16-bit values including sign (range
± 32768). The user can define the scaling of the operational measured value to be
transmitted. This will result in the respective transmittable measuring range.
For further details, please refer to the descriptions and protocol profiles.

Informa-
tion
621 Va = MV Va
622 Vb = MV Vb
623 Vc = MV Vc
624 Va-b= MV Va-b
625 Vb-c= MV Vb-c
626 Vc-a= MV Vc-a
627 VN = MV VN
629 V1 = MV V1 (positive sequence)
630 V2 = MV V2 (negative sequence)
632 Vsync = MV Vsync (synchronism)
644 Freq= MV Frequency
765 V/f = MV (V/Vn) / (f/fn)
766 V/f th= MV Calculated temperature (V/f)
832 Vo = MV Vo (zero sequence)
30800 VX = MV Voltage VX
30801 Vph-n = MV Voltage phase-neutral

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.12.4 Min/Max Measurement Setup
Minimum and maximum values are calculated by the 7RW80. Time and date of the last update of the values
can also be read out.
Minimum and Maximum Values

The minimum and maximum values for the three phase-to-ground voltages Vx-N, the three phase-to-phase
voltages Vxy, the positive sequence component V1, the displacement voltage V0 and the frequency are calcu-
lated as primary values (including the date and time they were last updated).
The minimum and maximum values can be reset at any time via binary inputs or by using the integrated
control panel or the DIGSI software. Additionally, the reset can be carried out cyclically, starting at a preset
point of time.
Minimum and Maximum Values

The tracking of minimum and maximum values can be reset automatically at a programmable point in time.
To select this feature, address 8311 MinMax cycRESET should be set to YES. The point in time when reset is
to take place (the minute of the day in which reset will take place) is set at address 8312 MiMa RESET TIME.
The reset cycle in days is entered at address 8313 MiMa RESETCYCLE, and the beginning date of the cyclical
process, from the time of the setting procedure (in days), is entered at address 8314 MinMaxRES.START.
2.12.4.3 Settings

8311 MinMax cycRESET NO YES Automatic Cyclic Reset Function
YES
8312 MiMa RESET TIME 0 .. 1439 min 0 min MinMax Reset Timer
8313 MiMa RESETCYCLE 1 .. 365 Days 7 Days MinMax Reset Cycle Period
8314 MinMaxRES.START 1 .. 365 Days 1 Days MinMax Start Reset Cycle in

Informa-
tion
- ResMinMax IntSP_Ev Reset Minimum and Maximum counter
397 >V MiMaReset SP >V MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
398 >VphphMiMaRes SP >Vphph MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
399 >V1 MiMa Reset SP >V1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
407 >Frq MiMa Reset SP >Frq. MIN/MAX Buffer Reset
859 Va-nMin= MVT Va-n Min
860 Va-nMax= MVT Va-n Max
861 Vb-nMin= MVT Vb-n Min
862 Vb-nMax= MVT Vb-n Max
863 Vc-nMin= MVT Vc-n Min
864 Vc-nMax= MVT Vc-n Max
865 Va-bMin= MVT Va-b Min
867 Va-bMax= MVT Va-b Max
868 Vb-cMin= MVT Vb-c Min

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions

Informa-
tion
869 Vb-cMax= MVT Vb-c Max
870 Vc-aMin= MVT Vc-a Min
871 Vc-aMax= MVT Vc-a Max
872 Vn Min = MVT V neutral Min
873 Vn Max = MVT V neutral Max
874 V1 Min = MVT V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Minimum
875 V1 Max = MVT V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Maximum
882 fmin= MVT Frequency Minimum
883 fmax= MVT Frequency Maximum
2.12.5 Set Points for Measured Values
SIPROTEC devices facilitate the setting of limit values for some measured and metered values. If any of these
limit values is reached, exceeded or fallen below during operation, the device issues an alarm which is indi-
cated in the form of an operational message. This can be allocated to LEDs and/or binary outputs, transferred
via the interfaces and linked in DIGSI CFC. The limit values can be configured via DIGSI CFC and allocated via
the DIGSI device matrix.
Applications
• This monitoring program works with multiple measurement repetitions and a lower priority than the
protection functions. Therefore, it may not pick up if measured values are changed spontaneously in the
event of a fault, before a pickup or tripping of the protection function occurs. This monitoring program is
therefore absolutely unsuitable for blocking protection functions.
Setpoints for Measured Values

Setting is performed in the DIGSI configuration Matrix under Settings, Masking I/O (Configuration Matrix).
Apply the filter "Measured and Metered Values Only" and select the configuration group "Set Points (MV)".
Here you can insert new limit values via the Information Catalog which are subsequently linked to the meas-
ured value to be monitored using CFC.
This view also allows you to change the default settings of the limit values under Properties.
The settings for limit values must be in percent and usually refer to nominal values of the device.
For more details, see the SIPROTEC 4 System Description and the DIGSI CFC Manual.
2.12.6 Set Points for Statistic

For the statistical counters, setpoints may be entered and a message is generated as soon as they are reached.
The message can be allocated to both output relays and LEDs.
Setpoints for the Statistical Counter

The setting of threshold values for the statistical counters takes place in DIGSI under Messages → Statistics in
the sub-menu Threshold Values for Statistics. Double-click to display the corresponding contents in another
window. By overwriting the previous value the settings can be changed (please refer to the SIPROTEC 4
System Description).

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions

Informa-
tion
- OpHour> LV Operating hours greater than
272 SP. Op Hours> OUT Set Point Operating Hours
2.12.7 Energy Metering
Die Energiezähler werden über Binäreingangsimpulse gemessen.
Setting of parameter for meter resolution

Parameter 8315 MeterResolution allows increasing the resolution of the energy metered values by the
Factor 10 or Factor 100 compared to the Standard setting.
2.12.7.2 Settings

8315 MeterResolution Standard Standard Meter resolution
Factor 10
Factor 100

Informa-
tion
- Meter res IntSP_Ev Reset meter
888 Wp(puls) PMV Pulsed Energy Wp (active)
889 Wq(puls) PMV Pulsed Energy Wq (reactive)
2.12.8 Commissioning Aids
In test mode or during commissioning, the device information transmitted to a central or storage device can
be influenced. There are tools available for testing the system interface (port B) and the binary inputs and
outputs of the device.
Applications
• Test Mode
• Commissioning
Prerequisites
In order to be able to use the commissioning aids described in the following, the device must be connected to
a control center via port B.
Influencing Information to the Control Center During Test Mode

Some of the available protocols allow for identifying all messages and measured values transmitted to the
control center with "Test Mode" as the message cause while the device is tested on site. This identification

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
prevents the message from being incorrectly interpreted as resulting from an actual fault. Moreover, a trans-
mission block can be set during the test so that no messages are transferred to the control center.
This can be implemented via binary inputs, using the interface on the device front and a PC.
The SIPROTEC 4 System Description states in detail how to activate and deactivate test mode and blocked data
transmission.
Testing the Connection to a Control Center

Via the DIGSI device control it can be tested whether messages are transmitted correctly.
A dialog box shows the display texts of all messages which were allocated to the system interface (port B) in
the DIGSI matrix. In another column of the dialog box, a value for the messages to be tested can be defined
(e.g. message ON / message OFF). After having entered password no. 6 (for hardware test menus), the corre-
sponding message is issued and can be read out in the event log of the SIPROTEC 4 device and in the substa-
tion control center.
The procedure is described in detail in Chapter "Mounting and Commissioning".
Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs

The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC 4 device can be individually and precisely controlled in
DIGSI. This feature can be used, for example, to verify control wiring from the device to substation equipment
(operational checks), during start-up.
A dialog box shows all binary inputs and outputs as well as LEDs of the device with their present status. The
operating equipment, commands, or messages that are configured (masked) to the hardware components are
also displayed. After having entered password no. 6 (for hardware test menus), it is possible to switch to the
opposite status in another column of the dialog box. Thus, you can energize every single output relay to check
the wiring between protected device and the system without having to create the alarm allocated to it.
Creating Oscillographic Recordings for Tests

During commissioning, energization sequences should be carried out to check the stability of the protection
also during closing operations. Oscillographic event recordings contain the maximum information on the
behavior of the protection.
Along with the capability of storing fault recordings via pickup of the protection function, the 7RW80 also has
the capability of capturing the same data when commands are given to the device via the service program
DIGSI, the serial interface, or a binary input. For the latter, event >Trig.Wave.Cap. must be allocated to a
binary input. Triggering for the oscillographic recording then occurs, for instance, via the binary input when
the protection object is energized.
An oscillographic recording that is triggered externally (that is, without a protective element pickup) are
processed by the device as a normal oscillographic record. For each oscillographic record a fault record is
created which is given its individual number to ensure that assignment can be made properly. However, these
oscillographic recordings are not displayed in the fault log buffer in the display as they are no network fault
events.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.13 Breaker Control

A control command function is integrated in the SIPROTEC 4 7RW80 to coordinate the operation of circuit
breakers and other equipment in the power system.
Control commands can originate from four command sources:
• Local control at the device's operator panel
• Operation using DIGSI
• Remote control via network control center or substation controller (e.g. SICAM)
• Automatic functions (e.g., via binary input)

Switchgear with single and multiple busbars are supported. The number of switchgear devices to be controlled
is limited only by the number of binary inputs and outputs. Interlocking checks ensure high security against
maloperation and a multitude of switchgear types and operating modes are available.
2.13.1 Control Device
Switchgear can also be controlled via the device's operator panel, DIGSI or a connection to the substation
control equipment.
Applications
• Switchgear with single and double busbars
Prerequisites
The number of switchgear devices to be controlled is limited by the
– existing binary inputs
– existing binary outputs.
Operation Using the Device's Operator Panel

For controlling the device, there are two independent colored keys located below the graphic display. If you
are somewhere in the menu system outside the control submenu, you can return to the control mode via one
of these keys.
Then, select the switchgear to be operated with the help of the navigation keys. The switching direction is
determined by operating the I or O pushbutton. The selected switching direction is displayed flashing in the
bottom line of the following security prompt.
Password and security prompts prevent unintended switching operations. With ENTER the entries are
confirmed.
Cancellation is possible at any time before the control command is issued or during switch selection via the
ESC key.
Command end, feedback or any violation of the interlocking conditions are indicated.
For further information on the device operation, please refer to Section 2.14 Notes on Device Operation.
Operation using DIGSI

Switchgear can be controlled via the operator control interface with a PC using the DIGSI software. The proce-
dure to do so is described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description (Control of Switchgear).
Operation Using the System Interface

Switchgear can be controlled via the serial system interface and a connection to the substation control equip-
ment. For that it is necessary that the required periphery is physically existing in the device as well as in the

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
substation. Furthermore, certain settings for the serial interface need to be made in the device (see SIPROTEC
4 System Description).
2.13.1.2 Informationsübersicht

Informa-
tion
- 52Breaker CF_D12 52 Breaker
- 52Breaker DP 52 Breaker
- Disc.Swit. CF_D2 Disconnect Switch
- Disc.Swit. DP Disconnect Switch
- GndSwit. CF_D2 Ground Switch
- GndSwit. DP Ground Switch
31000 Q0 OpCnt= VI Q0 operationcounter=
2.13.2 Types of Commands
In conjunction with the power system control several command types can be distinguished for the device:
Commands to the Process

These are all commands that are directly output to the switchgear to change their process state:
• Switching commands for controlling the circuit breakers (not synchronized), disconnectors and ground
electrodes
• Step commands, e.g. raising and lowering transformer LTCs
• Set-point commands with configurable time settings, e.g. to control Petersen coils
Internal / Pseudo Commands

They do not directly operate binary outputs. They serve to initiate internal functions, simulate changes of
state, or to acknowledge changes of state.
• Manual overriding commands to manually update information on process-dependent objects such as
annunciations and switching states, e.g. if the communication with the process is interrupted. Manually
overridden objects are flagged as such in the information status and can be displayed accordingly.
• Tagging commands (for "setting") of the information value of internal objects, for example switching
authority (remote/local), settings group switching, data transmission block and deleting/presetting
metered values.
• Acknowledgment and resetting commands for setting and resetting internal buffers or data states.
• Information status command to set/reset the additional information "information status" of a process
object, such as:
– Input blocking
– Output blocking
2.13.3 Command Sequence
Safety mechanisms in the command sequence ensure that a command can only be released after a thorough
check of preset criteria has been successfully concluded. Standard Interlocking checks are provided for each

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
individual control command. Additionally, user-defined interlocking conditions can be programmed separately
for each command. The actual execution of the command is also monitored afterwards. The overall command
task procedure is described in brief in the following list:
Check Sequence
Please observe the following:
• Command Entry, e.g. using the keypad on the local user interface of the device
– Check Password → Access Rights
– Check Switching Mode (interlocking activated/deactivated) → Selection of Deactivated interlocking
Recognition.
• User configurable interlocking checks

– Switching Authority
– Device Position Check (set vs. actual comparison)
– Interlocking, Zone Controlled (logic using CFC)
– System Interlocking (centrally, using SCADA system or substation controller)
– Double Operation (interlocking against parallel switching operation)
– Protection Blocking (blocking of switching operations by protective functions).
• Fixed Command Checks

– Internal Process Time (software watch dog which checks the time for processing the control action
between initiation of the control and final close of the relay contact)
– Setting Modification in Process (if setting modification is in process, commands are denied or
delayed)
– Operating equipment enabled as output (if an operating equipment component was configured, but
not configured to a binary input, the command is denied)
– Output Block (if an output block has been programmed for the circuit breaker, and is active at the
moment the command is processed, then the command is denied)
– Board Hardware Error
– Command in Progress (only one command can be processed at a time for one operating equipment,
object-related Double Operation Block)
– 1-of-n-check (for schemes with multiple assignments, such as relays contact sharing a common
terminal a check is made if a command is already active for this set of output relays).
Monitoring the Command Execution

The following is monitored:
• Interruption of a command because of a Cancel Command
• Runtime Monitor (feedback message monitoring time)
2.13.4 Switchgear Interlocking
System interlocking is executed by the user-defined logic (CFC).

Interlocking checks in a SICAM / SIPROTEC 4 system are normally divided in the following groups:

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
• System interlocking relies on the system data base in the substation or central control system.
• Bay interlocking relies on the object data base (feedbacks) of the bay unit.
• Cross-bay interlocking via GOOSE messages directly between bay units and protection relays (with
IEC61850: The inter-relay communication with GOOSE is performed via the EN100 module)
The extent of the interlocking checks is determined by the configuration of the relay. To obtain more informa-
tion about GOOSE, please refer to the SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
Switching objects that require system interlocking in a central control system are assigned to a specific param-
eter inside the bay unit (via configuration matrix).
For all commands, operation with interlocking (normal mode) or without interlocking (Interlocking OFF) can
be selected:
• For local commands, by activation of "Normal/Test"-key switch,
• For automatic commands, via command processing. by CFC and deactivated interlocking recognition,
• For local / remote commands, using an additional interlocking disable command, via Profibus.
Interlocked / Non-Interlocked Switching

The configurable command checks in the SIPROTEC 4 devices are also called "standard interlocking". These
checks can be activated via DIGSI (interlocked switching/tagging) or deactivated (non-interlocked).
Deactivated interlock switching means the configured interlocking conditions are not checked in the relay.
Interlocked switching means that all configured interlocking conditions are checked within the command
processing. If a condition is not fulfilled, the command will be rejected by a message with a minus added to it
(e.g. “CO–”), immediately followed by a message.
The following table shows the possible types of commands in a switching device and their corresponding
annunciations. For the device the messages designated with *) are displayed in the event logs, for DIGSI they
appear in spontaneous messages.
Type of Command Command Cause Message
Control issued Switching CO CO +/–
Manual tagging (positive / negative) Manual tagging MT MT+/–
Information state command, input blocking Input blocking ST ST+/– *)
Information state command, output blocking Output blocking ST ST+/– *)
Cancel command Cancel CA CA+/–
The "plus" appearing in the message is a confirmation of the command execution. The command execution
was as expected, in other words positive. The minus sign means a negative confirmation, the command was
rejected. Possible command feedbacks and their causes are dealt with in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
The following figure shows operational indications relating to command execution and operation response
information for successful switching of the circuit breaker.
The check of interlocking can be programmed separately for all switching devices and tags that were set with
a tagging command. Other internal commands such as manual entry or abort are not checked, i.e. carried out
independent of the interlocking.
[dw_display_LS-betriebsmeldung, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-37 Example of an operational annunciation for switching circuit breaker 52 (Q0)
Standard Interlocking (default)

The standard interlockings contain the following fixed programmed tests for each switching device, which can
be individually enabled or disabled using parameters:

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
• Device Status Check (set = actual): The switching command is rejected, and an error indication is
displayed if the circuit breaker is already in the set position. (If this check is enabled, then it works
whether interlocking, e.g. zone controlled, is activated or deactivated.) This condition is checked in both
interlocked and non-interlocked status modes.
• System Interlocking: To check the power system interlocking, a local command is transmitted to the
central unit with Switching Authority = LOCAL. A switching device that is subject to system interlocking
cannot be switched by DIGSI.
• Zone Controlled / Bay Interlocking: Logic links in the device which were created via CFC are interrogated
and considered during interlocked switching.
• Blocking by Protection: Switch-ON commands are rejected with interlocked switches, as soon as one of
the protection functions of the unit has opened a fault case. The OPEN-command, by contrast, can
always be executed.
• Double Operation Block: Parallel switching operations are interlocked against one another; while one
command is processed, a second cannot be carried out.
• Switching Authority LOCAL: A control command from the user interface of the device (command with
command source LOCAL) is only allowed if the Key Switch (by configuration) is set to LOCAL.
• Switching Authority DIGSI: Switching commands that are issued locally or remotely via DIGSI (command
with command source DIGSI) are only allowed if remote control is admissible for the device (by configu-
ration). If a DIGSI-PC communicates with the device, it deposits here its virtual device number (VD). Only
commands with this VD (when Switching Authority = REMOTE) will be accepted by the device. Remote
switching commands will be rejected.
• Switching authority REMOTE: A remote switch command (command with source REMOTE) is only
allowed if remote control is enabled at the device (by configuration).
Control Logic using CFC

For bay interlocking, a release logic can be created using CFC. Via specific release conditions the information
"released" or "bay interlocked" are available (e.g. object "52 Close" and "52 Open" with the data values: ON/
OFF).
Switching Authority
The interlocking condition "Switching Authority" serves for determining the switching authority. It enables the
user to select the authorized command source. For devices with operator panel, the following switching
authority ranges are defined in the following priority sequence:
• LOCAL
• DIGSI
• REMOTE
The "Switching authority" object serves for interlocking or enabling LOCAL control but not REMOTE or DIGSI
commands. With a 7RW80, the switching authority can be changed between "REMOTE" and "LOCAL" on the
operator panel after having entered the password or by means of CFC also via binary inputs and a function
key.
The "Switching authority DIGSI" is used for interlocking and allows commands to be initiated using DIGSI.
Commands are allowed for both a remote and a local DIGSI connection. When a (local or remote) DIGSI PC
logs on to the device, it enters its Virtual Device Number (VD). The device only accepts commands having that
VD (with switching authority = OFF or REMOTE). When the DIGSI PC logs off, the VD is cancelled.
Commands are checked for their source SC and the device settings, and compared to the information set in
the objects "Switching authority" and "Switching authority DIGSI".
Configuration
Switching authority available y/n (create appropriate object)

Switching authority available DIGSI y/n (create appropriate object)
Specific device (e.g. switching device) Switching authority LOCAL (check for Local status): y/n

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
Specific device (e.g. switching device) Switching authority REMOTE (check for LOCAL, REMOTE, or
DIGSI commands: y/n
Table 2-12 Interlocking logic
Current Switching Command Issued with Command Issued from Command issued from
Switching SC3)=LOCAL SC=LOCAL or REMOTE SC=DIGSI
Authority Status
LOCAL not Allowed Interlocked 2) - "switching Interlocked "DIGSI not
registered authority LOCAL" registered"
LOCAL Checked Allowed Interlocked 2) - "switching Interlocked 2) - "switching
authority LOCAL" authority LOCAL" „verrie-
gelt, da VORORT–
Steuerung”
REMOTE Not checked Interlocked 1) - "switching Allowed Interlocked "DIGSI not
authority REMOTE" registered"
REMOTE Checked Interlocked 1) - "switching Interlocked 2) - "switching Allowed
authority DIGSI" authority DIGSI"
1) also "Allowed" for: ”switching authority LOCAL (check for Local status): is not marked
2) also "Allowed" for: ”Switching authority REMOTE (check for LOCAL, REMOTE, or DIGSI status): is not marked"
3) SC= Source of command
SC = Auto SICAM:
Commands that are initiated internally (command processing in the CFC) are not subject to switching
authority and are therefore always "allowed".
Switching Mode
The switching mode determines whether selected interlocking conditions will be activated or deactivated at
the time of the switching operation.
The following switching modes (local) are defined:
• Local commands (SC = LOCAL)
– interlocked (normal), or
– non-interlocked switching.
With a 7RW80, the switching mode can be changed between "locked" and "unlocked" on the operator panel
after having entered the password or by means of CFC also via binary inputs and a function key.
The following switching modes (remote) are defined:
• Remote or DIGSI commands (SC = LOCAL, REMOTE, or DIGSI)
– interlocked, or
– non-interlocked switching. Here, deactivation of interlocking is accomplished via a separate
command.
– For commands from CFC (SC = AUTO SICAM), please observe the notes in the CFC manual (compo-
nent: BOOL to command).
Zone Controlled / Field Interlocking

Zone controlled / field interlocking (e.g. via CFC) includes the verification that predetermined switchgear posi-
tion conditions are satisfied to prevent switching errors (e.g. disconnector vs. ground switch, ground switch
only if no voltage applied) as well as verification of the state of other mechanical interlocking in the switch-
gear bay (e.g. High Voltage compartment doors).
Interlocking conditions can be programmed separately, for each switching device, for device control CLOSE
and/or OPEN.
The enable information with the data "switching device is interlocked (OFF/NV/FLT) or enabled (ON)" can be
set up,

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
• directly, using a single point or double point indication or internal indication (marking), or
• by means of a control logic via CFC.

When a switching command is initiated, the actual status is scanned cyclically. The assignment is done via
"Release object CLOSE/OPEN".
System Interlocking
Substation Controller (System interlocking) involves switchgear conditions of other bays evaluated by a central
control system.
Double Activation Blockage

Parallel switching operations are interlocked. As soon as the command has arrived all command objects
subject to the interlocking are checked to know whether a command is being processed. While the command
is being executed, interlocking is enabled for other commands.
Blocking by Protection
The pickup of protective elements blocks switching operations. Protective elements are configured, separately
for each switching component, to block specific switching commands sent in CLOSE and TRIP direction.
When enabled, "Block CLOSE commands" blocks CLOSE commands, whereas "Block TRIP commands" blocks
TRIP signals. Switching operations in progress will immediately be aborted by the pickup of a protective
element.
Device Status Check (set = actual)

For switching commands, a check takes place whether the selected switching device is already in the set/
desired position (set/actual comparison). This means, if a circuit breaker is already in the CLOSED position and
an attempt is made to issue a closing command, the command will be refused, with the operating message
"set condition equals actual condition". If the circuit breaker / switchgear device is in the intermediate position,
then this check is not performed.
Bypassing Interlockings
Bypassing configured interlockings at the time of the switching action happens device-internal via interlocking
recognition in the command job or globally via so-called switching modes.
• SC=LOCAL
– The user can switch between the modes “interlocked“ or “non-interlocked“ (bypassed) in the oper-
ator panel after entering the password or using CFC via binary input and function key.
• REMOTE and DIGSI

– Commands issued by SICAM or DIGSI are unlocked via a global switching mode REMOTE. A separate
request must be sent for the unlocking. The unlocking applies only for one switching operation and
for commands caused by the same source.
– Job order: command to object "Switching mode REMOTE", ON
– Job order: switching command to "switching device"
• Command via CFC (automatic command, SC=Auto SICAM):

– Behavior configured in the CFC block ("BOOL to command").
2.13.5 Command Logging
During the processing of the commands, independent of the further message routing and processing,
command and process feedback information are sent to the message processing center. These messages
contain information on the cause. With the corresponding allocation (configuration) these messages are
entered in the event list, thus serving as a report.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
Prerequisites
A listing of possible operating messages and their meaning as well as the command types needed for tripping
and closing of the switchgear or for raising and lowering of transformer taps are described in the SIPROTEC 4
System Description.
Acknowledgment of Commands to the Device Front

All messages with the source of command LOCAL are transformed into a corresponding response and shown
in the display of the device.
Acknowledgment of commands to Local / Remote / DIGSI

The acknowledgment of messages with source of command Local/ Remote/DIGSI are sent back to the initiating
point independent of the routing (configuration on the serial digital interface).
The acknowledgment of commands is therefore not executed by a response indication as it is done with the
local command but by ordinary command and feedback information recording.
Monitoring of Feedback Information

The processing of commands monitors the command execution and timing of feedback information for all
commands. At the same time the command is sent, the monitoring time is started (monitoring of the
command execution). This time controls whether the device achieves the required final result within the
monitoring time. The monitoring time is stopped as soon as the feedback information arrives. If no feedback
information arrives, a response Timeout command monitoring time appears and the process is terminated.
Commands and information feedback are also recorded in the event list. Normally the execution of a
command is terminated as soon as the feedback information (FB+) of the relevant switchgear arrives or, in
case of commands without process feedback information, the command output resets and a message is
output.
The "plus" sign appearing in a feedback information confirms that the command was successful. The
command was as expected, in other words positive. The "minus" is a negative confirmation and means that
the command was not executed as expected.
Command Output and Switching Relays

The command types needed for tripping and closing of the switchgear or for raising and lowering of trans-
former taps are described in the configuration section of the SIPROTEC 4 System Description /1/ SIPROTEC 4
System Description.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
2.14 Notes on Device Operation

The operation of the 7RW80 slightly differs from the other SIPROTEC 4 devices. These differences are
described in the following. General information regarding the operation and configuration of SIPROTEC 4
devices is set out in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
2.14.1 Different operation
Pushbuttons of the Control Panels
Pushbutton Funktion/Bedeutung
Confirming entries and navigating forward in the menus
Navigating to the main menu (where necessary, press repeatedly),

navigating backwards in the menus,
discarding entries
Testing the LEDs
Resetting the LED memory and binary outputs
Function key Fn for displaying the assignment of the function keys. If several
function keys have been assigned, a second page is displayed for the assign-
ment when leafing through, if required.
Combined pushbutton with numeric keys for a faster navigation (e.g. Fn + 1
operational messages)
Navigation to the main menu with Fn in combination with the numeric key 0.
For setting the contrast, keep the pushbutton pressed for about 5 seconds. Set
the contrast in the menu with the scrolling keys (downward: less contrast,
upward: more contrast).
Entry of Negative Signs

Only a few parameters can reach a negative value, i.e. a negative sign can only be entered for these.
If a negative sign is permissible, the prompt -/+ --> v/^ appears in the bottom line when changing the param-
eter. The sign can be determined via the scrolling keys: downward = negative sign, upward = positive sign.
Display
The SIPROTEC 4 System Description applies to devices with a 4-line ASCII display. Apart from that there are
devices with a graphical display and a size of 30 lines. The 7RW80 uses the outputs of the graphical display,
but with 6 lines. Therefore, the representation might differ from the representations in the System Descrip-
tion.
The basic differences of the device with regard to the representation are the following:
The current selection is indicated by inverse representation (not by the prefix >)
[grundbild-hauptmenue-20070404, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-38 Inverse representation of the current selection
In part, the sixth line is used for representing e.g. the active parameter group.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions
[grundbild-parameter-20070404, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-39 Representation of the active parameter group (line 6)

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
3 Mounting and Commissioning
This chapter is intended for experienced commissioning staff. He must be familiar with the commissioning of
protection and control systems, the management of power systems and the safety rules and regulations.
Hardware adjustments to the power system data might be necessary. The primary tests require the protected
object (line, transformer, etc.) to carry load.
3.1 Mounting and Connections 124
3.2 Checking Connections 140
3.3 Commissioning 144
3.4 Final Preparation of the Device 157

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Mounting and Commissioning
3.1 Mounting and Connections

General
! WARNING
Warning of improper transport, storage, installation or assembly of the device.
Failure to observe these precautions can result in death, personal injury, or serious material damage.
² Trouble-free and safe use of this device depends on proper transport, storage, installation, and
assembly of the device according to the warnings in this device manual.
² Of particular importance are the general installation and safety regulations for work in a high-voltage
environment (for example, ANSI, IEC, EN, DIN, or other national and international regulations). These
regulations must be observed.
3.1.1 Configuration Information
Prerequisites
For installation and connections the following conditions must be met:
The rated device data have been checked as recommended in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description. It has been
verified that these data comply with the power system data.
General Diagrams
Block diagrams for the terminal assignment of the 7RW80 are shown in Appendix B Terminal Assignments.
Connection examples for the current and voltage transformer circuits are provided in Appendix C Connection
Examples.
Voltage Connection Examples

Connection examples for voltage transformers are provided in Appendix C Connection Examples. It must be
checked that the configuration of the Power System Data 1 (Section Voltage Connection (Power System),
Page 29) corresponds with the connections.
The normal connection is set at address 213 VT Connect. 3ph = Van, Vbn, Vcn.
When connecting an open delta winding of the voltage transformer set, address 213 VT Connect. 3ph
must be set to Vab, Vbc, VGnd.
Another example shows the connection mode 213 = Vab, Vbc, Vx. The voltage connected to the third
transformer Vx is only used by the flexible protection functions.
Binary Inputs and Outputs

The configuration options of the binary in- and outputs, i.e. the procedure for the individual adaptation to the
plant conditions, are described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description. The connections to the plant are
dependent on this configuration. The presettings of the device are listed in Appendix D Default Settings and
Protocol-dependent Functions. Please also check that the labeling strips on the front panel correspond to the
configured message functions.
Setting Group Change

If binary inputs are used to switch setting groups, please observe the following:

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
• Two binary inputs must be dedicated to the purpose of changing setting groups when four groups are to
be switched. One binary input must be set for >Set Group Bit0, the other input for >Set Group
Bit1. If either of these input functions is not assigned, then it is considered as not controlled.
• For the control of 2 setting groups one binary input is sufficient, namely >Set Group Bit0, since the
non-assigned binary input >Set Group Bit1 is then regarded as not connected.
• The control signals must be permanently active so that the selected setting group is and remains active.
The following table shows the allocation of the binary inputs to the setting groups A to D and a simplified
connection diagram for the two binary inputs is illustrated in the following figure. The figure illustrates an
example in which both Set Group Bits 0 and 1 are configured to be controlled (actuated) when the associated
binary input is energized (high).
Where:
no = not energized or not connected
yes = energized
Table 3-1 Changing setting groups using binary inputs
Binary Input Active Group

>Param.Wahl1 >Param. Wahl2
no no Group A
yes no Group B
no yes Group C
yes yes Group D
[dw_einstellgruppenumschaltung-ueber-binaere, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-1 Connection diagram (example) for setting group switching using binary inputs
Trip Circuit Supervision 74TC

It must be noted that two binary inputs or one binary input and one bypass resistor R must be connected in
series. The pick-up threshold of the binary inputs must therefore be substantially below half the rated control
DC voltage.
If one binary input is used, a bypass resistor R must be used (see following figure). The resistor R is inserted
into the circuit of the 52b circuit breaker auxiliary contact to facilitate the detection of a malfunction also
when the 52a circuit breaker auxiliary contact is open and the trip contact has dropped out. The value of this
resistor must be such that in the circuit breaker open condition (therefore 52a is open and 52b is closed), the
circuit breaker trip coil (52TC) is no longer energized and binary input (BI1) is still energized if the command
relay contact is open.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Figure 3-2 Trip circuit supervision with one binary input
This results in an upper limit for the resistance dimension, Rmax and a lower limit Rmin, from which the optimal
value of the arithmetic mean R should be selected:
[formel-mittelwert-r-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
In order that the minimum voltage for controlling the binary input is ensured, Rmax is derived as:
[formel-rmax-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
So the circuit breaker trip coil does not remain energized in the above case, Rmin is derived as:
[formel-rmin-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
ΙBI (HIGH) Constant current with activated BI ( = 0.4 mA)

VBI min Minimum control voltage for BI (= 19 V at delivery setting for nominal voltages of 24 V/ 48 V;
88 V at delivery setting for nominal voltages of 60 V/ 110 V/ 125 V/ 220 V/ 250 V)
VCTR Control voltage for trip circuit
RCBTC Ohmic resistance of the circuit breaker coil
VCBTC(LOW) Maximum voltage on the circuit breaker coil that does not lead to tripping
If the calculation has the result max < Rmin, the calculation has to be repeated with the next smaller threshold
VBI min. This threshold is determined via the parameters 220 Threshold BI 1 to 226 Threshold BI 7. The
settings Thresh. BI 176V, Thresh. BI 88V, Thresh. BI 19V are possible.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
For the power consumption of the resistance:
[formel-leistungvon-r-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Example
ΙBI (HIGH) 0.4 mA (SIPROTEC 4 7RW80)

VBI min 19 V at delivery setting for nominal voltages of 24 V/ 48 V;
88 V at delivery setting for nominal voltages of 60 V/ 110 V/ 125 V/ 220 V/ 250 V
VCTR 110 V (from the system / trip circuit)
RCBTC 500 Ω (from the system / trip circuit)
VCBTC (LOW) 2 V (from the system / trip circuit)
[fo_r-max-bsp, 1, en_US]
[beispiel-rmin-20061211, 1, en_US]
[fo_r-mittelwertbsp, 1, en_US]
[fo_leistung-r, 1, en_US]
3.1.2 Hardware Modifications
3.1.2.1 Disassembly
Work on the Printed Circuit Boards
NOTE
i Before carrying out the following steps, make sure that the device is not operative.
NOTE
i Apart from the communication modules and the fuse, there are no further components that can be config-
ured or operated by the user inside the device. Any service activities exceeding the installation or exchange
of communication modules must only be carried out by Siemens personnel
For preparing the workplace, a pad suitable for electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) is required.
Additionally, the following tools are required:
• a screwdriver with a 5 mm to 6 mm (0.20 – 0.24 in) wide blade,
• a Philips screwdriver size 1,
• a 5 mm (0.20 in) socket or nut driver.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
In order to disassemble the device, first remove it from the substation installation. To do so, perform the steps
stated in Sections Panel Flush Mounting, Panel Surface Mounting or Cubicle Mounting in reverse order.
NOTE
i The following must absolutely be observed:

Disconnect the communication connections at the device bottom (ports A and B). If this is not observed,
the communication lines and/or the device might be destroyed.
NOTE
i To use the device, all terminal blocks must be plugged in.
! CAUTION
Mind electrostatic discharges
Failure to observe these precautions can result in personal injury or material damage.
² Any electrostatic discharges while working at the electronics block are to be avoided. We recommend
ESD protective equipment (grounding strap, conductive grounded shoes, ESD-suitable clothing, etc.).
Alternatively, an electrostatic charge is to be discharged by touching grounded metal parts.
NOTE
i In order to minimize the expenditure for reconnecting the device, remove the completely wired terminal
blocks from the device. Use a screwdriver (DIN 4 x 0.8) to carefully bend the left and right spring clips
outwards. Then carefully pull out the terminal block. When reinstalling the device, carefully insert the
terminal block into the spring clips. Both spring clips must engage clearly audible. (Sections Panel Flush
Mounting, Panel Surface Mounting or Cubicle Mounting).
In order to install or exchange communication modules or to replace the fuse, proceed as follows:
Remove the two covers at the top and bottom. Thus, 1 housing screw each at the top and bottom becomes
accessible. First, only unscrew the bottom housing screw so far that its tip no longer looks out of the thread of
the mounting bracket (the housing screws are captive, they remain in the front cover even when unscrewed).
Unscrew all screws that fasten any existing communication modules in the module cover on the bottom side
of the device. Also unscrew the 4 countersunk screws that fasten the module cover on the bottom side of the
device. Carefully pull the entire module cover out of the device.
Only now completely unscrew the two housing screws at the top and bottom in the cover and carefully
remove the complete electronics block from the housing (Figure 3-3).
NOTE
i If you have not removed the terminal blocks from the rear panel, much more force is required for removing
and reinstalling the electronics block, which might lead to the damaging of the device. Therefore, we abso-
lutely recommend to remove the terminal blocks before removing the electronics block.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
[einschub-7sj80-20071107, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-3 Electronics block without housing
Replacing the Fuse

The fuse holder is located at the edge of the basic I/O board close to the power supply connection.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
[7sx80-fuse-basic-io-080408, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-4 Placing the fuse
Remove the defective fuse. Insert the new fuse with the following technical data into the fuse holder:
5 mm x 20 mm (0.20 * 0.79 in) safety fuse
T characteristic
2.0 A nominal current
250 V nominal voltage
Switching capability 1500 VA/ DC 300 V
Only UL-approved fuses may be used.
This data applies to all device types (24 V/48 V and 60 V – 250 V).
Make sure that the defective fuse has not left any obvious damage on the device. If the fuse trips again after
reconnection of the device, refrain from any further repairs and send the device to Siemens for repair.
The device can now be reassembled again (see Section Reassembly).
Disposal of Old Equipment and Batteries (Applicable only for European Union and Countries with a Recycling
System)
The disposal of our products and possible recycling of their components after decommissioning has to be
carried out by an accredited recycling company, or the products/components must be taken to applicable
collection points. Such disposal activities must comply with all local laws, guidelines and environmental speci-
fications of the country in which the disposal is done. For the European Union the sustainable disposal of elec-
tronic scrap is defined in the respective regulation for "waste electrical and electronic equipment" (WEEE).
The crossed-out wheelie bin on the products, packaging and/or accompanying documents means
that used electrical and electronic products and batteries must not be mixed with normal house-
hold waste.
According to national legislation, penalties may be charged for incorrect disposal of such
waste.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
By disposing of these products correctly you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential
negative effects on human health and the environment.
NOTE
i Our products and batteries must not be disposed of as household waste. For disposing batteries it is neces-
sary to observe the local national/international directives.
Disposal of Mobile Storage Devices (e.g. USB Sticks and Memory Cards)
When disposing of/transferring mobile storage devices, using the format or delete functions only changes the
file management information and does not completely delete the data from your mobile storage device. When
disposing of or transferring a mobile storage device, Siemens strongly recommends physically destroying it or
completely deleting data from the mobile storage device by using a commercially available computer data
erasing software.
REACH/RoHS Declaration
You can find our current REACH/RoHS declarations at:
https://www.siemens.com/global/en/home/products/energy/ecotransparency/ecotransparency-down-
loads.html
NOTE
i You can find more information about activities and programs to protect the climate at the EcoTransparency
website:
https://www.siemens.com/global/en/home/products/energy/ecotransparency.html
3.1.2.2 Connections of the Voltage Terminals
Fixing Elements
The fixing elements for the voltage transformer connection are part of the voltage terminal (housing side).
They have a stress-crack- and corrosion-resistant alloy. The head shape of the terminal screw allows for using a
flat screwdriver (4.0 mm x 0.8 mm / 0.16 in x 0.031 in) or a crosstip screwdriver (PZ1). PZ1 is recommended.
Cable Lugs and Wire Cross-sections

The connection mode available is the connection as single cable. As single cables, solid conductors as well as
stranded conductors with or without conductor sleeves can be used. We recommend using twin cable end
sleeves when connecting two single cables. We recommend the twin cable end sleeves of the series PN 966
144 from Tyco Electronics.
When connecting single cables, the following cross-sections are allowed:
Cable cross-sections: AWG 20-14 (0.5 mm2 to 2.0 mm2)
Connector sleeve with plastic collar L = 12 mm (0.47 in)
Stripping length: 12 mm (0.47 in)
(when used without conductor sleeve) Only copper cables may be used.
With terminal points lying one below the other you may connect single conductors and jumpers (Order No.
C53207-A406-D194-1) together. Please make sure that neighboring jumpers are built in/connected alter-
nately.
Mechanical Requirements
The fixing elements and the connected components are designed for the following mechanical requirements:
Permissible tightening torque at the terminal screw 1.0 Nm (8.85 lb.in)

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Permissible traction per connected conductor 50 N based on IEC 60947-1

(VDE 660, Part 100)
3.1.2.3 Interface Modules
General
The 7RW80 relay is supplied with preconfigured interfaces according to the ordering version. You do not have
to make any adaptations to the hardware (e.g. plugging in jumpers) yourself, except for the installation or
replacement of communication modules.
The use of the interface modules RS232, RS485 and optical can be defined via the parameter 617 ServiProt
(CM). This parameter is only visible if the 11th digit of the ordering number was selected to be 1 for RS232, 2
for RS485 or 3 for optical.
Installation or Replacement of the Ethernet Interface Module

The following requirement must be fulfilled:
There is no SIPROTEC 4 communication module mounted yet. Otherwise, this has to be removed before
actually installing the Ethernet interface module (see below).
The Ethernet interface module is inserted in the respective slot, most suitably from the open bottom, i.e.
above the back of the battery case. A supporting frame is placed over the modular plug. The narrow spacer lies
at edge of the printed circuit board. The module is attached to the 50-pole plug connector of the CPU module
slightly inclined to the basic I/O board. The supporting plate is slightly pulled outwards in this area. The
module can now be inserted vertically up to the stop. Then, the supporting plate is pressed against in the area
of the locking latch until the upper edge of the printed circuit board of the Ethernet interface module snaps
into the locking latch.
[com-modul-mit-stuetz-20100716, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-5 Ethernet interface with support frame

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
[en100-lc_schraeg-20071107, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-6 Installation of the Ethernet interface
Now, a SIPROTEC 4 communication module can be installed (see Section Installation or Replacement of a
SIPROTEC 4 Communication Module). Otherwise, the device can be reassembled again (see Section Reas-
sembly).
Installation or Replacement of a SIPROTEC 4 Communication Module

The following description assumes the normal case that a SIPROTEC 4 communication module which has not
yet been existing is retrofitted.
If a SIPROTEC 4 communication module has to be removed or replaced, the steps are to be performed in
reverse order.
NOTE
i The installation can only be performed alone or after the installation of the Ethernet module.
The SIPROTEC 4 communication module is inserted via the large window in the plastic supporting plate. The
direction of insertion is not arbitrary. The module is held at its mounting bracket. The opposite end of the
module is inserted with the same orientation in the window opening, under the supporting plate and any
existing extension I/O. The module bracket is turned towards the Ethernet module locking latch at the
supporting plate. Thus, even the longest connection elements of the communication module can be moved in
this space between the lower supporting plate reinforcement and the locking latch in the direction of the
transformer module. The mounting bracket of the module is now drawn up to the stop in the direction of the
lower supporting plate reinforcement. Thus, the 60-pin plug connector on the module and the basic I/O board
are aligned on top of each other. The alignment has to be checked via the opening at the bottom of the rack.
Attach the module's mounting rail from the back side of the basic I/O using 2 M 2.5 screws.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
[com-modul-20071107, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-7 Installation of a SIPROTEC 4 communication module
The device can now be reassembled again (see Section Reassembly).
3.1.2.4 Reassembly
The reassembly of the device is performed in the following steps:
Carefully insert the complete electronics block into the housing. Please observe the following:
The connections of the communication modules point at the bottom of the housing.
Insert the electronics block into the housing, until the supporting part rests against the front edge of the
housing. Press the left housing wall slightly out and insert the electronics block carefully further into the
housing. When the front edge of the housing and the inside of the front plate touch, center the front plate by
carful lateral movements. This makes sure that the front plate encloses/surrounds the housing. The electronics
block can only be inserted centered up to the end stop.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
[einschub-mit-stuetz-20100716, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-8 Reassembly of Device
Fix the front cover to the housing with the two medium screws at the top and bottom of the front cover. The
two covers can be inserted again either now or after the reinstallation of the device. Now install the device in
accordance with the Sections Panel Flush Mounting, Panel Surface Mounting or Cubicle Mounting.
NOTE
i Insert the voltage terminal blocks again and lock them in place!
3.1.3 Installation
3.1.3.1 General
The 7RW80 relay has a housing size 1/6. The housing has 2 covers and 4 fixing holes each at the top and
bottom (see Figure 3-9 and Figure 3-10).

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
[front-7sj80-mit-abdeckungen-20071107, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-9 Housing with covers
[front-7sj80-ohne-abdeckungen-20071107, 1, --_--]
Figure 3-10 Housing with fixing holes (without covers)
3.1.3.2 Panel Flush Mounting

The housing (housing size 1/6) has 2 covers and 4 fixing holes.
• Remove the 2 covers at the top and bottom of the front cover. Thus, 4 elongated holes are revealed in
the mounting bracket and can be accessed.
• Insert the device into the panel cut-out and fasten it with four screws. For dimensional drawings, refer to
Section 4.12 Dimensions.
• Mount the 2 covers again.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
• Connect a solid low-ohmic protective and operational ground to the grounding terminal of the device.
The cross-section of the cable used must correspond to the maximum connected cross-section but must
be at least 2.5 mm2 (Grounding area > M4, grounding area to be lacquer-free).
• Connections are to be established via the screw terminals on the rear panel of the device in accordance
with the circuit diagram. The details on the connection technique for the communication modules at the
bottom of the device (port A and port B) in accordance with the SIPROTEC 4 System Description and the
details on the connection technique for the voltage terminals on the rear of the device in Section
“Connections of the Voltage Terminals” must be strictly observed.
[schalttafeleinbau-7sj80-1-6tel-gehaeuse-20070107, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-11 Panel flush mounting of a 7RW80
3.1.3.3 Cubicle Mounting

To install the device in a rack or cubicle, two mounting brackets are required. The ordering codes are stated in
Appendix, Section A Ordering Information and Accessories.
The housing (housing size 1/6) has 2 covers and 4 fixing holes.
• Loosely screw the two angle rails into the rack or cubicle with 4 screws each.
• Remove the 2 covers at the top and bottom of the front cover. Thus, 4 elongated holes are revealed in
the mounting bracket and can be accessed.
• Secure the device to the angle rails with 4 screws.
• Mount the 2 covers again.
• Tighten the 8 screws of the the angle rails in the rack or cubicle.
• Connections are to be established via the screw terminals at the rear panel of the device in accordance
with the circuit diagram. The details on the connection technique for the communication modules on the
details on the connection technique for the voltage terminals at the rear of the device in Section

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
[montage-7sj8x-einsechstel-gehaeuse-20070117, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-12 Example installation of a 7RW80 in a rack or cubicle
3.1.3.4 Panel Surface Mounting

When ordering the device as surface-mounting case (9th digit of the ordering number= B), the mounting
frame shown below is part of the scope of delivery.
For installation, proceed as follows:
• Drill the holes for the mounting frame into the control panel.
• Fasten the mounting frame with 4 screws to the control panel (the continuously open side of the
mounting frame is intended for the cable harnesses and can point at the top or bottom according to
customer specification).
• Loosen the terminal blocks for the wiring, wire the terminal blocks and then click them in again.
• Connections are to be established via the screw terminals on the rear panel of the device in accordance
with the circuit diagram. The details on the connection technique for the communication modules at the
details on the connection technique for the voltage terminals on the rear of the device in Section
• Insert the device into the mounting frame (make sure that no cables are jammed).
• Secure the device to the mounting frame with 4 screws. For dimensional drawings, refer to the Technical
Data, Section 4.12 Dimensions.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
[montagehalterung-20070116, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-13 Mounting rails for panel surface mounting

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
3.2 Checking Connections
3.2.1 Checking the Data Connections of the Interfaces
Pin Assignment
The following tables show the pin assignment of the various interfaces. The position of the connections can
be seen in the following figures.
[usb-schnittst-auf-geraetefrontseite-20070111, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-14 USB interface
[ethernet-anschlussbuchsen-101103-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-15 Ethernet connections at the device bottom
[dsub-buchsen-20070111, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-16 Serial interface at the device bottom
USB Interface
The USB interface can be used to establish a connection between the protection device and your PC. For the
communication, the Microsoft Windows USB driver is used which is installed together with DIGSI (as of version
V4.82). The interface is installed as a virtual serial COM port. We recommend the use of standard USB cables
with a maximum length of 5 m/16 ft.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Table 3-2 Assignment of the USB socket
Pin-No. 1 2 3 4 Housing
USB VBUS D- D+ GND Shield
(unused)
Connections at port A
If the interface is used for communication with the device, the data connection is to be checked.
Table 3-3 Assignment of the port A socket
Pin-No. Ethernet interface

1 Tx+
2 Tx-
3 Rx+
4 —
5 —
6 Rx-
7 —
8 —
Connections at port B
When a serial interface of the device is connected to a control center, the data connection must be checked. A
visual check of the assignment of the transmit and receive channels is important. With RS232 and fiber optic
interfaces, each connection is dedicated to one transmission direction. For that reason the data output of one
device must be connected to the data input of the other device and vice versa.
Table 3-4 Belegung der Buchsen Port B
Pin-No. RS232 RS485 Profibus DP, RS485 Modbus RS485 Ethernet IEC 60870–5–103
DNP3.0 RS485 EN 100 redundant
1 Shield (electrically connected with shield shroud) Tx+ B/B’ (RxD/TxD-P)
2 RxD – – – Tx– A/A’ (RxD/TxD-N)
3 TxD A/A’ (RxD/TxD-N) B/B’ (RxD/TxD-P) A Rx+ –
4 – – CNTR-A (TTL) RTS (TTL level) — –
5 GND C/C’ (GND) C/C’ (GND) GND1 — –
6 – – +5 V ((max. load VCC1 Rx– –
<100 mA)
7 RTS – 1) – – — –
8 CTS B/B’ (RxD/TxD-P) A/A’ (RxD/TxD-N) B — –
9 – – – – not available not available
1) Pin
7 also carries the RTS signal with RS232 level when operated as RS485 interface. Pin 7 must therefore not be
connected!
With data cables, the connections are designated according to DIN 66020 and ISO 2110:
• TxD = Data output
• RxD = Data input
• RTS = Request to send
• CTS = Clear to send
• GND = Signal/Chassis Ground

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
The cable shield is to be grounded at both ends. For extremely EMC-prone environments, the GND may be
connected via a separate individually shielded wire pair to improve immunity to interference.
Fiber-optic Cables
! WARNING
Laser Radiation! Class 1
² Do not look directly into the fiber-optic elements!
Signals transmitted via optical fibers are unaffected by interference. The fibers guarantee electrical isolation
between the connections. Transmit and receive connections are represented by symbols.
The standard setting of the character idle state for the optical fiber interface is “Light off”. If the character idle
state is to be changed, use the operating program DIGSI as described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
3.2.2 Checking the System Connections
! WARNING
Warning of dangerous voltages
Non-observance of the following measures can result in death, personal injury or substantial prop-
erty damage.
² Therefore, only qualified people who are familiar with and adhere to the safety procedures and
precautionary measures should perform the inspection steps.
! CAUTION
Take care when operating the device without a battery on a battery charger.
Non-observance of the following measures can lead to unusually high voltages and consequently,
the destruction of the device.
² Do not operate the device on a battery charger without a connected battery. (For limit values see also
Technical Data, Section 4.1 General Device Data).
Before the device is energized for the first time, it should be in the final operating environment for at least 2
hours to equalize the temperature, to minimize humidity and to avoid condensation. Connections are checked
with the device at its final location. The plant must first be switched off and grounded.
Proceed as follows for checking the system connections:
• Circuit breakers for the auxiliary power supply and the measuring voltage must be opened.
• Check the continuity of all voltage transformer connections against the system and connection diagrams:
– Are the voltage transformers grounded properly?
– Are the polarities of the voltage transformer connections the same and correct?
– Is the phase assignment of the voltage transformers correct?
– Is the polarity for the voltage input V3 correct (if used e.g. for broken delta winding or busbar
voltage)?
• If test switches are used for the secondary testing of the device, their functions must also be checked.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
• Connect an ammeter in the supply circuit of the power supply. A range of about 2.5 A to 5 A for the
meter is appropriate.
• Switch on m.c.b. for auxiliary voltage (supply protection), check the voltage level and, if applicable, the
polarity of the voltage at the device terminals or at the connection modules.
• The current input should correspond to the power input in neutral position of the device. The measured
steady state current should be insignificant. Transient movement of the ammeter merely indicates the
charging current of capacitors
• Apply voltage to the power supply
• Close the protective switches for the voltage transformers.
• Verify that the voltage phase rotation at the device terminals is correct.
• Open the protective switches for the voltage transformers and the power supply.
• Check the trip and close circuits to the power system circuit breakers.
• Verify that the control wiring to and from other devices is correct.
• Check the signaling connections.
• Switch the mcb back on.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
3.3 Commissioning
3.3 Commissioning
! WARNING
Warning of dangerous voltages when operating an electrical device
erty damage.
² Only qualified people shall work on and around this device. They must be thoroughly familiar with all
warnings and safety notices in this instruction manual as well as with the applicable safety steps,
safety regulations, and precautionary measures.
² Before making any connections, the device must be grounded at the protective conductor terminal.
² Hazardous voltages can exist in all switchgear components connected to the power supply and to
measurement and test circuits.
² Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after the power supply voltage has been
removed (capacitors can still be charged).
² After switching off the auxiliary voltage, wait a minimum of 10 seconds before reconnecting this
voltage so that steady conditions can be established.
² The limit values given in Technical Data (Chapter 4) must not be exceeded, neither during testing nor
during commissioning.
When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other measurement quantities are
connected and that the trip and close circuits to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are discon-
nected from the device.
! DANGER
Hazardous voltages during interruptions in secondary circuits of current transformers
Non-observance of the following measure will result in death, severe personal injury or substantial
property damage.
² Short-circuit the current transformer secondary circuits before current connections to the device are
opened.
Switching operations have to be carried out during commissioning. A prerequisite for the prescribed tests is
that these switching operations can be executed without danger. They are accordingly not intended for opera-
tional checks.
! WARNING
Warning of dangers evolving from improper primary tests
erty damage.
² Primary tests are only allowed to be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar with the
commissioning of protection systems, the operation of the plant and the safety rules and regulations
(switching, grounding, etc.).

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
3.3 Commissioning
3.3.1 Test Mode and Transmission Block
Activation and Deactivation

If the device is connected to a central or main computer system via the SCADA interface, then the information
that is transmitted can be influenced. This is only possible with some of the protocols available (see Table
“Protocol- dependent functions” in the Appendix D.6 Protocol-dependent Functions).
If the test mode is switched on, the messages sent by a SIPROTEC 4 device to the main system has an addi-
tional test bit. This bit allows the messages to be recognized as not resulting from actual faults. Furthermore,
it can be determined by activating the transmission block that no annunciations are transmitted via the
system interface during test mode.
The SIPROTEC 4 System Manual describes in detail how to activate and deactivate the test mode and blocked
data transmission. Please note that when DIGSI is being used for device editing, the program must be in the
online operating mode for the test features to be used.
3.3.2 Testing the System Interface
Prefacing Remarks
If the device features a system interface and this is used to communicate with the control center, the DIGSI
device operation can be used to test if messages are transmitted correctly. This test option should however
definitely not be used while the device is in “real” operation.
! DANGER
Danger evolving from operating the equipment (e.g. circuit breakers, disconnectors) by means of the
test function
property damage.
² Equipment used to allow switching such as circuit breakers or disconnectors is to be checked only
during commissioning. Do not under any circumstances check them by means of the test function
during “real” operation by transmitting or receiving messages via the system interface.
NOTE
i After termination of the system interface test the device will reboot. Thereby, all annunciation buffers are
erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI prior to the test.
The interface test is carried out using DIGSI in the Online operating mode:
• Open the Online directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the device appear.
• Click on Test; the function selection appears in the right half of the screen.
• Double-click Generate Indications in the list view. The Generate Indications dialog box opens (see
following figure).
Structure of the Test Dialog Box

In the column Indication the display texts of all indications are displayed which were allocated to the system
interface in the matrix. In the column SETPOINT Status the user has to define the value for the messages to
be tested. Depending on annunciation type, several input fields are offered (e.g. message ON / message OFF).
By clicking on one of the fields you can select the desired value from the pull-down menu.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
3.3 Commissioning
[sc_schnittstelle-testen, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-17 System interface test with the dialog box: Creating messages - example
Changing the Operating State

When clicking one of the buttons in the column Action for the first time, you will be prompted for the pass-
word no. 6 (for hardware test menus). After correct entry of the password, individual annunciations can be
initiated. To do so, click on the button Send on the corresponding line. The corresponding message is issued
and can be read out either from the event log of the SIPROTEC 4 device or from the substation control system.
As long as the window is open, further tests can be performed.
Test in Message Direction

For all information that is transmitted to the central station, test the options in the list which appears in
SETPOINT Status:
• Make sure that each checking process is carried out carefully without causing any danger (see above and
refer to DANGER!)
• Click on Send in the function to be tested and check whether the transmitted information reaches the
central station and shows the desired reaction. Data which are normally linked via binary inputs (first
character “>”) are likewise indicated to the central power system with this procedure. The function of the
binary inputs itself is tested separately.
Exiting the Test Mode

To end the System Interface Test, click on Close. The device is briefly out of service while the start-up routine
is executed. The dialog box closes.
Test in Command Direction

The information transmitted in command direction must be indicated by the central station. Check whether
the reaction is correct.
3.3.3 Configuring Communication Modules
Required Settings in DIGSI 4

The following applies in general:

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
3.3 Commissioning
In the case of a first-time installation or replacement of a communication module, the ordering number
(MLFB) does not need to be changed. The ordering number can be retained. Thus, all previously created
parameter sets remain valid for the device.
Changes in the DIGSI Manager

In order that the protection device can access the new communication module, a change has to be made in
the parameter set within the DIGSI Manager.
Select the SIPROTEC device in DIGSI 4 Manager project and choose the menu entry Edit > Object Properties
to open the dialog Properties – SIPROTEC 4 Device (see the following figure).
Select an Interfac for 11. Port B (on back of device bottom) and for 12. Port A (on front of device bottom)
in the properties box Communications modules. For Profibus DP, Modbus or DNP3.0, the entry additional
Protocols, see MLFB Ext L has to be selected.
For port B, click L... and select the type of communication protocol in the dialog Additional information
[sx80-komm-prot-l-071112, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-18 DIGSI 4.3: Profibus DP protocol selection (example)
Mapping File
For Profibus DP, Modbus and DNP3.0, a matching bus mapping has to be selected.
For the selection of the mapping file please open the SIPROTEC device in DIGSI and choose Settings > Inter-
faces (see Figure 3-19).
The dialog Interface Settings shows under Additional protocols at device the following:
• Display of the selected communication module
• Selection Mapping file, listing all Profibus DP, Modbus, DNP3.0 and VDEW Redundant mapping files
available for the respective device type, with their names and reference to the corresponding bus
mapping document
• Edit field Module-specific settings for changing the bus-specific parameters

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
3.3 Commissioning
[auswahl-mapping-071122, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-19 DIGSI 4.3: Selection of a mapping file and setting of bus-specific parameters
NOTE
i If the mapping file assignment for a SIPROTEC device has been changed, this is usually connected with a
change of the allocations of the SIPROTEC objects to the system interface.
After having selected a new mapping file, please check the allocations to "Target system interface" or
"Source system interface" in the DIGSI allocation matrix.
Edit Field "Module-specific settings"

Change only the numbers in the lines not starting with "//" and observe the semicolon at the end of the lines in
the field Module-specific settings.
Further changes in the field might lead to an error message when closing the dialog box Interface settings.
Select the bus mapping corresponding to your requirements. The documentation of the individual bus
mappings is available on the Internet (www.siprotec.com in the download area).
After having selected the bus mapping, the area of the mapping file in which you can make device-specific
settings appears in the window (see Figure 3-20). The type of this setting depends of the protocol used and is
described in the protocol documentation. Please only perform the described changes in the settings window
and confirm your entries with "OK".

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
3.3 Commissioning
[modulspez-071122, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-20 Module-specific settings
Transfer the data to the protection device (see the following figure).
[daten-uebertragen-071122, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-21 Transmitting data

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
3.3 Commissioning
Terminal Test
The system interface (EN 100) is preassigned with the default value zero and the module is thus set to DHCP
mode. The IP address can be set in the DIGSI Manager (Object properties... / Communication parameters /
System interface [Ethernet]).
The Ethernet interface is preassigned with the following IP address and can be changed on the device at any
time (DIGSI device processing / Parameters / Interfaces / Ethernet service):
IP address: 192.168.100.10
Network mask: 255.255.255.0
The following restrictions must be observed:

For subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 the IP bandwidth 192.168.64.xx is not available
For subnet mask 255.255.255.0, the IP-Band 192.168.1.xx is not available
For subnet mask: 255.255.0.0 the IP bandwidth 192.168.xx.xx is not available
For subnet mask: 255.0.0.0 the IP band 192.xx.xx.xx is not available.
3.3.4 Checking the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs
Prefacing Remarks
The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC 4 device can be individually and precisely controlled in
DIGSI. This feature is used to verify control wiring from the device to plant equipment (operational checks)
during commissioning. This test option should however definitely not be used while the device is in “real”
operation.
! DANGER
Danger evolving from operating the equipment (e.g. circuit breakers, disconnectors) by means of the
test function
property damage.
² Equipment used to allow switching such as circuit breakers or disconnectors is to be checked only
during commissioning. Do not under any circumstances check them by means of the test function
during real operation by transmitting or receiving messages via the system interface.
NOTE
i After finishing the hardware tests, the device will reboot. Thereby, all annunciation buffers are erased. If
required, these buffers should be read out with DIGSI and saved prior to the test.
The hardware test can be carried out using DIGSI in the Online operating mode:
• Open the Online directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the device appear.
• Click on Test; the function selection appears in the right half of the screen.
• Double-click in the list view on Hardware Test. The dialog box of the same name opens (see the
following figure).
Structure of the Test Dialog Box

The dialog box is classified into three groups: BI for binary inputs, REL for output relays, and LED for lightemit-
ting diodes. On the left of each of these groups is an accordingly labeled button. By double-clicking a button,
information regarding the associated group can be shown or hidden.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
3.3 Commissioning
In the column Status the present (physical) state of the hardware component is displayed. Indication is made
by symbols. The physical actual states of the binary inputs and outputs are indicated by an open or closed
switch symbol, the LEDs by a dark or illuminated LED symbol.
The opposite state of each element is displayed in the column Scheduled. The display is made in plain text.
The right-most column indicates the commands or messages that are configured (masked) to the hardware
components.
[ein-ausgabe-testen-110402-wlk, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-22 Test of the binary inputs/outputs — example
Changing the Operating State

To change the status of a hardware component, click on the associated button in the Scheduled column.
Password No. 6 (if activated during configuration) will be requested before the first hardware modification is
allowed. After entry of the correct password a status change will be executed. Further status changes remain
possible while the dialog box is open.
Test of the Output Relays

Each individual output relay can be energized allowing to check the wiring between the output relay of the
7RW80 and the system, without having to generate the message that is assigned to the relay. As soon as the
first status change for any one of the output relays is initiated, all output relays are separated from the internal
device functions, and can only be operated by the hardware test function. This for example means that a
switching command coming from a protection function or a control command from the operator panel to an
output relay cannot be executed.
Proceed as follows in order to check the output relay:
• Ensure that the switching of the output relay can be executed without danger (see above under
DANGER!).
• Each output relay must be tested via the corresponding Scheduled-cell in the dialog box.
• Finish the testing (see margin title below “Exiting the Test Mode”), so that during further testings no
unwanted switchings are initiated.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
3.3 Commissioning
Test of the Binary Inputs

To test the wiring between the plant and the binary inputs of the 7RW80 the condition in the plant which
initiates the binary input must be generated and the response of the device checked.
To do so, the dialog box Hardware Test must be opened again to view the physical state of the binary inputs.
The password is not yet required.
Proceed as follows in order to check the binary inputs:
• Activate each of function in the system which causes a binary input to pick up.
• Check the reaction in the Status column of the dialog box. To do so, the dialog box must be updated. The
options may be found below under the margin heading “Updating the Display”.
• Finish the testing (see margin heading below “Exiting the Test Mode”).
If ,however, the effect of a binary input must be checked without carrying out any switching in the plant, it is
possible to trigger individual binary inputs with the hardware test function. As soon as the first state change of
any binary input is triggered and the password No. 6 has been entered, all binary inputs are separated from
the plant and can only be activated via the hardware test function.
Test of the LEDs

The LEDs may be tested in a similar manner to the other input/output components. As soon as the first state
change of any LED has been triggered, all LEDs are separated from the internal device functionality and can
only be controlled via the hardware test function. This means e.g. that no LED is illuminated anymore by a
protection function or by pressing the LED reset button.
Updating the Display

As the Hardware Test dialog opens, the operating states of the hardware components which are current at
this time are read in and displayed.
An update is made:
• for each hardware component, if a command to change the condition is successfully performed,
• for all hardware components if the Update button is clicked,
• for all hardware components with cyclical updating (cycle time is 20 seconds) if the Automatic Update
(20sec) field is marked.
Exiting the Test Mode

To end the hardware test, click on Close. The dialog box is closed. The device becomes unavailable for a brief
start-up period immediately after this. Then all hardware components are returned to the operating conditions
determined by the plant settings.
3.3.5 Testing User-Defined Functions
CFC Logic
The device has a vast capability for allowing functions to be defined by the user, especially with the CFC logic.
Any special function or logic added to the device must be checked.
Of course, general test procedures cannot be given. Configuration of these functions and the target conditions
must be actually known beforehand and tested. Possible interlocking conditions of switching devices (circuit
breakers, disconnectors, ground switch) are of particular importance. They must be observed and tested.
3.3.6 Voltage and Phase Rotation Testing
The connections of the voltage transformers are tested using primary quantities. The line is energized and will
remain in this state during the measurements.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
3.3 Commissioning
If measurement circuits are connected correctly, all Measured Value Monitoring of the device will stay inac-
tive. If an element detects a problem, the causes which provoked it may be viewed in the Event Log. If voltage
sum errors are found, check the matching factors.
Messages from the symmetry monitoring could occur because there actually are asymmetrical conditions in
the network. If these asymmetrical conditions are normal service conditions, the corresponding monitoring
functions should be made less sensitive.
Voltage Values
The voltages can be seen in the display field at the front of the device or the operator interface via a PC. They
can be compared to the quantities measured by an independent source, as primary and secondary quantities.
If the measured values are implausible, the connection must be checked and corrected after the line has been
isolated. The measurements must then be repeated.
Phase Rotation
The phase rotation must correspond to the configured phase rotation, in general a clockwise phase rotation. If
the system has an anti-clockwise phase rotation, this must have been considered when the power system data
was set (address 209 PHASE SEQ.). If the phase rotation is incorrect, the alarm Fail Ph. Seq. (FNo 171)
is generated. The measured value phase allocation must be checked
Voltage Transformer Miniature Circuit Breaker (VT mcb)

The VT mcb of the feeder (if used) must be opened. The measured voltages in the operational measured
values appear with a value close to zero (small measured voltages are of no consequence).
Check in the spontaneous annunciations that the VT mcb trip was entered (annunciation >FAIL:FEEDER VT
“ON” in the spontaneous annunciations). Beforehand it has to be assured that the position of the VT mcb is
connected to the device via a binary input.
Close the VT mcb again: The above messages appear under the spontaneous messages as “OFF”, i.e.
>FAIL:FEEDER VT “OFF”.
If one of the events does not appear, the connection and allocation of these signals must be checked.
If the ON-state and OFF–state are swapped, the contact type (H–active or L–active) must be checked and
remedied.
3.3.7 Polarity Check for Voltage Input V3
Depending on the application of the voltage measuring input V3 of a 7RW80, a polarity check may be neces-
sary. If no measuring voltage is connected to this input, this section is irrelevant.
If input V3 is used for the measurement of the displacement voltage VN (Power System Data 1 address 213
VT Connect. 3ph = Vab, Vbc, VGnd), the polarity is checked together with the current input ΙN/ΙNs (see
further below).
If the input V3 is used for measuring a voltage for synchrocheck (Power System Data 1, address 213 VT
Connect. 3ph = Vab, Vbc, VSyn or Vph-g, VSyn), the following is to be observed:
• The single-phase voltage V2 to be synchronized must be connected to input V3.
• The correct polarity is to be checked as follows using the synchrocheck function:

The device must provide the synchrocheck function which is to be configured in address 161 = 25 Function
1 = SYNCHROCHECK.
The voltage V2 to be synchronized must be set correctly in address 6123 CONNECTIONof V2.
If a transformer is located between the measuring points of the reference voltage V1 and the voltage to be
synchronized V2, its phase rotation must be taken into consideration. For this purpose, a corresponding angle
is entered in address 6122 ANGLE ADJUSTM., in the direction of the busbar seen from the feeder. An
example is shown in Section 2.7 Synchrocheck.
If necessary different transformation ratios of the transformers on the busbar and the feeder may have to be
considered under address Balancing V1/V2.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
3.3 Commissioning
The synchrocheck function must be activated at address 6101 Synchronizing = ON.

A further aid for checking the connections are the messages 170.2090 25 V2>V1, 170.2091 25 V2<V1,
170.2094 25 α2>α1 and 170.2095 25 α2<α1 in the spontaneous messages.
• Circuit breaker is open. The feeder is de-energized. The circuit breakers of both voltage transformer
circuits must be closed.
• For the synchrocheck, the program Direct CO is set to YES (address 6110); the other programs
(addresses 6107 to 6109) are set to NO.
• Via a binary input (170.0043 >25 Sync requ.) a measurement request is entered. The synchrocheck
must release closing (message 170.0049 25 CloseRelease). If not, check all relevant parameters
again (synchrocheck configured and enabled correctly, see Sections 2.1.1 Functional Scope and
2.7 Synchrocheck).
• Set address 6110 Direct CO to NO.
• Then the circuit breaker is closed while the line isolator is open (see Figure 3-23). Thus, both voltage
transformers receive the same voltage.
• For the synchrocheck, the program 25 Function 1 is set to SYNCHROCHECK (address 161)
must release closing (message 170.0049 25 CloseRelease).
• If not, first check whether one of the aforesaid messages 170.2090 25 V2>V1 or 170.2091 25 V2<V1
or 170.2094 25 α2>α1 or 170.2095 25 α2<α1 is available in the spontaneous messages.
The message 25 V2>V1 or 25 V2<V1 indicates that the magnitude adaption is incorrect. Check address
6121 Balancing V1/V2 and recalculate the adaptation factor.
The message 25 α2>α1 or 25 α2<α1 indicates that the phase relation of the busbar voltage does not
match the setting under address CONNECTIONof V2 (see Section 2.7 Synchrocheck). When measuring
via a transformer, address 6122 ANGLE ADJUSTM. must also be checked; this must adapt the vector
group. If these are correct, there is probably a reverse polarity of the voltage transformer terminals for
V1.
• For the synchrocheck, the program SYNC V1>V2< is set to YES (address 6108)
• Open the VT mcb of the busbar voltage.
• Via a binary input (170.0043 >25 Sync requ.) a measurement request is entered. There is no close
release. If there is, the VT mcb for the busbar voltage is not allocated. Check whether this is the required
state, alternatively check the binary input >FAIL: BUS VT (6510).
• Close the VT mcb of the busbar voltage again.
• Open the circuit breaker.
• For the synchrocheck, the program SYNC V1<V2>is set to YES (address 6107) and SYNC V1>V2< is set
to NO (address 6108).
must release closing (message 170.0049 25 CloseRelease). Otherwise check all voltage connections
and the corresponding parameters again thoroughly as described in Section2.7 Synchrocheck.
• Open the VT mcb of the feeder voltage.
• Via a binary input (170.0043 >25 Sync requ.) a measurement request is entered. No close release is
given.
• Close the VT mcb of the busbar voltage again.

Addresses 6107 to 6110 must be restored as they were changed for the test. If the allocation of the LEDs or
signal relays was changed for the test, this must also be restored.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
3.3 Commissioning
[messspan-synch-kontr-20070716, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-23 Measuring voltages for synchrocheck
3.3.8 Trip/Close Tests for the Configured Operating Devices
Control by Local Command

If the configured operating devices were not switched sufficiently in the hardware test already described, all
configured switching devices must be switched on and off from the device via the integrated control element.
The feedback information of the circuit breaker position injected via binary inputs is read out at the device and
compared with the actual breaker position.
The switching procedure is described in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description. The switching authority must be
set according to the command source used. The switching mode can be selected from interlocked and nonin-
terlocked switching. Please note that non-interlocked switching can be a safety hazard.
Control by Protective Functions

For OPEN-commands sent to the circuit breaker please take into consideration that if the external automatic
reclosure function is used a TRIP-CLOSE test cycle is initiated.
! DANGER
A test cycle successfully started by the automatic reclosure function can lead to the closing of the
circuit breaker !
Non-observance of the following statement will result in death, severe personal injury or substantial
property damage.
² Be fully aware that OPEN-commands sent to the circuit breaker can result in a trip-close-trip event of
the circuit breaker by an external reclosing device.
Control from a Remote Control Center

If the device is connected to a remote substation via a system interface, the corresponding switching tests
may also be checked from the substation. Please also take into consideration that the switching authority is
set in correspondence with the source of commands used.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
3.3 Commissioning
3.3.9 Creating Oscillographic Recordings for Tests
General
In order to be able to test the stability of the protection during switchon procedures also, switchon trials can
also be carried out at the end. Oscillographic records obtain the maximum information about the behaviour of
the protection.
Requirements
To be able to trip an oscillographic recording, parameter Osc Fault Rec. must be configured to Enabled in
the Functional Scope. Apart from the capability of storing fault recordings via pickup of the protection func-
tion, the 7RW80 also has the capability of initiating a measured value recording via the operator program
DIGSI, the serial interface or binary input. In the latter case, the information >Trig.Wave.Cap. must be allo-
cated to a binary input. Triggering for the oscillographic recording then occurs, for instance, via the binary
input when the protection object is energized.
Those that are externally triggered (that is, without a protective element pickup) are processed by the device
as a normal oscillographic record. For each oscillographic record a fault record is created which is given its
individual number to ensure that assignment can be made properly. However, these recordings are not
displayed in the fault indication buffer, as they are not fault events.
Triggering Oscillographic Recording

To trigger test measurement recording with DIGSI, click on Test in the left part of the window. Double click
the entry Test Wave Form in the list of the window.
[digsi-fenster-testmessschrieb-starten-260602-kn, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-24 Start oscillographic recording with DIGSI
Oscillographic recording is started immediately. During recording, a report is given in the left part of the status
bar. Bar segments additionally indicate the progress of the procedure.
The SIGRA or the Comtrade Viewer program is required to view and analyse the oscillographic data.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
3.4 Final Preparation of the Device
3.4 Final Preparation of the Device

Firmly tighten all screws. Tighten all terminal screws, including those that are not used.
! CAUTION
Inadmissable Tightening Torques
Non–observance of the following measure can result in minor personal injury or property damage.
² The tightening torques must not be exceeded as the threads and terminal chambers may otherwise be
damaged!
The settings should be checked again, if they were changed during the tests. Check if all protection, control
and auxiliary functions to be found with the configuration parameters are set correctly (Section 2.1.1 Func-
tional Scope, Functional Scope) and all desired functions are set to ON. Keep a copy of all setting values on a
PC.
Check the internal clock of the device. If necessary, set or synchronize the clock if it is not automatically
synchronized. For assistance, refer to the SIPROTEC 4 System Description.
The annunciation buffers are deleted under MAIN MENU → Annunciations → Set/Reset, so that future infor-
mation will only apply to actual events and states (see also SIPROTEC 4 System Description). The counters in
the switching statistics should be reset to the values that were existing prior to the testing (see also SIPROTEC
4 System Description).
Reset the counter of the operational measured values (e.g. operation counter, if available) under MAIN MENU
→ Measured Values → Reset (also see SIPROTEC 4 System Description).
Press the ESC key (several times if necessary), to return to the default display. The default display appears in
the display box (e.g. the display of operational measured values).
Clear the LEDs on the front panel of the device by pressing the LED key, so that they show only real events and
states in the future. In this context, also output relays probably memorized are reset. Pressing the LED key also
serves as a test for the LEDs on the front panel because they should all light when the button is pushed. Any
LEDs that are lit after the clearing attempt are displaying actual conditions.
The green “RUN” LED must light up, whereas the red “ERROR” must not light up.
Close the protective switches. If test switches are available, then these must be in the operating position.
The device is now ready for operation.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
4 Technical Data
4.1 General Device Data 160

4.2 Voltage Protection 169
4.3 Frequency Protection 81 O/U 171
4.4 Load Restoration 172
4.5 Flexible Protection Functions 173
4.6 Synchrocheck 25 175
4.7 Overecxitation Protection 24 177
4.8 Jump of Voltage Vector 179
4.9 User-defined Functions (CFC) 180
4.10 Auxiliary Functions 185
4.11 Switching Device Control 188
4.12 Dimensions 189

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data
4.1 General Device Data
4.1.1 Analog Inputs
Voltage Inputs
Nominal frequency fNom 50 Hz or 60 Hz (adjustable)

Operating range frequency (not dependent on the nominal 25 Hz to 70 Hz
frequency
Nominal Voltage 34 V – 225 V (adjustable) for connection of
phase-to-ground voltages
34 V – 200 V (adjustable) for connection of
phase-to-phase voltages
Measuring Range 0 V to 200 V
Burden at 100 V approx. 0.005 VA
Overload capacity in the voltage path
– Thermal (rms) 230 V continuous
4.1.2 Auxiliary voltage
Direct Voltage
Voltage supply via an integrated converter

Nominal auxiliary DC voltage VAux DC 24 V to 48 V DC 60 V to 250 V
Permissible voltage ranges DC 19 V to 60 V DC 48 V to 300 V
Overvoltage category, IEC 60255-27 III
AC ripple voltage peak to peak, IEC 60255-11 15 % of auxiliary voltage
Power input Quiescent Energized

7RW80 approx. 5 W approx. 12 W
Bridging time for failure/short-circuit, IEC 60255– ≥ 50 ms at V ≥ 110 V
11 ≥ 10 ms at V < 110 V
Alternating Voltage
Voltage supply via an integrated converter

Nominal auxiliary AC voltage VAux AC 115 V AC 230 V
Permissible voltage ranges AC 92 V to 132 V AC 184 V to 265 V
Overvoltage category, IEC 60255-27 III
Power input (at AC 115 V/230 V) < 15 VA

Bridging time for failure/short-circuit ≥ 10 ms at V = 115 V/230 V
4.1.3 Binary Inputs and Outputs
Binary Inputs
Variant Quantity
7RW801 3 (configurable)
7RW802 7 (configurable)

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data
DC nominal voltage range 24 V to 250 V

Current Consumption (independent of the control approx. 0.4 mA
voltage)
Pickup time approx. 3 ms
Response time of the binary output after trigger approx. 9 ms
signal via binary input
Dropout time approx. 4 ms
Response time of the binary output after trigger approx. 5 ms
signal via binary input
Secured switching thresholds (adjustable)
for Nominal Voltages DC 24 V to 125 V V high > DC 19 V
V low < DC 10 V
for Nominal Voltages DC 110 V to 250 V V high > DC 88 V
V low < DC 44 V
for Nominal Voltages DC 220 V and 250 V V high > DC 176 V
V low < DC 88 V
Maximum Permissible Voltage DC 300 V
Impulse Filter on Input 220 V coupled above 220nF at a recovery time between
two switching operations ≥ 60 ms
Output Relays
Signal-/Command Relay, Alarm Relay

Quantity and data According to the order variant (allocatable)
Order variant NO contact NO/NC selectable
7RW801 3 2 (+ 1 life contact not allocatable)
7RW802 6 2 (+ 1 life contact not allocatable)
Switching capability CLOSE 1000 W / 1000 VA
Switching capability TRIP 40 W or 30 VA at L/R ≤ 40 ms
Switching voltage AC and DC 250 V
adm. current per contact (continuous) 5A
adm. current per contact (close and hold) 30 A for 1 s (NO contact)
Interference suppression capacitor at the Frequency Impedance
relay contacts 2,2 nF, 250 V, Ceramic 50 Hz 1.4· 106 Ω ± 20 %
60 Hz 1.2· 106 Ω ± 20 %
4.1.4 Communication Interfaces
User Interface
Terminal Front side, non-isolated, USB type B socket for connecting a

personal computer
Operation from DIGSI V4.82 via USB 2.0 full speed
(PELV)
Operation with DIGSI
Transmission speed up to 12 Mbit/s max.
Bridgeable distance 5m

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data
Port A
Ethernet electrical for DIGSI or SICAM I/O Unit 7XV5673

Operation with DIGSI
Terminal Front case bottom, mounting location "A", RJ45 socket
100BaseT according to IEEE802.3
LED yellow: 10-/100 MBit/s (on/off)
LED green: connection/no connection (on/off)
Test voltage (PELV) 500 V; 50 Hz
Transmission speed 10/100 MBit/s
Bridgeable distance 20 m
Port B
IEC 60870-5-103 single

RS232/RS485/FO depending on the order Isolated interface for data transfer to a control center
variant
RS232
Terminal Back case bottom, mounting location "B", 9- pin DSUB socket
Transmission speed min. 1,200 Bd, max. 115,000 Bd;
factory setting 9,600 Bd
RS485
Terminal Back case bottom, mounting location "B", 9- pin DSUB socket
Transmission speed min. 1,200 Bd, max. 115,000 Bd;
factory setting 9,600 Bd
Bridgeable distance max. 1 km
Fiber optic cable (FO)

FO connector type ST connector
Terminal Back case bottom, mounting location "B"
Optical wavelength λ = 820 nm
Laser Class 1 according to EN 60825-1/-2 When using glass fiber 50 μm/125 μm or glass fiber 62.5 μm/125
μm
Permissible optical signal attenuation max. 8 dB, with glass fiber 62.5/125 μm
Bridgeable distance max. 1.5 km
Character idle state Configurable; factory setting “Light off”
Profibus RS485 (DP)

Terminal Back case bottom, mounting location "B”, 9- pin DSUB socket
Transmission speed Up to 1.5 MBd
Bridgeable distance 1 000 m (3 300 ft) at ≤ 93.75 kBd
500 m (1 600 ft) at ≤ 187.5 kBd
200 m (660 ft) at ≤ 1.5 MBd

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data
Profibus FO (DP)
FO connector type ST connector
Double ring
Terminal Back case bottom, mounting location "B”
Transmission speed up to 1.5 MBd
Recommended: > 500 kBd with normal casing
Laser Class 1 according to EN 60825-1/-2 When using glass fiber 50/125 μm or glass fiber 62.5/125 μm
DNP3.0 /MODBUS RS485

Terminal Back case bottom, mounting location "B”, 9- pin DSUB socket
Transmission speed up to 19,200 Bd
Bridgeable distance max. 1 km
DNP3.0 /MODBUS FO
FO connector type ST connector transmitter/receiver
Terminal Back case bottom, mounting location "B”
Transmission speed up to 19,200 Bd
Laser Class 1 according to EN 60825-1/-2 When using glass fiber 50 μm/125 μm or glass fiber 62.5/125 μm
Ethernet electrical (EN 100) for DIGSI and IEC61850

Terminal Back case bottom, mounting location "B”,
2 x RJ45 socket
100BaseT according to IEEE802.3
Test voltage (with regard to the socket) 500 V; 50 Hz
(PELV)
Transmission speed 100 MBit/s
Ethernet optical (EN 100) for DIGSI and IEC61850

Terminal Back case bottom, mounting location "B”,
Duplex-LC, 100BaseF according to IEEE802.3
Transmission speed 100 MBit/s
Optical wavelength 1300 nm
Bridgeable distance max. 2 km (1.24 mi)

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data
4.1.5 Electrical Tests
Regulations
Standards: IEC 60255

IEEE Std C37.90, see individual functions
VDE 0435
for more standards see also individual functions
Insulation Test
Standards: IEC 60255-27 and IEC 60870-2-1

Voltage test (routine test) of all circuits except 2.5 kV, 50 Hz
auxiliary voltage, binary inputs and communication
ports
Voltage test (routine test) of auxiliary voltage and DC 3.5 kV
binary inputs
Voltage test (routine test) of isolated communica- 500 V, 50 Hz
tion ports only (A and B)
Impulse voltage test (type test) of all process 6 kV (peak value);
circuits (except for communication ports) against 1.2 µs/50 µs; 0.5 J;
the internal electronics 3 positive and 3 negative impulses at intervals of 1 s
Impulse voltage test (type test) of all process 5 kV (peak value);
circuits against each other (except for communica- 1.2 µs/50 µs; 0.5 J;
tion ports) and against the PE terminal of class III 3 positive and 3 negative impulses at intervals of 1 s
EMC Tests for Immunity (Type Tests)
Standards: IEC 60255-26, (product standard)

IEC/EN 61000-6-2
VDE 0435
For more standards see also individual
functions
Immunity to damped oscillatory waves 2.5 kV (Peak); 100 kHz and 1 MHz; τ =
IEC 60255-22-1 IEC 61000-4-18 15 ms; 400 Surges per s; Test duration 2 s;
Ri = 200 Ω
Electrostatic discharge, Class IV 8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air
EN 61000-6-2, IEC 60255-22-2 discharge, both polarities; 150 pF; Ri =
330 Ω, rating criteria B
Radio frequency electromagnetic field, amplitude-modulated, 10 V/m; 80 MHz to 2.7 GHz 80 % AM;
Class III 1 kHz
EN 61000-6-2, IEC 60255-22-3
Fast transient bursts, Class IV 4 kV; 5 ns/50 ns; 5 kHz; 1 min. test length,
EN 61000-6-2, IEC 60255-22-4 rating criteria B
High energy surge voltages (SURGE), Installation Class III, EN Impulse: 1.2 µs/50 µs, rating criteria B
61000-6-2, IEC 60255-22-5
Auxiliary voltage common mode: 4 kV; 12 Ω; 9 µF
diff. mode: 1 kV; 2 Ω; 18 µF
Measuring inputs, common mode: 4 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF
binary inputs and diff. mode: 1 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF
relay outputs

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data
Immunity to Conducted Disturbance by RF fields, injected 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz;
Current 27 Mhz and 68 MHz spot freq. Dwell time
EN 61000-6-2, IEC 60255-22-6 > 10 sec.
Power system frequency magnetic field 30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m and 1000
EN 61000-6-2, IEC 61000-4-8 V/m for 3 s;
Radiated Electromagnetic Interference 20 V/m; 80 MHz to 1 GHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz
IEEE Std C37.90.2 35 V/m pulsed, 50% duty cycle 1 Hz rep.
rate
Power frequency on binary input ports Common mode Zone A and B: 300 Veff
IEC 60255-26, IEC 61000-4-16 (220 Ω, 0.47 µF)
Differential Mode Zone B: 100 Veff (100 Ω,
0.047 µF)
testet with 3.9 KΩ termination resistor
Ripple on d.c. input power port inmunity test, IEC 61000-4-17 15 % of nominal auxiliary voltage
Gradual shutdown / start-up for d.c. power supply Shut-down ramp: 60 s
IEC 60255-26 Power off: 5 min.
Start-up ramp: 60 s
EMC Tests for Noise Emission (Type Test)
Standard: EN 61000-6-4 /01.07 + A1

EN 55011 /11.2009 + A1 class A
Radio noise voltage to lines, only auxiliary voltage 150 kHz to 30 MHz Limit Class A
IEC/CISPR 16-2-1
Interference field strength 30 MHz bis 1000 MHz Limit Class A
IEC/CISPR 16-2-3 1 GHz to 6 GHz Limit Class A
Harmonic currents on the network lead at AC 230 V Device is to be assigned Class D (applies only to devices
IEC 61000-3-2 with > 50 VA power consumption)
Voltage dips, interruptions and fluctuations Tolerate Voltage interruptions < 60 ms for the nominal
IEC 60255-11, IEC 61000-4-29 auxiliary voltage.
4.1.6 Mechanical Tests
Vibration and Shock Stress during Steady-State Operation
Standards: IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068

Oscillation Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-1, Class 2; 10 Hz to 60 Hz: ±0,075 mm amplitude; 60 Hz bis
IEC 60068-2-6 150 Hz: 1g acceleration
frequency sweep rate 1 octave/min 20 cycles in 3
orthogonal axes.
Shock Semi-sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1; acceleration, duration 11 ms, each 3 shocks in both
IEC 60068-2-27 directions of the 3 axes
Seismic Vibration Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-3, Class 2; 1 Hz to 8 Hz: ±7,5 mm amplitude (horizontal axis)
IEC 60068-3-3 1 Hz to 8 Hz: ±3,5 mm amplitude (vertical axis)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 2 g acceleration (horizontal axis)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration (vertical axis)
Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data
Vibration and Shock Stress during Transport
Standards: IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068

Oscillation Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-1, Class 2; 5 Hz to 8 Hz: ±7.5 mm amplitude;
IEC 60068-2-6 8 Hz to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
frequency sweep 1 octave/min
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
Shock Semi-sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1; 15 g acceleration, duration 11 ms,
IEC 60068-2-27 each 3 shocks (in both directions of the 3 axes)
Continuous Shock Semi-sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1; 10 g acceleration, duration 16 ms,
IEC 60068-2-29 each 1000 shocks (in both directions of the 3 axes)
4.1.7 Climatic Stress Tests
Temperatures
Standards: IEC 60255-1, IEC 60068-2-1/2, IEC 60068-2-78, IEC

60068-2-30
Type test (in acc. with IEC 60068-2-1 and -2, Test –25 °C to +85 °C oder –13 °F to +185 °F
Bd for 16 h)
Damp heat, steady state - Test Cab 40 °C, 93 % RH, 56 days
IEC 60255-1 and IEC 60068-2-78.
Damp heat, cyclic - Test Db 25 °C to/down 40 °C in 3 hr., > 93 % RH, dwell time 9 hr.
IEC 60255-1 and IEC 60068-2-30 6 cycles
Permissible temporary operating temperature –20 °C to +70 °C oder –4 °F to +158 °F (clearness of the
(tested for 96 h) display may be impaired from +55 °C or +131 °F)
Recommended for permanent operation (in acc. –5 °C to +55 °C or +23 °F to +131 °F
with IEC 60255-6)
Limit temperatures for storage –25 °C to +55 °C or –13 °F to +131 °F
Limit temperatures for transport –25 °C to +70 °C or –13 °F to +158 °F
Storage and transport with factory packaging
Humidity
Permissible humidity Mean value per year ≤ 75 % relative humidity;

on 56 days of the year up to 93 % relative humidity;
condensation must be avoided!
Siemens recommends that all devices be installed such that they are not exposed to direct sunlight, nor
subject to large fluctuations in temperature that may cause condensation to occur.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data
4.1.8 Service Conditions
The protective device is designed for use in an industrial environment and an electrical utility environment.
Proper installation procedures should be followed to ensure electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).
In addition, the following is recommended:
• All contacts and relays that operate in the same cubicle, cabinet, or relay panel as the numerical protec-
tive device should, as a rule, be equipped with suitable surge suppression components.
• For substations with operating voltages of 100 kV and above, all external cables should be shielded with
a conductive shield grounded at both ends. For substations with lower operating voltages, no special
measures are normally required.
• Do not withdraw or insert individual modules or boards while the protective device is energized. In with-
drawn condition, some components are electrostatically endangered; during handling the ESD stand-
ards (for Electrostatic Sensitive Devices) must be observed. They are not endangered when inserted into
the case.
4.1.9 Constructive Design
Case 7XP20
Dimensions see dimensional drawings, Section 4.12 Dimensions
Device Case Size Weight

7RW80**-*B for panel surface mounting 1/
6
4.5 kg (9.9 lb)
7RW80**-*E for panel flush mounting 1/
6
4 kg (8.8 lb)
Protection type acc. to IEC 60529

For equipment in the surface-mounting case IP 50
For equipment in flush mounting case Front IP 51
Rear IP 50
For operator protection IP 2x for current terminal
IP 2x for voltage terminal
Degree of pollution, IEC 60255-27 2
4.1.10 UL certification conditions
The data in the following table apply to the device variants 7RW801 and 7RW802.
Output Relays DC 24 V 5 A General Purpose

DC 48 V 0,8 A General Purpose
DC 240 V 0,1 A General Purpose
AC 240 V 5 A General Purpose
AC 120 V 1/3 hp
AC 250 V 1/2 hp
B300, R300
Voltage Inputs Input voltage range 300 V

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data
Battery Servicing of the circuitry involving the batteries and replacement of the lithium
batteries shall be done by a trained technician.
Replace Battery with VARTA or Panasonic Cat. Nos. CR 1/2 AA or BR 1/2 AA only. Use
of another Battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. See manual for safety
instructions.
Caution: The battery used in this device may present a fire or chemical burn hazard
if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble, heat above 100 °C (212 °F) or incin-
erate.
Dispose of used battery promptly. Keep away from children.
Climatic Stress Tests Surrounding air temperature tsurr: max. 70 °C (158 °F), normal opera-
tion
Design Field Wires of Control Circuits shall be separated from other circuits with respect to
the end use requirements!
Type 1 if mounted into a door or front cover of an enclosure.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data
4.2 Voltage Protection

Setting Ranges / Increments
Undervoltages 27-1, 27-2, 27-Vp<
Measured quantity used - Positive sequence system of voltages

with three-phase connection - Smallest phase-to-phase voltages
- Smallest phase-to-ground voltage
Measured quantity used with single-phase Single-phase phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase voltage
connection
Connection of phase-to-ground voltages
- Bewertung Leiter-ground voltages 10 V to 120 V Increment 1 V
- Evaluation of phase-to-phase voltages 10 V to 210 V Increment 1 V
- Evaluation of positive-sequence system 10 V to 210 V Increment 1 V
Connection of phase-to-phase voltages 10 V to 120 V Increment 1 V
Connection: single-phase 10 V to 120 V Increment 1 V
Dropout ratio r for 27-1, 27-21) 1.01 to 3.00 Increment 0.01
Dropout threshold for max.130 V for phase-to-phase voltage
(r · 27-1) or (r · 27-2) or (r · 27-Vp<) max. 225 V for phase-to-ground voltage
Minimum hysteresis 0.6 V
Time delays 27-1 DELAY, 27-2 DELAY, 27 T Vp< 0.00 s to 100.00 s oder ∞ Increment 0.01 s
(disabled)
Overvoltages 59-1, 59-2, 59-Vp>
Measured quantity used - Positive sequence system of the voltages

with three-phase connection - Negative sequence system of the voltages
- Largest phase-to-phase voltage
- Largest phase-to-ground voltage
Measured quantity used Connected single-phase phase-togroundvoltage or
with single-phase connection phase-to-phase voltage
Connection of phase-to-ground voltages
- Evaluation of phase-to-ground voltages 20 V to 150 V Increment 1 V
- Evaluation of negative-sequence system 2 V to 150 V Increment 1 V
Connection of phase-to-phase voltages
- Evaluation of negative-sequence system 2 V to 150 V Increment 1 V
Connection: single-phase 20 V to 150 V Increment 1 V
Dropout ratio r for 59-1, 59-21) 0.90 to 0.99 Increment 0.01 V
Dropout threshold for max. 150 V for phase-to-phase voltage
(r · 59-1) or (r · 59-2) or (r · 59-Vp>) max. 260 V for phase-to-ground voltage
Minimum hysteresis 0.6 V
Time delays 59-1 DELAY, 59-2 DELAY, 59 T Vp> 0.00 s to 100.00 s or ∞ (disa- Increment 0.01 s
bled)
1) r = Vdropout/Vpickup

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data
Times
Pickup Times
Undervoltage 27-1, 27-2, 27-1 V1, 27-2 V1, 27-Vp< approx. 50 ms
- Overvoltage 59-1, 59-2, 59-Vp> approx. 50 ms
- Overvoltage 59-1 V1, 59-2 V1, 59-1 V2 , 59-2 V2, 59-Vp> V1, approx. 60 ms
59-Vp> V2
Dropout Times
- Undervoltage 27-1, 27-2, 27-1 V1, 27-2 V1, 27-Vp> approx. 50 ms
- Overvoltage 59-1, 59-2, 59-Vp> approx. 50 ms
- Overvoltage 59-1 V1, 59-2 V1, 59-1 V2 , 59-2 V2, 59-Vp> V1, approx. 60 ms
59-Vp> V2
Tolerances
Pickup Voltage Limits 3 % of setting value or 1 V

Delay times T 1 % of setting value or. 10 ms
Influencing Variables
Auxiliary DC voltage in range 0.8 ≤ VAux/VAuxNom ≤ 1,15 1%

Temperature in range –5 °C (23 °F) ≤ Θamb ≤ 55 °C (131 °F) 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in the range of 25 Hz to 70 Hz
Frequency in the range of 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 (fNom = 50 Hz or 60 Hz) 1%
Frequency outside range 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 Increased tolerances
Harmonics
- up to 10 % 3rd harmonic 1%
- up to 10 % 5th harmonic 1%

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data

Setting Ranges / Increments 4; each can be set to f> or f<

Pickup values f> or f< for fNom = 50 Hz 40.00 Hz to 60.00 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz
Pickup values f> or f< for fNom = 60 Hz 50.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz
Dropout threshold 0.02 Hz to 1.00 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz
= |pickup threshold - dropout threshold|
Time delays T 0.00 s to 100.00 s or ∞ (disabled) Increments 0.01 s
Undervoltage blocking 10 V to 150 V Increments 1 V
with three-phase connection:
Positive sequence component V1
with single-phase connection ("Vphn, Vsyn"):
single-phase Phase-to-ground voltage
Times
Pickup times f>, f< approx. 100 ms at fNom = 50 Hz

approx. 80 ms at fNom = 60 Hz
Dropout times f>, f< approx. 100 ms at fNom = 50 Hz
Dropout Difference
Δf = Ι pickup value - dropout value Ι 0.02 Hz to 1 Hz
Dropout Ratio
Dropout Ratio for Undervoltage Blocking approx. 1.05
Tolerances
Pickup frequencies 81/O or 81U ≤ 5 mHz Tolerance (at V = VNom, fNom - 0.5 Hz < f < fNom + 0.5 Hz)
< 15 mHz Tolerance (at V = VNom, fNom - 5 Hz < f < fN - 0.5 Hz)
< 15 mHz Tolerance (at V = VNom, fNom + 0.5 Hz < f < fNom + 5 Hz)
Undervoltage blocking
3 % of setting value or 1 V
Time delays 81/O or 81/U
1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Power supply direct voltage in range 0.8 ≤ VPS/VPSNom ≤ 1.15 1%

Temperature in range 23 °F (-5 °C) ≤ Θamb ≤ 131 °F (55 °C) 0,5 %/10 K
Harmonics

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data

Setting Ranges / Increments 4

Start threshold with fNom = 50 Hz 40.00 Hz to 60.00 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz
Start threshold with fNom = 60 Hz 50.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz
Pickup Threshold 0.02 Hz to 2.00 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz
= |Start threshold – Pickup threshold|
Dropout Threshold 0.00 Hz to 2.00 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz
= |Start threshold – Dropout threshold|
Delay times T Pickup and Dropout 0 s to 10800 s Increments 1 s
Delay times T CB-Close command 0.01 s to 32.00 s
Times
Pickup times approx. 100 ms at fNom = 50 Hz

Dropout Times approx. 100 ms at fNom = 50 Hz
Tolerances
Pickup frequencies 15 mHz (with U = UNom, f = fNom ± 5 Hz)

Undervoltage blocking 3 % of setting value or 1 V
Time delays 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Power supply direct voltage in range 0.8 ≤ VAux/VAuxNom ≤ 1.15 1%

Temperature in the Range 23.00 °F (–5 °C) ≤ Θamb ≤ 131.00 °F (55 °C) 0.5 %/10 K
Oberschwingungen

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data

Measured Values / Modes of Operation
Three-phase V, 3V0, V1, V2, dV/dt

Single-phase V, VN,Vx
Without fixed phase reference f, df/dt, binary input
Measurement method for V Fundamental,
r.m.s. value (true RMS),
positive sequence system,
negative sequence system,
zero sequence system
Pickup on exceeding threshold value or
falling below threshold value
Pickup thresholds:
Voltage V, V1, V2, 3V0 2.0 V to 260.0 V Increments 0.1 V
Displacement voltage V0 2.0 V to 200.0 V Increments 0.1 V
Frequency for fNom = 50 Hz 40.0 Hz to 60.0 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz
for fNom = 60 Hz 50.0 Hz to 70.0 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz
Frequency change df/dt 0.10 Hz/s to 20.00 Hz/s Increments 0.01 Hz/s
Voltage change dV/dt 4 V/s to 100 V/s Increments 1 V/s
Dropout ratio > element 1.01 to 3.00 Increments 0.01
Dropout ratio < element 0.70 to 0.99 Increments 0.01
Dropout difference f 0.02 Hz to 1.00 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz
Pickup delay (standard) 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Command delay time 0.00 s to 3,600.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Fixed Dropout Difference
Dropout difference df/dt 0.1 Hz/s

Dropout difference dV/dt 3 V/s
Times
Pickup times:
Voltage (phase quantities)
for 2 times the setting value approx. 30 ms
Voltage (symmetrical components)
Frequency approx. 100 ms
Frequency change for 1.25 times the setting value approx. 220 ms
Voltage change dV/dt for 2 times the setting value approx. 220 ms
Binary input approx. 20 ms

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data
Dropout times:
Voltage (phase quantities) < 20 ms
Current, voltage (symmetrical components) < 30 ms
Frequency < 100 ms
Frequency change < 200 ms
Voltage change < 200 ms
Binary input < 10 ms
Tolerances
Pickup thresholds:
Voltage 3% of setting value or 0,2 V
Voltage (symmetrical components) 4% of setting value or 0,2 V
Voltage change dV/dt 5 % of setting value or 2 V/s
Frequency 15 mHz
Frequency change 5% of setting value or 0,05 Hz/s
Times 1% of setting value or 10 ms
Influencing Variables for Pickup Values
Auxiliary DC voltage in range 0.8 ≤ VAux/VAuxNom ≤ 1,15 1%

Temperature in range –5 °C (23 °F) ≤ Θamb ≤ 55 °C (131 °F) 0.5 %/10 K
Frequency in the range of 25 Hz to 70 Hz
Frequency in the range of 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 (fNom = 50 Hz or 60 Hz) 1%
Frequency outside range 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 Increased tolerances
Harmonics

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data
4.6 Synchrocheck 25
4.6 Synchrocheck 25
Modes of Operation
- Synchrocheck
Additional Release Conditions
- Live bus / dead line,

- Dead bus / live line,
- Dead bus and dead line
- Bypassing
Voltages
Maximum operating voltage Vmax 20 V to 140 V (phase-to-phase) Increments 1 V

Minimum operating voltage Vmin 20 V to 125 V (phase-to-phase) Increments 1 V
V< for dead line 1 V to 60 V (phase-to-phase) Increments 1 V
V> for live line 20 V to 140 V (phase-to-phase) Increments 1 V
Primary transformer rated voltage V2N 0.10 kV to 800.00 kV Increments 0.01 kV
Tolerances 2 % of pickup value or 2 V
Dropout Ratios approx. 0.9 (V>) or 1.1 (V<)
Permissible Difference
Voltages differences V2>V1; V2<V1 0.5 V to 50.0 V (phase-tophase) Increments 0.1 V

Tolerance 1V
Frequency Difference f2>f1; f2<f1 0.01 Hz to 2.00 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz
Tolerance 20 mHz
Angle Difference α2 > α1; α2 < α1 2° to 80° Increments 1°
Tolerance 2°
Max. angle error 5° for Δf ≤ 1 Hz
10° for Δf >1 Hz
Matching
Vector group matching via angle 0° to 360° Increments 1°

Different voltage transformer V1/V2 0.50 to 2.00 Increments 0.01
Times
Minimum Measuring Time approx. 80 ms

Maximum duration TSYN DURATION 0.01 s to 1200.00 s Increments 0.01 s
or ∞ (disabled)
Monitoring Time TSUP VOLTAGE 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s
Tolerance of all times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Measured Values of the Synchronism and Voltage Check
Reference voltage V1 in kV primary, in V secondary or in % VNom

- Range 10 % to 120 % of VNom
- Tolerance 1) ≤ 1 % of measured value, or 0,5 % VNom

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data
4.6 Synchrocheck 25
Voltage to be synchronized V2 in kV primary, in V secondary or in % VNom

- Range 10 % to 120 % of VNom
- Tolerance 1) ≤ 1 % of measured value, or 0,5 % VNom
Frequency of the voltage V1 f1 in Hz
- Range fNom ± 5 Hz
- Tolerance 1) 20 mHz
Frequency of the voltage V2 f2 in Hz
Voltage difference V2-V1 in kV primary, in V secondary or in % VN
- Range 10 % bis 120 % of VN
- Tolerance 1) ≤ 1 % of measured value, or 0,5 % VN
Frequency difference f2-f1 in mHz
Angle difference λ2-λ1 in °
- Range 0 to 180°
- Tolerance 1) 0,5°
1) at nominal frequency

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data
4.7 Overecxitation Protection 24

Pickup threshold of the warning stage 1.00 to 1.20 Increments 0.01
Pickup threshold of the stage characteristic 1.00 to 1.40 Increments 0.01
Delay times T V/f>, T V/f>> 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s

(Alarm and stage characteristic) or ∞ (inactive)
Characteristic value pairs V/f 1.05/1,10/1,15/1,20/1.25/1,30/1.35/1.40
Associated time delay for t (V/f) thermal replica 0 s to 20 000 s Increments 1 s
Cooling time TCOOL 0 s to 20 000 s Increments 1 s
Times
Alarm and stage characteristic

Pickup times for 1.1 · Setting value approx. 90 ms
Dropout Times approx. 60 ms
Dropout Ratios
Pickup, Tripping approx. 0.98
Tripping Characteristic
Thermal Replica see Figure 4-1

(Presetting and stage characteristic)
Tolerances
Pickup on V/f 3 % of setting value

Delay times T 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
(Alarm and stage characteristic)
Thermal replica (time characteristic) 5 %, related to V/f ±600 ms
Power supply direct voltage in range 0.8 ≤ VAux/VAuxNom ≤ ≤1%

1.15
Temperature in the Range 23.00 °F (–5 °C) ≤ Θamb≤ ≤ 0.5 %/10 K
131.00 °F (55 °C)
Harmonics
- up to 10 % 3rd harmonic ≤1%
- up to 10 % 5th harmonic ≤1%

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data
[resultierende-ausloesekennlinie-aus-therm-020830-ho, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-1 Resulting Tripping Characteristic from Thermal Replica and Stage Characteristic of the Overex-
citation Protection (Default Setting)

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data

Element Δφ 2° to 30° Increments 1°

Delay times T 0.00 to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s
or ∞ (inactive)
Reset Time TReset 0.00 to 60.00 s Increments 0.00 s
or ∞ (inactive)
Undervoltage Blocking 10.0 to 125.0 V Increments 0.1 V
Times
Pickup Times Δφ approx. 75 ms

Dropout Times Δφ approx. 75 ms
Dropout Ratios
– –
Tolerances
Jump of Phasor 2° at V > 0.5 VN

Undervoltage Blocking 1 % of setting value or 0.5 V
Delay times T 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Power supply direct voltage in range 0.8 ≤ VAux/VAuxNom ≤ ≤ 1 %

1.15
Temperature in the Range 23.00 °F (–5 °C) ≤ Θamb≤ ≤ 0.5 %/10 K
131.00 °F (55 °C)
Frequency in Range 0.95 ≤ f/fNom ≤ 1.05 ≤1%
Harmonics
- up to 10 % 3nd harmonic ≤1%
- up to 10 % 5th harmonic ≤1%

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data
4.9 User-defined Functions (CFC)

Function Blocks and Their Possible Assignments to Task Levels
Function block Explanation Task level

MW_ PLC1_ PLC_ SFS_
BEARB BEARB BEARB BEARB
ABSVALUE Magnitude Calculation X — — —
ADD Addition X X X X
ALARM Alarm X X X X
AND AND - Gate X X X X
BLINK Blink block X X X X
BOOL_TO_CO Boolean to Control (conversion) — X X —
BOOL_TO_DI Boolean to Double Point (conver- — X X X
sion)
BOOL_TO_IC Bool to Internal SI, Conversion — X X X
BUILD_DI Create Double Point Annunciation — X X X
CMD_CANCEL Cancel command X X X X
CMD_CHAIN Switching Sequence — X X —
CMD_INF Command Information — — — X
COMPARE Metered value comparison X X X X
CONNECT Connection — X X X
COUNTER Counter X X X X
DI_GET_STATUS Decode status of double-point indi- X X X X
cation
DI_SET_STATUS Generate double-point indication X X X X
with status
D_FF D- Flipflop — X X X
D_FF_MEMO Status Memory for Restart X X X X
DI_TO_BOOL Double Point to Boolean (conver- — X X X
sion)
DINT_TO_REAL Adaptor X X X X
DIST_DECODE Convert double-point indication X X X X
with status into four single-point
indications with status
DIV Division X X X X
DM_DECODE Decode Double Point X X X X
DYN_OR Dynamic OR X X X X
INT_TO_REAL Conversion X X X X
IO_UNIT SICAM I/O Unit X X
LIVE_ZERO Live-zero, non-linear Curve X — — —
LONG_TIMER Timer (max.1193h) X X X X
LOOP Feedback Loop X X — X
LOWER_SETPOINT Lower Limit X — — —
MUL Multiplication X X X X
MV_GET_STATUS Decode status of a value X X X X
MV_SET_STATUS Set status of a value X X X X
NAND NAND - Gate X X X X
NEG Negator X X X X
NOR NOR - Gate X X X X

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data
Function block Explanation Task level

MW_ PLC1_ PLC_ SFS_
BEARB BEARB BEARB BEARB
OR OR - Gate X X X X
REAL_TO_DINT Adaptor X X X X
REAL_TO_INT Conversion X X X X
REAL_TO_UINT Conversion X X X X
RISE_DETECT Edge detector X X X X
RS_FF RS- Flipflop — X X X
RS_FF_MEMO RS- Flipflop with status memory — X X X
SQUARE_ROOT Root Extractor X X X X
SR_FF SR- Flipflop — X X X
SR_FF_MEMO SR- Flipflop with status memory — X X X
ST_AND AND gate with status X X X X
ST_NOT Inverter with status X X X X
ST_OR OR gate with status X X X X
SUB Substraction X X X X
TIMER Timer — X X —
TIMER_SHORT Simple timer — X X —
UINT_TO_REAL Conversion X X X X
UPPER_SETPOINT Upper Limit X — — —
X_OR XOR - Gate X X X X
ZERO_POINT Zero Supression X — — —
General Limits
Description Limit Comment

Maximum number of all CFC charts 32 If the limit is exceeded, the device rejects the parameter
considering all task levels set with an error message, restores the last valid param-
eter set and restarts using that parameter set.
Maximum number of all CFC charts 16 When the limit is exceeded, an error message is output by
considering one task level the device. Consequently, the device starts monitoring.
The red ERROR-LED lights up.
Maximum number of all CFC inputs 400 When the limit is exceeded, an error message is output by
considering all charts the device. Consequently, the device starts monitoring.
The red ERROR-LED lights up.
Maximum number of reset-resistant 350 When the limit is exceeded, an error message is output by
flipflops the device. Consequently, the device starts monitoring.
D_FF_MEMO The red ERROR-LED lights up.
Device-Specific Limits
Description Limit Comment

Maximum number of synchronous 165 When the limit is exceeded, an error message is output by
changes of chart inputs per task level the device. Consequently, the device starts monitoring.
Maximum number of chart outputs per 150 The red ERROR-LED lights up.
task level

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data
Additional Limits
Additional limits 1) for the following CFC blocks:

Task Level Maximum Number of Modules in the Task Levels
TIMER2) 3) TIMER_SHORT2) 3)
MW_BEARB — —
PLC1_BEARB
15 30
PLC_BEARB
SFS_BEARB — —
1) When the limit is exceeded, an error message is iisued by the device. Consequently, the device starts moni-
toring. The red ERROR-LED lights up.
2) The following condition applies for the maximum number of timers: (2 · number of TIMER + number of
TIMER_SHORT) < 30. TIMER and TIMER_SHORT hence share the available timer resources within the frame of
this inequation. The limit does not apply to the LONG_TIMER.
3) Thetime values for the blocks TIMER and TIMER_SHORT must not be selected shorter than the time resolu-
tion of the device of 10 ms, as then, the blocks will not then start with the starting pulse.
Maximum Number of TICKS in the Task Levels
Task level Limit in TICKS 1)

MW_BEARB (measured value processing) 10000
PLC1_BEARB (slow PLC processing) 12000
PLC_BEARB (fast PLC processing) 600
SFS_BEARB (interlocking) 10000
1) When the sum of TICKS of all blocks exceeds the limits mentioned before, an error message is output in the
CFC.
Processing Times in TICKS for the Individual Elements
Individual element Number of TICKS

Block, basic requirement 5
Each input from the 3rd additional input on for generic modules 1
Combination with input signal border 6
Combination with output signal border 7
Additionally for each chart 1
Arithmetic ABS_VALUE 5
ADD 26
SUB 26
MUL 26
DIV 54
SQUARE_ROOT 83
Base logic AND 5
CONNECT 4
DYN_OR 6
NAND 5
NEG 4
NOR 5
OR 5
RISE_DETECT 4
X_OR 5

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data
Individual element Number of TICKS

Information status SI_GET_STATUS 5
CV_GET_STATUS 5
DI_GET_STATUS 5
MV_GET_STATUS 5
SI_SET_STATUS 5
DI_SET_STATUS 5
MV_SET_STATUS 5
ST_AND 5
ST_OR 5
ST_NOT 5
Memory D_FF 5
D_FF_MEMO 6
RS_FF 4
RS_FF_MEMO 4
SR_FF 4
SR_FF_MEMO 4
Control commands BOOL_TO_CO 5
BOOL_TO_IC 5
CMD_INF 4
CMD_INF_EXE 4
CMD_CHAIN 34
CMD_CANCEL 3
LOOP 8
Type converter BOOL_TO_DI 5
BUILD_DI 5
DI_TO_BOOL 5
DM_DECODE 8
DINT_TO_REAL 5
DIST_DECODE 8
UINT_TO_REAL 5
REAL_TO_DINT 10
REAL_TO_UINT 10
Comparison COMPARE 12
LOWER_SETPOINT 5
UPPER_SETPOINT 5
LIVE_ZERO 5
ZERO_POINT 5
Metered value (counter) COUNTER 6
Time and clock pulse TIMER 5
TIMER_LONG 5
TIMER_SHORT 8
ALARM 21
BLINK 11
Other IO_UNIT 17

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data
Routable in Matrix
In addition to the defined preassignments, indications and measured values can be freely routed to buffers,
preconfigurations can be removed.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data

Operational Measured Values
Voltages (phase-to-ground) in kV primary, in V secondary or in % VNom

VA-N, VB-N, VC-N
Voltages (phase-to-phase)
VA-B, VB-C, VC-A, VSYN
VN, Vph-N, Vx or V0
Positive sequence component V1
Negative sequence component V2
Range 10 % to 120 % VNom
Tolerance 1)
1,5 % of measured value or 0,5 % VN
Frequenz f in Hz
Range fNom ± 5 Hz
Tolerance 1)
20 mHz
Synchronization Function see section (Synchronization Function)
1) at nominal frequency
Min / Max Report
Report of Measured Values with date and time

Reset automatic Time of day adjustable (in minutes, 0 to 1439 min) Time
frame and starting time adjustable (in days, 1 to 365 days,
and ∞)
Manual Reset Using binary input
Using keypad
Via communication
Min/Max Values for Voltages VA-N; VB-N; VC-N;
V1 (Positive Sequence Component);
VA-B; VB-C; VC-A
Broken-wire Monitoring of Voltage Transformer Circuits
suited for 1- or 2-pole broken-wire detection of voltage transformer circuits;

only for connection of phase-ground voltages
Fault Logging
Recording of indications of the last 25 power system faults

Recording of indications of the last 3 power system ground faults
Time Allocation
Resolution for Event Log (Operational Annunciations) 1 ms

Resolution for Trip Log (Fault Annunciations) 1 ms
Maximum Time Deviation (Internal Clock) 0.01 %
Battery Lithium battery 3 V/1 Ah, Typ CR 1/2 AA
Message “Battery Fault” for insufficient battery charge

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data
Local Measured Values Monitoring
Voltage Asymmetry Vmax/Vmin > balance factor, for V > VGrenz

Voltage phase sequence Clockwise (ABC) / counter-clockwise (ACB)
Fault Recording
maximum of 8 fault records saved; memory maintained by buffer battery in the case of auxiliary voltage
failure
Recording time 5 s per fault record, in total up to 18 s at 50 Hz
(max. 15 s at 60 Hz)
Intervals at 50 Hz 1 instantaneous value each per 1.0 ms
Intervals at 60 Hz 1 instantaneous value each per 0.83 ms
Statistics
Stored number of trips Up to 9 digits
Operating Hours Counter
Display Range Up to 7 digits
Trip Circuit Supervision
With one or two binary inputs
Commissioning Aids
- Phase rotation field check

- Operational measured values
- Circuit breaker test by means of control function
- Creation of a test measurement report
- Creation of messages
Clock
Time synchronization Binary input

Communication
Modes of operation for time tracking
No. Mode of operation Explanations
1 Internal Internal synchronization using RTC (presetting)
2 IEC 60870-5-103 External synchronization using port B (IEC 60870-5-103)
3 Pulse via binary input External synchronization with pulse via binary input
4 Fieldbus (DNP, Modbus) External synchronization using field bus
5 SNTP (IEC 61850) External synchronization using port B (IEC 61850)
Setting Group Change Option of the Functional Settings
Number of Available Setting Groups 4 (parameter group A, B, C and D)

Switchover Performed using the keypad
DIGSI using the front PC port
Protocol using port B
Binary Input

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data
IEC 61850 GOOSE (inter-relay communication)
The GOOSE communication service of IEC 61850 is qualified for switchgear interlocking The runtime of
GOOSE messages with the protection relay picked up depends on the number of connected IEC 61850
clients.
As from version V4.6 of the devices, applications with protective functions have to be checked with regard
to their required runtime. In individual cases, the manufacturer has to be consulted with regard to the
requirements to ensure that the application functions safely.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data
4.11 Switching Device Control
4.11 Switching Device Control

Number of Controlled Switching Devices Depends on the number of binary inputs and outputs
available
Interlocking Freely programmable interlocking
Messages Single command / double command
Control Commands Single command / double command
Switching Command to Circuit Breaker 1-, 1½ - and 2-pole
Programmable Logic Controller PLC logic, graphic input tool
Local Control Control via menu control
assignment of function keys
Remote Control Using Communication Interfaces
Using a substation automation and control system (e.g.
SICAM)
Using DIGSI (e.g. via Modem)

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data
4.12 Dimensions
4.12 Dimensions
4.12.1 Panel Flush and Cubicle Mounting (Housing Size 1/6)
[abmess-sechstel-gehaeuse-7sx80-060606, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-2 Dimensional drawing of a 7RW80 for panel flush or cubicle mounting (housing size 1/6)
Note: A set of mounting brackets (consisting of upper and lower mounting rail) (order no. C73165-A63-
D200-1) is required for cubicle mounting. When using the Ethernet interface, it may be necessary
to rework the lower mounting rail.
Provide for sufficient space at the device bottom side or below the device to accommodate the
cables of the communication modules.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Technical Data
4.12 Dimensions
4.12.2 Panel Surface Mounting (Housing Size 1/6)
[abmess-sechstel-gehaeuse-aufbau-7sx80-060606, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-3 Dimensional drawing of a 7RW80 for panel surface mounting (housing size 1/6)
4.12.3 Bottom view
[ansicht-unten-sechstel-gehaeuse-7sx80-070914, 1, en_US]
Figure 4-4 Bottom view of a 7RW80 (housing size 1/6)

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
A Ordering Information and Accessories
A.1 Ordering Information 7RW80 V4.6 192

A.2 Accessories 195

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Ordering Information and Accessories
A.1 Ordering Information 7RW80 V4.6

Voltage and 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Supplemen-
Frequency Protec- tary
tion 7 R W 8 0 0 – – D + L 0
Number of Binary Inputs and Outputs Pos. 6

Housing 1/6 19” 3x V, 3 BI, 5 BO (2 changeover contacts), 1 Life Status Contact 1
Housing 1/6 19” 3 x V, 7 BI, 8 BO (2 changeover contacts), 1 Life Status Contact 2
Auxiliary voltage (power supply, pilot voltage) Pos. 8

DC 24 / 48 V 1
DC 60 V / 110 V / 125 V / 220 V / 250 V, AC 115 V, AC 230 V 5
Construction Pos. 9
Surface-mounting case, screw-type terminals B
Flush mounting case, screw-type terminals E
Region-specific Default / Language Settings and Function Versions Pos. 10

Region DE, IEC, German language (language can be changed, standard front panel A
Region world, IEC/ANSI, English language (GB) (language can be changed), standard front panel B
Region US, ANSI, English language (US) (language can be changed), US front panel C
Region FR, IEC/ANSI, French language (language can be changed), standard front panel D
Region world, IEC/ANSI, Spanish language (language can be changed), standard front panel E
Region world, IEC/ANSI, Italian language (language can be changed), standard front panel F
Region RUS, IEC/ANSI, Russian language (language can be changed), standard front panel G
Region CHN, IEC/ANSI, Chinese language (language cannot be changed), standard front panel Chinese K
Port B (bottom side of device, rear) Pos. 11

Not installed 0
IEC60870-5-103 or DIGSI4/Modem, electrical RS232 1
IEC60870-5-103 or DIGSI4/Modem, electrical RS485 2
IEC60870-5-103 or DIGSI4/Modem, optical 820nm, ST-connector 3
For further interface options see Additional Information in the following 9
Additional information for additional ports (bottom side of device, rear, port B) Zusatz
Profibus DP Slave, electrical RS485 +L0A
Profibus DP Slave, 820 nm, optical, double ring, ST-connector +L0B
Modbus electrical RS485 +L0D
Modbus, optical 820 nm, ST–connector +L0E
DNP3.0, electrical RS485 +L0G
DNP3.0, optical 820 nm, ST–connector +L0H
IEC 61850 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connector +L0R
IEC 61850 100 Mbit Ethernet optical, double, LC duplex connector +L0S
Converter Order Number Use

SIEMENS OLM1) 6GK1502–2CB10 For single ring
SIEMENS OLM1) 6GK1502–3CB10 For double ring
1) The
converter requires an operating voltage of DC 24 V. If the available operating voltage is > DC 24 V the additional
power supply 7XV5810–0BA00 is required.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Port A (bottom side of device, front) Pos. 12

Not installed 0
with Ethernet port (DIGSI port, not IEC61850), RJ45 connector 6
Measuring/Fault Recording Pos. 13

With fault recording and min/max values for voltage 1
Functions Pos. 15
Description ANSI-Nr. Description
Voltage and Frequency Protection 27/59 Under/Overvoltage A
64/59N Displacement Voltage
81 U/O Under/Overfrequency, f< ,f>
47 Phase Rotation
74TC Trip Circuit Supervision
86 Lock out
— Cold load pickup (dynamic setting changes)
Breaker control
Flexible protection functions (parameters from voltage),
Frequency change and Voltage change protection
Voltage and Frequency Protection 27/59 Under/Overvoltage B
Load Restoration 64/59N Displacement Voltage
81 U/O Under/Overfrequency, f< ,f>
— Load Restoration
47 Phase Rotation
86 Lock out
Breaker control
Voltage and Frequency Protection 27/59 Under/Overvoltage C
Synchrocheck 81 U/O Under/Overfrequency, f< ,f>
25 Synchrocheck
47 Phase Rotation
86 Lock out
Breaker control
Voltage and Frequency Protection 27/59 Under/Overvoltage D
Overexcitation Protection, 64/59N Displacement Voltage
Jump of Voltage Vector 81 U/O Under/Overfrequency, f< ,f>
24 Overexcitation Protection
Jump of Voltage Vector

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions Pos. 15
47 Phase Rotation
86 Lock out
Breaker control
Voltage, Frequency Protection, 27/59 Under/Overvoltage E
Overexcitation Protection, 81U/O Under/Overfrequency, f< ,f>
Jump of Voltage Vector 24 Overexcitation Protection
Load Restoration, — Jump of Voltage Vector
Synchrocheck — Load Restoration
25 Synchrocheck
47 Phase Rotation
86 Lock out
—- Cold load pickup (dynamic setting changes)
Breaker control

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
A.2 Accessories
A.2 Accessories
Exchangeable interface modules
Name Order number

RS232 C53207-A351-D641-1
RS485 C53207-A351-D642-1
FO 820 nm C53207-A351-D643-1
Profibus DP RS485 C53207-A351-D611-1
Profibus DP double ring C53207-A351-D613-1
Modbus RS 485 C53207-A351-D621-1
Modbus 820 nm C53207-A351-D623-1
DNP 3.0 RS 485 C53207-A351-D631-1
DNP 3.0 820 nm C53207-A351-D633-1
Ethernet electrical (EN 100) C53207-A351-D675-2
Ethernet optical (EN 100), 4 ST connectors C53207-A351-D678-1
C53207-A351-D688-1
Ethernet port electrical at port A C53207-A351-D151-1
RS485 FO converter
RS485 FO converter Order No.

820 nm, FC–Connector 7XV5650-0AA00
820 nm, with ST-Connector 7XV5650-0BA00
Mounting Rail for 19"-Racks
Name Order Number

Mounting Rail Set C73165-A63-D200-1
Battery
Lithium battery 3 V/1 Ah, type CR 1/2 AA Order No.

VARTA 6127 101 301
Panasonic BR-1/2AA
Terminals
Terminals Voltage terminal block C or block E C53207-A406-D181-1

Voltage terminal block D (inverse print) C53207-A406-D182-1
Voltage terminal short circuit links, 6 pieces C53207-A406-D194-1

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
B Terminal Assignments
B.1 7RW80 — Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Mounting 198
B.2 7RW80 — Housing for panel surface mounting 199

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Terminal Assignments
B.1 7RW80 — Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Mounting
B.1 7RW80 — Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Mounting

7RW801*
[kl-uebers-7rw80-1, 1, en_US]
Figure B-1 General diagram 7RW801

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Terminal Assignments
B.2 7RW80 — Housing for panel surface mounting
B.2 7RW80 — Housing for panel surface mounting

7RW802
[kl-uebers-7rw80-2, 1, en_US]
Figure B-2 General diagram 7RW802

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
C Connection Examples
C.1 Connection Examples for Voltage Transformers 202

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Connection Examples
C.1 Connection Examples for Voltage Transformers
[anschl-u1e-u2e-u3e-abgang-20070129, 1, en_US]
Figure C-1 Example for connection type "VAN, VBN, VCN" load-side voltage connection
[anschl-u12-u23-ue-20070129, 1, en_US]
Figure C-2 Voltage transformer connections to two voltage transformers (phase-to-phase voltages) and
broken delta winding (da-dn) – appropriate for all networks

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Connection Examples
[anschl-uph-usyn-20070129, 1, en_US]
Figure C-3 Example for connection type "Vph-n, Vsyn"
The connection can be established at any one of the three phases. The phase must be the same for Vph-n and
Vsyn.
[anschl-u12-u23-ux-20070129, 1, en_US]
Figure C-4 Example for connection type "VAB, VBC, Vx"

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Connection Examples
[anschl-u12-u23-20070129, 1, en_US]
Figure C-5 Example for connection type "VAB, VBC"
[anschl-u12-u23-v-schalt-20070129, 1, en_US]
Figure C-6 Example for connection type "VAB, VBC" with phase voltage connection as open-delta connec-
tion
[anschl-u12-u23-usyn-20070129, 1, en_US]
Figure C-7 Example for connection type "VAB, VBC, VSYN"

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Connection Examples
[anschl-u12-u23-usyn-v-schalt-20070129, 1, en_US]
Figure C-8 Example for connection type "VAB, VBC, VSYN" with phase voltage connection as open-delta
connection

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
D Default Settings and Protocol-dependent Functions
D.1 LEDs 208

D.2 Binary Input 209
D.3 Binary Output 210
D.4 Function Keys 211
D.5 Default Display 212
D.6 Protocol-dependent Functions 213

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Default Settings and Protocol-dependent Functions
D.1 LEDs
D.1 LEDs
Table D-1 Preset LED displays
LEDs Default function Function No. Description

LED1 Relay TRIP 511 Relay GENERAL TRIP command
LED2 Not configured 1 No Function configured
LED6 Fail V balance 167 Failure: Voltage Balance
Fail Ph. Seq. V 176 Failure: Phase Sequence Voltage
VT brk. wire 253 Failure VT circuit: broken wire
LED8 Brk OPENED Breaker OPENED

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
D.2 Binary Input
D.2 Binary Input

Table D-2 Binary input presettings for all devices and ordering variants
Binary Input Default function Function No. Description

BE1 nicht vorbelegt - -
BE2 >52-b 4602 >52-b contact (OPEN, if bkr is closed)
BE3 >52-a 4601 >52-a contact (OPEN, if bkr is open)
Table D-3 Further binary input presettings for 7RW802*
Binary Input Default function Function No. Description


C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
D.3 Binary Output
D.3 Binary Output

Table D-4 Output Relay Presettings for All Devices and Ordering Variants
Binary Output Default function Function No. Description

BA1 Relay TRIP 511 Relay GENERAL TRIP command
52Breaker 52 Breaker
BA2 52Breaker 52 Breaker
BA3 52Breaker 52 Breaker
BA4 Fail V balance 167 Failure: Voltage Balance
Fail Ph. Seq. V 176 Failure: Phase Sequence Voltage
VT brk. wire 253 Failure VT circuit: broken wire
BA5 Relay PICKUP 501 Relay PICKUP
Table D-5 Further Output Relay Presettings for 7RW802*
Binary Output Default function Function No. Description

BA6 nicht vorbelegt - -

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
D.4 Function Keys
D.4 Function Keys

Table D-6 Applies to All Devices and Ordered Variants
Function Keys Default function

F1 Display of the operational indications
F2 Display of the primary operational measured values
F3 Display of the last fault log buffer
F4 not pre-assigned
F5 not pre-assigned
F6 not pre-assigned
F7 not pre-assigned
F8 not pre-assigned
F9 not pre-assigned

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
D.5 Default Display
D.5 Default Display

The start page of the default display, which will open after device startup, can be selected via parameter 640
Start image DD.
6–line Display
[display-alle-20100517, 1, en_US]
Figure D-1 Default display of 7RW80
Depending on the V- connection different default dispalys are visible

Setting Parameter 213 VT Connect. 3ph Visible Default Displays
Van, Vbn, Vcn 1 and 2
Vab, Vbc, VGnd 1 and 2
Vab, Vbc, VSyn 1, 2 and 3
Vab, Vbc 1 and 2
Vph-g, VSyn 4 and 3
Vab, Vbc, Vx 1 and 2
Spontaneous Fault Display

After a fault has occurred, the most important fault data are automatically displayed after general device
pickup in the order shown in the picture below.
[dw_display-spontanmeldungen, 1, en_US]
Figure D-2 Representation of spontaneous messages on the device display

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
D.6 Protocol-dependent Functions
D.6 Protocol-dependent Functions

Protocoll → IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850 Ethernet Profibus DP DNP3.0
Function ↓ (EN 100) Modbus ASCII/RTU
Operational Measured Values Yes Yes Yes Yes
Metered Values Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fault Recording Yes Yes No No
Remote Protection Setting No Yes No No
User-defined Indications and Yes Yes Yes Yes
Switching Objects
Time Synchronization Yes Yes Yes Yes
Messages with Time Stamp Yes Yes Yes Yes
Commissioning Aids
Measured Value Indication Yes Yes No No
Blocking
Creating Test Messages Yes Yes No No
Physical Mode Asynchronous Synchronous Asynchronous Asynchronous
Transmission Mode cyclically/ event cyclically/ event cyclically cyclically/ event(DNP)
cyclically(Modbus)
Baud Rate 1 200 to 115 000 up to 100 MBaud up to 1,5 MBaud 2400 to 19200
Typ – RS232 Ethernet TP – RS485 – RS485
– RS485 – optical fiber – optical fiber
– optical fiber (double ring)

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
E Functions, Settings, Information
E.1 Functional Scope 216

E.2 Settings 217
E.3 Information List 226
E.4 Group Indications 246
E.5 Measured Values 247

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Functions, Settings, Information
E.1 Functional Scope
E.1 Functional Scope

Addr. Information Setting Options Default Setting Comments
103 Grp Chge OPTION Disabled Disabled Setting Group Change Option
Enabled
104 OSC. FAULT REC. Disabled Enabled Oscillographic Fault Records
Enabled
143 24 V/f Disabled Disabled 24 Overexcit. Protection (Volt/
Enabled Hertz)
146 VECTOR JUMP Disabled Disabled Jump of Voltage Vector
Enabled
150 27/59 Disabled Enabled 27, 59 Under/Overvoltage Protec-
Enabled tion
152 VT BROKEN WIRE Disabled Enabled VT broken wire supervision
Enabled
154 81 O/U Disabled Enabled 81 Over/Underfrequency Protec-
Enabled tion
155 Load Restore Disabled Disabled Load Restoration
Enabled
161 25 Function 1 Disabled Disabled 25 Function group 1
SYNCHROCHECK
182 74 Trip Ct Supv Disabled Disabled 74TC Trip Circuit Supervision
2 Binary Inputs
1 Binary Input
617 ServiProt (CM) Disabled T103 Port B usage
T103
DIGSI
- FLEXIBLE FCT. 1...20 Flexible Function 01 Please select Flexible Functions 1...20

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
E.2 Settings
E.2 Settings
Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments
0 FLEXIBLE FUNC. Flx OFF OFF Flexible Function
ON
Alarm Only
0 OPERRAT. MODE Flx 3-phase 3-phase Mode of Operation
1-phase
no reference
0 MEAS. QUANTITY Flx Please select Please select Selection of Measured
Voltage Quantity
Frequency
df/dt rising
df/dt falling
Binray Input
dV/dt rising
dV/dt falling
0 MEAS. METHOD Flx Fundamental Fundamental Selection of Measurement
True RMS Method
Positive seq.
Negative seq.
Zero sequence
Ratio I2/I1
0 PICKUP WITH Flx Exceeding Exceeding Pickup with
Dropping below
0 VOLTAGE Flx Please select Please select Voltage
Va-n
Vb-n
Vc-n
Va-b
Vb-c
Vc-a
Vn
Vx
0 VOLTAGE SYSTEM Flx Phase-Phase Phase-Phase Voltage System
Phase-Ground
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 2.0 .. 260.0 V 110.0 V Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 40.00 .. 60.00 Hz 51.00 Hz Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 50.00 .. 70.00 Hz 61.00 Hz Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 0.10 .. 20.00 Hz/s 5.00 Hz/s Pickup Threshold
0 P.U. THRESHOLD Flx 4 .. 100 V/s 60 V/s Pickup Threshold
0 T TRIP DELAY Flx 0.00 .. 3600.00 sec 1.00 sec Trip Time Delay
0A T PICKUP DELAY Flx 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec Pickup Time Delay
0A T DROPOUT DELAY Flx 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec Dropout Time Delay
0A BLK.by Vol.Loss Flx NO YES Block in case of Meas.-
YES Voltage Loss

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
E.2 Settings

0A DROPOUT RATIO Flx 0.70 .. 0.99 0.95 Dropout Ratio
0A DROPOUT RATIO Flx 1.01 .. 3.00 1.05 Dropout Ratio
0 DO differential Flx 0.02 .. 1.00 Hz 0.03 Hz Dropout differential
202 Vnom PRIMARY P.System Data 1 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 20.00 kV Rated Primary Voltage
203 Vnom SECONDARY P.System Data 1 34 .. 225 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage (L-
L)
206A Vph / Vdelta P.System Data 1 1.00 .. 3.00 1.73 Matching ratio Phase-VT To
Open-Delta-VT
209 PHASE SEQ. P.System Data 1 A B C ABC Phase Sequence
ACB
210A TMin TRIP CMD P.System Data 1 0.01 .. 32.00 sec 0.15 sec Minimum TRIP Command
Duration
211A TMax CLOSE CMD P.System Data 1 0.01 .. 32.00 sec 1.00 sec Maximum Close Command
Duration
213 VT Connect. 3ph P.System Data 1 Van, Vbn, Vcn Van, Vbn, Vcn VT Connection, three-phase
Vab, Vbc, VGnd
Vab, Vbc, VSyn
Vab, Vbc
Vph-g, VSyn
Vab, Vbc, Vx
214 Rated Frequency P.System Data 1 50 Hz 50 Hz Rated Frequency
60 Hz
220 Threshold BI 1 P.System Data 1 Thresh. BI 176V Thresh. BI 176V Threshold for Binary Input 1
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
Thresh. BI 88V
Thresh. BI 19V
232 VXnom PRIMARY P.System Data 1 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 20.00 kV Rated Primary Voltage X
233 VXnom SECONDARY P.System Data 1 100 .. 225 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage X

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
E.2 Settings

302 CHANGE Change Group Group A Group A Change to Another Setting
Group B Group
Group C
Group D
Binary Input
Protocol
401 WAVEFORM- Osc. Fault Rec. Save w. Pickup Save w. Pickup Waveform Capture
TRIGGER Save w. TRIP
Start w. TRIP
402 WAVEFORM DATA Osc. Fault Rec. Fault event Fault event Scope of Waveform Data
Pow.Sys.Flt.
403 MAX. LENGTH Osc. Fault Rec. 0.30 .. 5.00 sec 2.00 sec Max. length of a Waveform
Capture Record
404 PRE. TRIG. TIME Osc. Fault Rec. 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.10 sec Captured Waveform Prior to
Trigger
405 POST REC. TIME Osc. Fault Rec. 0.05 .. 0.50 sec 0.10 sec Captured Waveform after
Event
406 BinIn CAPT.TIME Osc. Fault Rec. 0.10 .. 5.00 sec 0.50 sec Capture Time via Binary
Input
610 FltDisp.LED/LCD Device, General Target on PU Target on PU Fault Display on LED / LCD
Target on TRIP
611 Spont. FltDisp. Device, General YES NO Spontaneous display of
NO flt.annunciations
614A OP. QUANTITY 59 P.System Data 1 Vphph Vphph Opera. Quantity for 59
Vph-n Overvolt. Prot.
V1
V2
615A OP. QUANTITY 27 P.System Data 1 V1 V1 Opera. Quantity for 27
Vphph Undervolt. Prot.
Vph-n
640 Start image DD Device, General image 1 image 1 Start image Default Display
image 2
image 3
1101 FullScaleVolt. P.System Data 2 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 20.00 kV Measurem:FullScale-
Voltage(Equipm.rating)
4301 FCT 24 V/f 24 V/f Overflux OFF OFF 24 Overexcit. Protection
ON (Volt/Hertz)
4302 24-1 PICKUP 24 V/f Overflux 1.00 .. 1.20 1.10 24-1 V/f Pickup
4303 24-1 DELAY 24 V/f Overflux 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 10.00 sec 24-1 V/f Time Delay
4304 24-2 PICKUP 24 V/f Overflux 1.00 .. 1.40 1.40 24-2 V/f Pickup
4305 24-2 DELAY 24 V/f Overflux 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 1.00 sec 24-2 V/f Time Delay
4306 24-t(V/f=1.05) 24 V/f Overflux 0 .. 20000 sec 20000 sec 24 V/f = 1.05 Time Delay

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
E.2 Settings

4314 24 T COOL DOWN 24 V/f Overflux 0 .. 20000 sec 3600 sec 24 Time for Cooling Down
4601 VECTOR JUMP Vector Jump OFF OFF Jump of Voltage Vector
ON
4602 DELTA PHI Vector Jump 2 .. 30 ° 10 ° Jump of Phasor DELTA PHI
4603 T DELTA PHI Vector Jump 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.00 sec T DELTA PHI Time Delay
4604 T RESET Vector Jump 0.10 .. 60.00 sec 5.00 sec Reset Time after Trip
4605A V MIN Vector Jump 10.0 .. 125.0 V 80.0 V Minimal Operation Voltage
V MIN
4606A V MAX Vector Jump 10.0 .. 170.0 V 130.0 V Maximal Operation Voltage
V MAX
4607A T BLOCK Vector Jump 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.15 sec Time Delay of Blocking
5001 FCT 59 27/59 O/U Volt. OFF OFF 59 Overvoltage Protection
ON
Alarm Only
5002 59-1 PICKUP 27/59 O/U Volt. 20 .. 260 V 110 V 59-1 Pickup
5004 59-1 DELAY 27/59 O/U Volt. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec 0.50 sec 59-1 Time Delay
5009 59 Phases 27/59 O/U Volt. All phases Largest phase Phases for 59
Largest phase
5015 59-1 PICKUP V2 27/59 O/U Volt. 2 .. 150 V 30 V 59-1 Pickup V2
5017A 59-1 DOUT RATIO 27/59 O/U Volt. 0.90 .. 0.99 0.95 59-1 Dropout Ratio
5030 59 Vp> 27/59 O/U Volt. 20 .. 260 V 110 V 59 Pickup Vp>
5031 59 Vp> 27/59 O/U Volt. 20 .. 150 V 110 V 59 Pickup Vp>
5032 59 Vp> V1 27/59 O/U Volt. 20 .. 150 V 110 V 59 Pickup Vp> V1
5033 59 Vp> V2 27/59 O/U Volt. 2 .. 150 V 30 V 59 Pickup Vp> V2
5034 59 T Vp> 27/59 O/U Volt. 0.1 .. 5.0 sec 5.0 sec 59 T Vp> Time Delay
5035 Pickup - Time 27/59 O/U Volt. 1.00 .. 20.00 Pickup - Time
0.01 .. 999.00
5101 FCT 27 27/59 O/U Volt. OFF OFF 27 Undervoltage Protection
ON
Alarm Only
5109 27 Phases 27/59 O/U Volt. Smallest phase All phases Phases for 27
All phases

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
E.2 Settings

5130 27 Vp< 27/59 O/U Volt. 10 .. 210 V 75 V 27 Pickup Vp<
5131 27 Vp< 27/59 O/U Volt. 10 .. 120 V 45 V 27 Pickup Vp<
5132 27 T Vp< 27/59 O/U Volt. 0.1 .. 5.0 sec 1.0 sec 27 T Vp< Time Delay
5133 Pickup - Time 27/59 O/U Volt. 0.05 .. 1.00 Pickup - Time
0.01 .. 999.00
5201 VT BROKEN WIRE Meas- ON OFF VT broken wire supervision
urem.Superv OFF
5202 Σ V> Meas- 1.0 .. 100.0 V 8.0 V Threshold voltage sum
urem.Superv
5203 Vph-ph max< Meas- 1.0 .. 100.0 V 16.0 V Maximum phase to phase
urem.Superv voltage
5204 Vph-ph min< Meas- 1.0 .. 100.0 V 16.0 V Minimum phase to phase
urem.Superv voltage
5205 Vph-ph max-min> Meas- 10.0 .. 200.0 V 16.0 V Symmetry phase to phase
urem.Superv voltages
5208 T DELAY ALARM Meas- 0.00 .. 32.00 sec 1.25 sec Alarm delay time
urem.Superv
5401 FCT 81 O/U 81 O/U Freq. OFF OFF 81 Over/Under Frequency
ON Protection
5402 Vmin 81 O/U Freq. 10 .. 150 V 65 V Minimum required voltage
for operation
5402 Vmin 81 O/U Freq. 20 .. 150 V 35 V Minimum required voltage
for operation
5403 81-1 PICKUP 81 O/U Freq. 40.00 .. 60.00 Hz 49.50 Hz 81-1 Pickup
5405 81-1 DELAY 81 O/U Freq. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec 60.00 sec 81-1 Time Delay
5408 81-2 DELAY 81 O/U Freq. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec 30.00 sec 81-2 Time Delay
5411 81-3 DELAY 81 O/U Freq. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec 3.00 sec 81-3 Time delay
5414 81-4 DELAY 81 O/U Freq. 0.00 .. 100.00 sec 30.00 sec 81-4 Time delay
5415A DO differential 81 O/U Freq. 0.02 .. 1.00 Hz 0.02 Hz Dropout differential
5421 FCT 81-1 O/U 81 O/U Freq. OFF OFF 81-1 Over/Under Frequency
ON f> Protection
ON f<
ON f> Protection
ON f<
ON f> Protection
ON f<

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
E.2 Settings

ON f> Protection
ON f<
5501 LR t Monitor Load Restore 1 .. 3600 sec 3600 sec Load restoration monitor
time
5502 LR Max. Cycles Load Restore 1 .. 10 2 Load restoration maximal
no. of cycles
5520 LR1 Load Restore ON OFF Load restoration element 1
Load Restore OFF
5521 LR1 Start Load Restore 40.00 .. 60.00 Hz 49.50 Hz Load restoration elem. 1
start frequency
start frequency
5523 LR1 Pickup Load Restore 0.02 .. 2.00 Hz 0.04 Hz Load restoration element 1
Pickup
5524 LR1 t pickup Load Restore 0 .. 10800 sec 600 sec Load restoration element 1
Pickup time
5525 LR1 Dropout Load Restore 0.00 .. 2.00 Hz 0.02 Hz Load restoration element 1
Dropout
5526 LR1 t dropout Load Restore 0 .. 10800 sec 60 sec Load restoration element 1
Dropout time
5527 LR1 t CB Close Load Restore 0.01 .. 32.00 sec 1.00 sec Load restoration element 1
CB Close time
5528 LR1 after 81-1 Load Restore YES NO Load restoration element 1
NO after 81-1
NO after 81-2
NO after 81-3
NO after 81-4
Load Restore OFF
start frequency
start frequency
Pickup
Pickup time
Dropout
Dropout time
CB Close time
NO after 81-1

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
E.2 Settings

NO after 81-2
NO after 81-3
NO after 81-4
Load Restore OFF
start frequency
start frequency
Pickup
Pickup time
Dropout
Dropout time
CB Close time
NO after 81-1
NO after 81-2
NO after 81-3
NO after 81-4
Load Restore OFF
start frequency
start frequency
Pickup
Pickup time
Dropout
Dropout time
CB Close time
NO after 81-1
NO after 81-2

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
E.2 Settings

NO after 81-3
NO after 81-4
6101 Synchronizing SYNC function 1 ON OFF Synchronizing Function
OFF
6102 SyncCB SYNC function 1 OBJVERWparaMEIN- none Synchronizable circuit
STELL breaker
6103 Vmin SYNC function 1 20 .. 125 V 90 V Minimum voltage limit:
Vmin
6104 Vmax SYNC function 1 20 .. 140 V 110 V Maximum voltage limit:
Vmax
6105 V< SYNC function 1 1 .. 60 V 5V Threshold V1, V2 without
voltage
6106 V> SYNC function 1 20 .. 140 V 80 V Threshold V1, V2 with
voltage
6107 SYNC V1<V2> SYNC function 1 YES NO ON-Command at V1< and
NO V2>
6108 SYNC V1>V2< SYNC function 1 YES NO ON-Command at V1> and
NO V2<
6109 SYNC V1<V2< SYNC function 1 YES NO ON-Command at V1< and
NO V2<
6110A Direct CO SYNC function 1 YES NO Direct ON-Command
NO
6111A TSUP VOLTAGE SYNC function 1 0.00 .. 60.00 sec 0.10 sec Supervision time of
V1>;V2> or V1<;V2<
6112 SYN. DURATION SYNC function 1 0.01 .. 1200.00 sec 30.00 sec Maximum duration of
synchronism-check
6113A 25 Synchron SYNC function 1 YES YES Switching at synchronous
NO condition
6121 Balancing V1/V2 SYNC function 1 0.50 .. 2.00 1.00 Balancing factor V1/V2
6122A ANGLE ADJUSTM. SYNC function 1 0 .. 360 ° 0° Angle adjustment (trans-
former)
6123 CONNECTIONof V2 SYNC function 1 A-B A-B Connection of V2
B-C
C-A
6125 VT Vn2, primary SYNC function 1 0.10 .. 800.00 kV 20.00 kV VT nominal voltage V2,
primary
6150 dV SYNCHK V2>V1 SYNC function 1 0.5 .. 50.0 V 5.0 V Maximum voltage differ-
ence V2>V1
6151 dV SYNCHK V2<V1 SYNC function 1 0.5 .. 50.0 V 5.0 V Maximum voltage differ-
ence V2<V1
6152 df SYNCHK f2>f1 SYNC function 1 0.01 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency differ-
ence f2>f1
6153 df SYNCHK f2<f1 SYNC function 1 0.01 .. 2.00 Hz 0.10 Hz Maximum frequency differ-
ence f2<f1
6154 dα SYNCHK α2>α1 SYNC function 1 2 .. 80 ° 10 ° Maximum angle difference
alpha2>alpha1
6155 dα SYNCHK α2<α1 SYNC function 1 2 .. 80 ° 10 ° Maximum angle difference
alpha2<alpha1

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
E.2 Settings

8101 MEASURE. SUPERV Meas- OFF ON Measurement Supervision
urem.Superv ON
8102 BALANCE V-LIMIT Meas- 10 .. 100 V 50 V Voltage Threshold for
urem.Superv Balance Monitoring
8103 BAL. FACTOR V Meas- 0.58 .. 0.90 0.75 Balance Factor for Voltage
urem.Superv Monitor
8201 FCT 74TC 74TC TripCirc. ON ON 74TC TRIP Circuit Supervi-
OFF sion
8202 Alarm Delay 74TC TripCirc. 1 .. 30 sec 2 sec Delay Time for alarm
8311 MinMax cycRESET Min/Max meter NO YES Automatic Cyclic Reset
YES Function
8312 MiMa RESET TIME Min/Max meter 0 .. 1439 min 0 min MinMax Reset Timer
8313 MiMa RESETCYCLE Min/Max meter 1 .. 365 Days 7 Days MinMax Reset Cycle Period
8314 MinMaxRES.START Min/Max meter 1 .. 365 Days 1 Days MinMax Start Reset Cycle in
8315 MeterResolution Energy Standard Standard Meter resolution
Factor 10
Factor 100

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
E.3 Information List

Indications for IEC 60 870-5-103 are always reported ON / OFF if they are subject to general interrogation for
IEC 60 870-5-103. If not, they are reported only as ON.
New user-defined indications or such newly allocated to IEC 60 870-5-103 are set to ON / OFF and subjected
to general interrogation if the information type is not a spontaneous event (“.._Ev”“). Further information on
indications can be found in detail in the SIPROTEC 4 System Description, Order No. E50417-H1176-C151.
In columns “Event Log”, “Trip Log” and “Ground Fault Log” the following applies:
UPPER CASE NOTATION “ON/OFF”: definitely set, not allocatable
lower case notation “on/off”: preset, allocatable
*: not preset, allocatable
<blank>: neither preset nor allocatable
In the column “Marked in Oscill. Record” the following applies:

UPPER CASE NOTATION “M”: definitely set, not allocatable
lower case notation “m”: preset, allocatable
*: not preset, allocatable
<blank>: neither preset nor allocatable
No. Description Function Typ Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Trip (Fault) Log ON/OFF
Ground Fault Log ON/OFF
Marked in Oscill. Record
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
- >Back Light on (>Light Device, SP On * * LED BI BO

on) General Of
f
- Reset LED (Reset LED) Device, IntS On * * LED BO 16 19 1 No
General P 0
- Stop data transmission Device, IntS On * * LED BO 16 20 1 Yes
(DataStop) General P Of 0
f
- Test mode (Test mode) Device, IntS On * * LED BO 16 21 1 Yes
General P Of 0
f
- Feeder GROUNDED Device, IntS * * * LED BO
(Feeder gnd) General P
- Breaker OPENED (Brk Device, IntS * * * LED BO
OPENED) General P
- Hardware Test Mode Device, IntS On * * LED BO
(HWTestMod) General P Of
f
- Clock Synchronization Device, IntS * * *
(SynchClock) General P_E
v
- Disturbance CFC Device, OUT On * LED BO
(Distur.CFC) General Of
f

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
- Fault Recording Start Osc. Fault IntS On * m LED BO

(FltRecSta) Rec. P Of
f
- Setting Group A is active Change IntS On * * LED BO 16 23 1 Yes
(P-GrpA act) Group P Of 0
f
- Setting Group B is active Change IntS On * * LED BO 16 24 1 Yes
(P-GrpB act) Group P Of 0
f
- Setting Group C is active Change IntS On * * LED BO 16 25 1 Yes
(P-GrpC act) Group P Of 0
f
- Setting Group D is active Change IntS On * * LED BO 16 26 1 Yes
(P-GrpD act) Group P Of 0
f
- Controlmode REMOTE Cntrl IntS On * LED BO
(ModeREMOTE) Authority P Of
f
- Control Authority (Cntrl Cntrl IntS On * LED BO 10 85 1 Yes
Auth) Authority P Of 1
f
- Controlmode LOCAL Cntrl IntS On * LED BO 10 86 1 Yes
(ModeLOCAL) Authority P Of 1
f
- 52 Breaker (52Breaker) Control CF_ On LED BO 24 16 20
Device D12 Of 0 0
f
- 52 Breaker (52Breaker) Control DP On BI CB 24 16 1 Yes
Device Of 0 0
f
- Disconnect Switch Control CF_ On LED BO 24 16 20
(Disc.Swit.) Device D2 Of 0 1
f
- Disconnect Switch Control DP On BI CB 24 16 1 Yes
(Disc.Swit.) Device Of 0 1
f
- Ground Switch Control CF_ On LED BO 24 16 20
(GndSwit.) Device D2 Of 0 4
f
- Ground Switch Control DP On BI CB 24 16 1 Yes
(GndSwit.) Device Of 0 4
f
- >CB ready Spring is Process SP * * * LED BI BO CB
charged (>CB ready) Data

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
information number
Data Unit
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
Info
rma
tion
- >Door closed (>Door- Process SP * * * LED BI BO CB

Close) Data
- >Cabinet door open Process SP On * * LED BI BO CB 10 1 1 Yes
(>Door open) Data Of 1
f
- >CB waiting for Spring Process SP On * * LED BI BO CB 10 2 1 Yes
charged (>CB wait) Data Of 1
f
- >No Voltage (Fuse blown) Process SP On * * LED BI BO CB 16 38 1 Yes
(>No Volt.) Data Of 0
f
- >Error Motor Voltage Process SP On * * LED BI BO CB 24 18 1 Yes
(>Err Mot V) Data Of 0 1
f
- >Error Control Voltage Process SP On * * LED BI BO CB 24 18 1 Yes
(>ErrCntrlV) Data Of 0 2
f
- >SF6-Loss (>SF6-Loss) Process SP On * * LED BI BO CB 24 18 1 Yes
Data Of 0 3
f
- >Error Meter (>Err Meter) Process SP On * * LED BI BO CB 24 18 1 Yes
Data Of 0 4
f
- >Transformer Tempera- Process SP On * * LED BI BO CB 24 18 1 Yes
ture (>Tx Temp.) Data Of 0 5
f
- >Transformer Danger Process SP On * * LED BI BO CB 24 18 1 Yes
(>Tx Danger) Data Of 0 6
f
- Reset Minimum and Min/Max IntS O
Maximum counter meter P_E N
(ResMinMax) v
- Reset meter (Meter res) Energy IntS O BI
P_E N
v
- Error Systeminterface Protocol IntS On * * LED BO
(SysIntErr.) P Of
f
- Threshold Value 1 Thresh.- IntS On LED FK BO CB
(ThreshVal1) Switch P Of TO
f NL
IN
E

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
1 No Function configured Device, SP * *

(Not configured) General
2 Function Not Available Device, SP * *
(Non Existent) General
3 >Synchronize Internal Device, SP_ * * LED BI BO 13 48 1 Yes
Real Time Clock (>Time General Ev 5
Synch)
4 >Trigger Waveform Osc. Fault SP * * m LED BI BO 13 49 1 Yes
Capture Rec. 5
(>Trig.Wave.Cap.)
5 >Reset LED (>Reset LED) Device, SP * * * LED BI BO 13 50 1 Yes
General 5
7 >Setting Group Select Bit Change SP * * * LED BI BO 13 51 1 Yes
0 (>Set Group Bit0) Group 5
8 >Setting Group Select Bit Change SP * * * LED BI BO 13 52 1 Yes
1 (>Set Group Bit1) Group 5
009.01 Failure EN100 Modul EN100- IntS On * * LED BO
00 (Failure Modul) Modul 1 P Of
f
009.01 Failure EN100 Link EN100- IntS On * * LED BO
01 Channel 1 (Ch1) (Fail Modul 1 P Of
Ch1) f
009.01 Failure EN100 Link EN100- IntS On * * LED BO
02 Channel 2 (Ch2) (Fail Modul 1 P Of
Ch2) f
15 >Test mode (>Test mode) Device, SP * * * LED BI BO 13 53 1 Yes
General 5
16 >Stop data transmission Device, SP * * * LED BI BO 13 54 1 Yes
(>DataStop) General 5
51 Device is Operational and Device, OUT On * * LED BO 13 81 1 Yes
Protecting (Device OK) General Of 5
f
52 At Least 1 Protection Device, IntS On * * LED BO 16 18 1 Yes
Funct. is Active (ProtAc- General P Of 0
tive) f
55 Reset Device (Reset Device, OUT On * * 16 4 1 No
Device) General 0
56 Initial Start of Device Device, OUT On * * LED BO 16 5 1 No
(Initial Start) General 0
67 Resume (Resume) Device, OUT On * * LED BO
General
68 Clock Synchronization Device, OUT On * * LED BO
Error (Clock SyncError) General Of
f

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
information number
Data Unit
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
Info
rma
tion
69 Daylight Saving Time Device, OUT On * * LED BO

(DayLightSavTime) General Of
f
70 Setting calculation is Device, OUT On * * LED BO 16 22 1 Yes
running (Settings Calc.) General Of 0
f
71 Settings Check (Settings Device, OUT * * * LED BO
Check) General
72 Level-2 change (Level-2 Device, OUT On * * LED BO
change) General Of
f
73 Local setting change Device, OUT * * *
(Local change) General
110 Event lost (Event Lost) Device, OUT On * LED BO 13 13 1 No
General _Ev 5 0
113 Flag Lost (Flag Lost) Device, OUT On * m LED BO 13 13 1 Yes
General 5 6
125 Chatter ON (Chatter ON) Device, OUT On * * LED BO 13 14 1 Yes
General Of 5 5
f
126 Protection ON/OFF (via P.System IntS On * * LED BO
system port) (ProtON/ Data 2 P Of
OFF) f
140 Error with a summary Device, OUT On * * LED BO 16 47 1 Yes
alarm (Error Sum Alarm) General Of 0
f
160 Alarm Summary Event Device, OUT On * * LED BO 16 46 1 Yes
(Alarm Sum Event) General Of 0
f
167 Failure: Voltage Balance Meas- OUT On * * LED BO 13 18 1 Yes
(Fail V balance) urem.Super Of 5 6
v f
170.00 >25-group 1 activate SYNC func- SP On * LED BI
01 (>25-1 act) tion 1 Of
f
170.00 >25 Synchronization SYNC func- SP On * LED BI
43 request (>25 Sync requ.) tion 1 Of
f
170.00 25 Sync. Release of SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO 41 20 1 Yes
49 CLOSE Command (25 tion 1 Of 1
CloseRelease) f
170.00 25 Synchronization Error SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO 41 20 1 Yes
50 (25 Sync. Error) tion 1 Of 2
f

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
information number
Data Unit
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
Info
rma
tion
170.00 25-group 1 is BLOCKED SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO 41 20 1 Yes

51 (25-1 BLOCK) tion 1 Of 4
f
170.20 25 Sync. Measuring SYNC func- SP On * LED
07 request of Control (25 tion 1 Of
Measu. req.) f
170.20 >BLOCK 25-group 1 (>BLK SYNC func- SP On * LED BI
08 25-1) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 >25 Direct Command SYNC func- SP On * LED BI
09 output (>25direct CO) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 >25 Start of synchroniza- SYNC func- SP On * LED BI
11 tion (>25 Start) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 >25 Stop of synchroniza- SYNC func- SP On * LED BI
12 tion (>25 Stop) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 >25 Switch to V1> and SYNC func- SP On * LED BI
13 V2< (>25 V1>V2<) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 >25 Switch to V1< and SYNC func- SP On * LED BI
14 V2> (>25 V1<V2>) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 >25 Switch to V1< and SYNC func- SP On * LED BI
15 V2< (>25 V1<V2<) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 >25 Switch to Sync (>25 SYNC func- SP On * LED BI
16 synchr.) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25-group 1: measure- SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO 41 20 1 Yes
22 ment in progress (25-1 tion 1 Of 3
meas.) f
170.20 25 Monitoring time SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO 41 20 1 Yes
25 exceeded (25 MonTi- tion 1 Of 5
meExc) f
170.20 25 Synchronization condi- SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO 41 20 1 Yes
26 tions okay (25 Synchron) tion 1 Of 6
f
170.20 25 Condition V1>V2< SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
27 fulfilled (25 V1> V2<) tion 1 Of
f

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
170.20 25 Condition V1<V2> SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO

28 fulfilled (25 V1< V2>) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Condition V1<V2< SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
29 fulfilled (25 V1< V2<) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Voltage difference SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO 41 20 1 Yes
30 (Vdiff) okay (25 Vdiff ok) tion 1 Of 7
f
170.20 25 Frequency difference SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO 41 20 1 Yes
31 (fdiff) okay (25 fdiff ok) tion 1 Of 8
f
170.20 25 Angle difference SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO 41 20 1 Yes
32 (alphadiff) okay (25 αdiff tion 1 Of 9
ok) f
170.20 25 Frequency f1 > fmax SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
33 permissible (25 f1>>) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Frequency f1 < fmin SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
34 permissible (25 f1<<) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Frequency f2 > fmax SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
35 permissible (25 f2>>) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Frequency f2 < fmin SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
36 permissible (25 f2<<) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Voltage V1 > Vmax SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
37 permissible (25 V1>>) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Voltage V1 < Vmin SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
38 permissible (25 V1<<) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Voltage V2 > Vmax SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
39 permissible (25 V2>>) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Voltage V2 < Vmin SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
40 permissible (25 V2<<) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Vdiff too large SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
90 (V2>V1) (25 V2>V1) tion 1 Of
f

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
170.20 25 Vdiff too large SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO

91 (V2<V1) (25 V2<V1) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 fdiff too large (f2>f1) SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
92 (25 f2>f1) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 fdiff too large (f2<f1) SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
93 (25 f2<f1) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 alphadiff too large SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
94 (a2>a1) (25 α2>α1) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 alphadiff too large SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO
95 (a2<a1) (25 α2<α1) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Multiple selection of SYNC func- OUT On LED BO
96 func-groups (25 FG-Error) tion 1 Of
f
170.20 25 Setting error (25 Set- SYNC func- OUT On LED BO
97 Error) tion 1 Of
f
170.21 Sync-group 1 is switched SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO 41 36 1 Yes
01 OFF (25-1 OFF) tion 1 Of
f
170.21 >BLOCK 25 CLOSE SYNC func- SP On * LED BI
02 command (>BLK 25 tion 1 Of
CLOSE) f
170.21 25 CLOSE command is SYNC func- OUT On * LED BO 41 37 1 Yes
03 BLOCKED (25 CLOSE BLK) tion 1 Of
f
171 Failure: Phase Sequence Meas- OUT On * * LED BO 16 35 1 Yes
(Fail Ph. Seq.) urem.Super Of 0
v f
176 Failure: Phase Sequence Meas- OUT On * * LED BO 13 19 1 Yes
Voltage (Fail Ph. Seq. V) urem.Super Of 5 2
v f
177 Failure: Battery empty Device, OUT On * * LED BO
(Fail Battery) General Of
f
178 I/O-Board Error (I/O-Board Device, OUT On * * LED BO
error) General Of
f

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
181 Error: A/D converter (Error Device, OUT On * * LED BO

A/D-conv.) General Of
f
191 Error: Offset (Error Offset) Device, OUT On * * LED BO
General Of
f
193 Alarm: NO calibration Device, OUT On * * LED BO
data available (Alarm NO General Of
calibr) f
197 Measurement Supervision Meas- OUT On * * LED BO 13 19 1 Yes
is switched OFF (MeasSup urem.Super Of 5 7
OFF) v f
203 Waveform data deleted Osc. Fault OUT On * LED BO 13 20 1 No
(Wave. deleted) Rec. _Ev 5 3
234.21 27, 59 blocked via opera- 27/59 O/U IntS On * * LED BO
00 tion (27, 59 blk) Volt. P Of
f
235.21 >BLOCK Function $00 Flx SP On On * * LED BI FK BO
10 (>BLOCK $00) Of Off TO
f NL
IN
E
235.21 >Function $00 instanta- Flx SP On On * * LED BI FK BO
11 neous TRIP (>$00 Of Off TO
instant.) f NL
IN
E
235.21 >Function $00 Direct TRIP Flx SP On On * * LED BI FK BO
12 (>$00 Dir.TRIP) Of Off TO
f NL
IN
E
235.21 >Function $00 BLOCK Flx SP On On * * LED BI FK BO
13 TRIP Time Delay (>$00 Of Off TO
BLK.TDly) f NL
IN
E
14 TRIP (>$00 BLK.TRIP) Of Off TO
f NL
IN
E

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
information number
Data Unit
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
Info
rma
tion

15 TRIP Phase A (>$00 Of Off TO
BL.TripA) f NL
IN
E
16 TRIP Phase B (>$00 Of Off TO
BL.TripB) f NL
IN
E
17 TRIP Phase C (>$00 Of Off TO
BL.TripC) f NL
IN
E
235.21 Function $00 is BLOCKED Flx OUT On On * * LED BO
18 ($00 BLOCKED) Of Off
f
235.21 Function $00 is switched Flx OUT On * * * LED BO
19 OFF ($00 OFF) Of
f
235.21 Function $00 is ACTIVE Flx OUT On * * * LED BO
20 ($00 ACTIVE) Of
f
235.21 Function $00 picked up Flx OUT On On * * LED BO
21 ($00 picked up) Of Off
f
235.21 Function $00 Pickup Flx OUT On On * * LED BO
22 Phase A ($00 pickup A) Of Off
f
23 Phase B ($00 pickup B) Of Off
f
24 Phase C ($00 pickup C) Of Off
f
235.21 Function $00 TRIP Delay Flx OUT On On * * LED BO
25 Time Out ($00 Time Out) Of Off
f
235.21 Function $00 TRIP ($00 Flx OUT On On * * LED BO
26 TRIP) Of
f
235.21 Function $00 has invalid Flx OUT On On * * LED BO
28 settings ($00 inval.set) Of Off
f

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
information number
Data Unit
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
Info
rma
tion
236.21 BLOCK Flexible Function Device, IntS On * * * LED BO

27 (BLK. Flex.Fct.) General P Of
f
253 Failure VT circuit: broken Meas- OUT On * * LED BO
wire (VT brk. wire) urem.Super Of
v f
255 Failure VT circuit (Fail VT Meas- OUT On * * LED BO
circuit) urem.Super Of
v f
256 Failure VT circuit: 1 pole Meas- OUT On * * LED BO
broken wire (VT b.w. 1 urem.Super Of
pole) v f
257 Failure VT circuit: 2 pole Meas- OUT On * * LED BO
broken wire (VT b.w. 2 urem.Super Of
pole) v f
272 Set Point Operating Hours SetPoint(Sta OUT On * * LED BO 13 22 1 Yes
(SP. Op Hours>) t) Of 5 9
f
301 Power System fault Device, OUT On On 13 23 2 Yes
(Pow.Sys.Flt.) General Of Off 5 1
f
302 Fault Event (Fault Event) Device, OUT * On 13 23 2 Yes
General 5 2
303 sensitive Ground fault Device, OUT ON
(sens Gnd flt) General OF
F
320 Warn: Limit of Memory Device, OUT On * * LED BO
Data exceeded (Warn General Of
Mem. Data) f
Parameter exceeded General Of
(Warn Mem. Para.) f
Operation exceeded General Of
(Warn Mem. Oper.) f
New exceeded (Warn General Of
Mem. New) f
356 >Manual close signal P.System SP * * * LED BI BO 15 6 1 Yes
(>Manual Close) Data 2 0
397 >V MIN/MAX Buffer Reset Min/Max SP On * * LED BI BO
(>V MiMaReset) meter
398 >Vphph MIN/MAX Buffer Min/Max SP On * * LED BI BO
Reset (>VphphMiMaRes) meter

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
399 >V1 MIN/MAX Buffer Min/Max SP On * * LED BI BO

Reset (>V1 MiMa Reset) meter
407 >Frq. MIN/MAX Buffer Min/Max SP On * * LED BI BO
Reset (>Frq MiMa Reset) meter
409 >BLOCK Op Counter Statistics SP On * LED BI BO
(>BLOCK Op Count) Of
f
501 Relay PICKUP (Relay P.System OUT ON m LED BO 15 15 2 Yes
PICKUP) Data 2 0 1
502 Relay Drop Out (Relay Device, SP * *
Drop Out) General
510 General CLOSE of relay Device, SP * *
(Relay CLOSE) General
511 Relay GENERAL TRIP P.System OUT ON m LED BO 15 16 2 Yes
command (Relay TRIP) Data 2 0 1
545 Time from Pickup to drop Device, VI
out (PU Time) General
546 Time from Pickup to TRIP Device, VI
(TRIP Time) General
561 Manual close signal P.System OUT On * * LED BO
detected Data 2 Of
(Man.Clos.Detect) f
1020 Counter of operating Statistics VI
hours (Op.Hours=)
4601 >52-a contact (OPEN, if P.System SP On * * LED BI BO
bkr is open) (>52-a) Data 2 Of
f
4602 >52-b contact (OPEN, if P.System SP On * * LED BI BO
bkr is closed) (>52-b) Data 2 Of
f
5145 >Reverse Phase Rotation P.System SP On * * LED BI BO
(>Reverse Rot.) Data 1 Of
f
5147 Phase rotation ABC (Rota- P.System OUT On * * LED BO 70 12 1 Yes
tion ABC) Data 1 Of 8
f
5148 Phase rotation ACB (Rota- P.System OUT On * * LED BO 70 12 1 Yes
tion ACB) Data 1 Of 9
f
5203 >BLOCK 81O/U (>BLOCK 81 O/U SP On * * LED BI BO 70 17 1 Yes
81O/U) Freq. Of 6
f

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
5206 >BLOCK 81-1 (>BLOCK 81 O/U SP On * * LED BI BO 70 17 1 Yes

81-1) Freq. Of 7
f
81-2) Freq. Of 8
f
81-3) Freq. Of 9
f
81-4) Freq. Of 0
f
5211 81 OFF (81 OFF) 81 O/U OUT On * * LED BO 70 18 1 Yes
Freq. Of 1
f
5212 81 BLOCKED (81 81 O/U OUT On On * LED BO 70 18 1 Yes
BLOCKED) Freq. Of Off 2
f
5213 81 ACTIVE (81 ACTIVE) 81 O/U OUT On * * LED BO 70 18 1 Yes
Freq. Of 3
f
5214 81 Under Voltage Block 81 O/U OUT On On * LED BO 70 18 1 Yes
(81 Under V Blk) Freq. Of Off 4
f
5232 81-1 picked up (81-1 81 O/U OUT * On * LED BO 70 23 2 Yes
picked up) Freq. Off 0
5236 81-1 TRIP (81-1 TRIP) 81 O/U OUT * On m LED BO 70 23 2 Yes
Freq. 4
Freq. 5
Freq. 6
Freq. 7
5353 >BLOCK 24 (>BLOCK 24) 24 V/f Over- SP * * * LED BI BO
flux

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
5357 >24 Reset memory of 24 V/f Over- SP On * * LED BI BO

thermal replica V/f (>24 flux Of
RM th.repl.) f
5361 24 is swiched OFF (24 24 V/f Over- OUT On * * LED BO 71 83 1 Yes
OFF) flux Of
f
5362 24 is BLOCKED (24 24 V/f Over- OUT On On * LED BO 71 84 1 Yes
BLOCKED) flux Of Off
f
5363 24 is ACTIVE (24 ACTIVE) 24 V/f Over- OUT On * * LED BO 71 85 1 Yes
flux Of
f
5367 24 V/f warning element 24 V/f Over- OUT On * * LED BO 71 86 1 Yes
(24 warn) flux Of
f
5369 24 Reset memory of 24 V/f Over- OUT On * * LED BO 71 88 1 Yes
thermal replica V/f (24 RM flux Of
th. repl.) f
5370 24-1 V/f> picked up (24-1 24 V/f Over- OUT * On * LED BO 71 89 2 Yes
picked up) flux Off
5371 24-2 TRIP of V/f>> 24 V/f Over- OUT * On m LED BO 71 90 2 Yes
element (24-2 TRIP) flux
5372 24 TRIP of th. element 24 V/f Over- OUT * On * LED BO 71 91 2 Yes
(24 th.TRIP) flux
5373 24-2 V/f>> picked up 24 V/f Over- OUT * On * LED BO 71 92 2 Yes
(24-2 picked up) flux Off
5581 >BLOCK Vector Jump Vector Jump SP * * * LED BI BO
(>VEC JUMP block)
5582 Vector Jump is switched Vector Jump OUT On * * LED BO 72 72 1 Yes
OFF (VEC JUMP OFF) Of
f
5583 Vector Jump is BLOCKED Vector Jump OUT On On * LED BO 72 73 1 Yes
(VEC JMP BLOCKED) Of Off
f
5584 Vector Jump is ACTIVE Vector Jump OUT On * * LED BO 72 74 1 Yes
(VEC JUMP ACTIVE) Of
f
5585 Vector Jump not in meas- Vector Jump OUT On * * LED BO 72 75 1 Yes
urement range (VEC Of
JUMP Range) f
5586 Vector Jump picked up Vector Jump OUT * On * LED BO 72 76 2 Yes
(VEC JUMP pickup) Off
5587 Vector Jump TRIP (VEC Vector Jump OUT * On * LED BO 72 77 2 Yes
JUMP TRIP)

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Data Unit
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Info
rma
tion
6503 >BLOCK 27 undervoltage 27/59 O/U SP * * * LED BI BO 74 3 1 Yes

protection (>BLOCK 27) Volt.
6506 >BLOCK 27-1 Under- 27/59 O/U SP On * * LED BI BO 74 6 1 Yes
voltage protection Volt. Of
(>BLOCK 27-1) f
6508 >BLOCK 27-2 Under- 27/59 O/U SP On * * LED BI BO 74 8 1 Yes
voltage protection Volt. Of
(>BLOCK 27-2) f
6509 >Failure: Feeder VT Meas- SP On * * LED BI BO 74 9 1 Yes
(>FAIL:FEEDER VT) urem.Super Of
v f
6510 >Failure: Busbar VT Meas- SP On * * LED BI BO 74 10 1 Yes
(>FAIL: BUS VT) urem.Super Of
v f
6513 >BLOCK 59 overvoltage 27/59 O/U SP * * * LED BI BO 74 13 1 Yes
protection (>BLOCK 59) Volt.
6530 27 Undervoltage protec- 27/59 O/U OUT On * * LED BO 74 30 1 Yes
tion switched OFF (27 Volt. Of
OFF) f
6531 27 Undervoltage protec- 27/59 O/U OUT On On * LED BO 74 31 1 Yes
tion is BLOCKED (27 Volt. Of Off
BLOCKED) f
6532 27 Undervoltage protec- 27/59 O/U OUT On * * LED BO 74 32 1 Yes
tion is ACTIVE (27 Volt. Of
ACTIVE) f
6533 27-1 Undervoltage picked 27/59 O/U OUT * On * LED BO 74 33 2 Yes
up (27-1 picked up) Volt. Off
6534 27-1 Undervoltage 27/59 O/U OUT * On * LED BO 74 34 2 Yes
PICKUP w/curr. superv Volt. Off
(27-1 PU CS)
6537 27-2 Undervoltage picked 27/59 O/U OUT * On * LED BO 74 37 2 Yes
up (27-2 picked up) Volt. Off
6538 27-2 Undervoltage 27/59 O/U OUT * On * LED BO 74 38 2 Yes
PICKUP w/curr. superv Volt. Off
(27-2 PU CS)
6539 27-1 Undervoltage TRIP 27/59 O/U OUT * On m LED BO 74 39 2 Yes
(27-1 TRIP) Volt.
6540 27-2 Undervoltage TRIP 27/59 O/U OUT * On * LED BO 74 40 2 Yes
(27-2 TRIP) Volt.
6565 59 Overvoltage protec- 27/59 O/U OUT On * * LED BO 74 65 1 Yes
tion switched OFF (59 Volt. Of
OFF) f

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
6566 59 Overvoltage protec- 27/59 O/U OUT On On * LED BO 74 66 1 Yes

tion is BLOCKED (59 Volt. Of Off
BLOCKED) f
6567 59 Overvoltage protec- 27/59 O/U OUT On * * LED BO 74 67 1 Yes
tion is ACTIVE (59 Volt. Of
ACTIVE) f
6568 59-1 Overvoltage V> 27/59 O/U OUT * On * LED BO 74 68 2 Yes
picked up (59-1 picked Volt. Off
up)
6570 59-1 Overvoltage V> TRIP 27/59 O/U OUT * On m LED BO 74 70 2 Yes
(59-1 TRIP) Volt.
6571 59-2 Overvoltage V>> 27/59 O/U OUT * On * LED BO
picked up (59-2 picked Volt. Off
up)
6573 59-2 Overvoltage V>> 27/59 O/U OUT * On * LED BO
TRIP (59-2 TRIP) Volt.
6851 >BLOCK 74TC (>BLOCK 74TC Trip- SP * * * LED BI BO
74TC) Circ.
6852 >74TC Trip circuit superv.: 74TC Trip- SP On * * LED BI BO 17 51 1 Yes
trip relay (>74TC trip rel.) Circ. Of 0
f
6853 >74TC Trip circuit superv.: 74TC Trip- SP On * * LED BI BO 17 52 1 Yes
bkr relay (>74TC brk rel.) Circ. Of 0
f
6861 74TC Trip circuit supervi- 74TC Trip- OUT On * * LED BO 17 53 1 Yes
sion OFF (74TC OFF) Circ. Of 0
f
6862 74TC Trip circuit supervi- 74TC Trip- OUT On On * LED BO 15 16 1 Yes
sion is BLOCKED (74TC Circ. Of Off 3
BLOCKED) f
6863 74TC Trip circuit supervi- 74TC Trip- OUT On * * LED BO 15 17 1 Yes
sion is ACTIVE (74TC Circ. Of 3
ACTIVE) f
6864 74TC blocked. Bin. input 74TC Trip- OUT On * * LED BO 17 54 1 Yes
is not set (74TC ProgFail) Circ. Of 0
f
6865 74TC Failure Trip Circuit 74TC Trip- OUT On * * LED BO 17 55 1 Yes
(74TC Trip cir.) Circ. Of 0
f
10080 Error Extension I/O (Error Device, OUT On * * LED BO
Ext I/O) General Of
f

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
information number
Data Unit
Info
rma
tion
10081 Error Ethernet (Error Device, OUT On * * LED BO

Ethernet) General Of
f
10083 Error Basic I/O (Error Basic Device, OUT On * * LED BO
I/O) General Of
f
17330 >Load restoration Block Load SP On * * LED BI FK BO
(>LR Block) Restore Of TO
f NL
IN
E
17331 >Load restoration break Load SP On * * LED BI FK BO
(>LR Break) Restore Of TO
f NL
IN
E
17332 >Load restoration Process Load SP * * * LED BI FK BO
(>LR Process) Restore TO
NL
IN
E
17333 >Load restoration Reset Load SP On * * LED BI FK BO
(>LR Reset) Restore Of TO
f NL
IN
E
17334 Load restoration is OFF Load OUT On On * LED BO
(LR OFF) Restore Of Off
f
17335 Load restoration Load OUT On On * LED BO
successful (LR Successful) Restore Of Off
f
17336 Load restoration Block (LR Load OUT On On * LED BI FK BO
Block) Restore Of Off TO
f NL
IN
E
17337 Load restoration break Load OUT On On * LED BI FK BO
(LR Break) Restore Of Off TO
f NL
IN
E

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
information number
Data Unit
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
Info
rma
tion
17338 Load restoration Process Load OUT On * * LED BI FK BO

(LR Process) Restore Of TO
f NL
IN
E
17339 Load restoration element Load OUT On * * LED BO
1 Start (LR1 Start) Restore Of
f
17340 Load restoration element Load OUT On On * LED BO
1 Pickup (LR1 Pickup) Restore Of Off
f
1 CB Close (LR1 CB Close) Restore Of Off
f
1 Active (LR1 Active) Restore Of Off
f
1 Setting Error (LR1 Set- Restore Of Off
Error) f
1 monitor mode (LR1 Restore Of Off
Monitor) f
f
f
f
f
Error) f
Monitor) f
f

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
information number
Data Unit
Chatter Suppression
Type
Info
rma
tion

f
f
f
Error) f
Monitor) f
f
f
f
f
Error) f
Monitor) f
17370 >Block Undervoltage 27/59 O/U SP On * * LED BI BO
protection Vp< (>BLOCK Volt. Of
Vp<) f
17371 >Block Overvoltage 27/59 O/U SP * * * LED BI BO
protection Vp> (>BLOCK Volt.
Vp>)
17372 Vp< Undervoltage picked 27/59 O/U OUT * On * LED BO
up (Vp< picked up) Volt. Off
17373 Vp> Overvoltage picked 27/59 O/U OUT * On * LED BO
up (Vp> picked up) Volt. Off

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
e of
LED
Event Log ON/OFF
information number
Data Unit
Binary Input
Function Key
Relay
Chatter Suppression
Type
Info
rma
tion
17374 Vp< Undervoltage TRIP 27/59 O/U OUT * On * LED BO

(Vp< TRIP) Volt.
17375 Vp> Overvoltage TRIP 27/59 O/U OUT * On * LED BO
(Vp> TRIP) Volt.
30053 Fault recording is running Osc. Fault OUT * * * LED BO
(Fault rec. run.) Rec.
31000 Q0 operationcounter= Control VI *
(Q0 OpCnt=) Device
(Q1 OpCnt=) Device
(Q8 OpCnt=) Device

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
E.4 Group Indications
E.4 Group Indications

Nr. Bedeutung Nr. Bedeutung
140 Error Sum Alarm 177 Fail Battery
178 I/O-Board error
10080 Error Ext I/O
10081 Error Ethernet
10083 Error Basic I/O
191 Error Offset
193 Alarm NO calibr
160 Alarm Sum Event 167 Fail V balance
176 Fail Ph. Seq. V
171 Fail Ph. Seq. 176 Fail Ph. Seq. V

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
E.5 Measured Values
E.5 Measured Values

No. Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in
Matrix
information number
Control Display
Default Display
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
Type
CFC
- Number of TRIPs= (#of TRIPs=) Statistics - - - - - CFC
- Operating hours greater than SetPoint(Stat) - - - - - CFC
(OpHour>)
170.20 V1 = (V1 =) SYNC function 130 1 No 9 1 CFC
50 1
170.20 f1 = (f1 =) SYNC function 130 1 No 9 4 CFC
51 1
170.20 V2 = (V2 =) SYNC function 130 1 No 9 3 CFC
52 1
170.20 f2 = (f2 =) SYNC function 130 1 No 9 7 CFC
53 1
170.20 dV = (dV =) SYNC function 130 1 No 9 2 CFC
54 1
170.20 df = (df =) SYNC function 130 1 No 9 5 CFC
55 1
170.20 dalpha = (dα =) SYNC function 130 1 No 9 6 CFC
56 1
621 Va (Va =) Measurement 134 157 No 9 2 CFC
622 Vb (Vb =) Measurement 134 157 No 9 3 CFC
623 Vc (Vc =) Measurement 134 157 No 9 4 CFC
624 Va-b (Va-b=) Measurement 160 145 Yes 3 1 CFC
134 157 No 9 5
625 Vb-c (Vb-c=) Measurement 134 157 No 9 6 CFC
626 Vc-a (Vc-a=) Measurement 134 157 No 9 7 CFC
627 VN (VN =) Measurement 134 118 No 9 1 CFC
629 V1 (positive sequence) (V1 =) Measurement - - - - - CFC
630 V2 (negative sequence) (V2 =) Measurement - - - - - CFC
632 Vsync (synchronism) (Vsync =) Measurement - - - - - CFC
644 Frequency (Freq=) Measurement 134 157 No 9 1 CFC
765 (V/Vn) / (f/fn) (V/f =) Measurement 134 157 No 9 8 CFC CD DD
766 Calculated temperature (V/f) (V/f Measurement - - - - - CFC CD DD
th=)
832 Vo (zero sequence) (Vo =) Measurement 134 118 No 9 2 CFC
859 Va-n Min (Va-nMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC
860 Va-n Max (Va-nMax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC
861 Vb-n Min (Vb-nMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC
862 Vb-n Max (Vb-nMax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC
863 Vc-n Min (Vc-nMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC
864 Vc-n Max (Vc-nMax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
E.5 Measured Values
No. Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in

Matrix
information number
Control Display
Default Display
Compatibility
Data Unit
Position
Type
CFC
865 Va-b Min (Va-bMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC
867 Va-b Max (Va-bMax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC
868 Vb-c Min (Vb-cMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC
869 Vb-c Max (Vb-cMax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC
870 Vc-a Min (Vc-aMin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC
871 Vc-a Max (Vc-aMax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC
872 V neutral Min (Vn Min =) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC
873 V neutral Max (Vn Max =) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC
874 V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC
Minimum (V1 Min =)
875 V1 (positive sequence) Voltage Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC
Maximum (V1 Max =)
882 Frequency Minimum (fmin=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC
883 Frequency Maximum (fmax=) Min/Max meter - - - - - CFC
888 Pulsed Energy Wp (active) Energy 133 55 No 205 - CFC
(Wp(puls))
889 Pulsed Energy Wq (reactive) Energy 133 56 No 205 - CFC
(Wq(puls))
30800 Voltage VX (VX =) Measurement - - - - - CFC
30801 Voltage phase-neutral (Vph-n =) Measurement - - - - - CFC

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Literature
/1/ SIPROTEC 4 System Description

E50417-H1176-C151-B6
/2/ SIPROTEC DIGSI, Start UP
E50417-G1176-C152-A3
/3/ DIGSI CFC, Manual
E50417-H1176-C098-B2
/4/ SIPROTEC SIGRA 4, Manual
E50417-H1176-C070-A7

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Glossary
Bay controllers
Bay controllers are devices with control and monitoring functions without protective functions.
Bit pattern indication

Bit pattern indication is a processing function by means of which items of digital process information applying
across several inputs can be detected together in parallel and processed further. The bit pattern length can be
specified as 1, 2, 3 or 4 bytes.
BP_xx
→ Bit pattern indication (Bitstring Of x Bit), x designates the length in bits (8, 16, 24 or 32 bits).
Buffer battery
The buffer battery ensures that specified data areas, flags, timers and counters are retained retentively.
C_xx
Command without feedback
CF_xx
Command with feedback
CFC
Continuous Function Chart. CFC is a graphical editor with which a program can be created and configured by
using ready-made blocks.
CFC blocks
Blocks are parts of the user program delimited by their function, their structure or their purpose.
Chatter ON
A rapidly intermittent input (for example, due to a relay contact fault) is switched off after a configurable
monitoring time and can thus not generate any further signal changes. The function prevents overloading of
the system when a fault arises.
Combination devices
Combination devices are bay devices with protection functions and a control display.
Combination matrix
From DIGSI V4.6 onward, up to 32 compatible SIPROTEC 4 devices can communicate with one another in an
Inter Relay Communication combination (IRC combination). Which device exchanges which information is
defined with the help of the combination matrix.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Glossary
Communication branch
A communications branch corresponds to the configuration of 1 to n users that communicate by means of a
common bus.
Communication reference CR
The communication reference describes the type and version of a station in communication by PROFIBUS.
Component view
In addition to a topological view, SIMATIC Manager offers you a component view. The component view does
not offer any overview of the hierarchy of a project. It does, however, provide an overview of all the SIPROTEC
4 devices within a project.
COMTRADE
Common Format for Transient Data Exchange, format for fault records.
Container
If an object can contain other objects, it is called a container. The object Folder is an example of such a
container.
Control Display
The display which is displayed on devices with a large (graphic) display after you have pressed the control key
is called the control display. It contains the switchgear that can be controlled in the feeder with status display.
It is used to perform switching operations. Defining this display is part of the configuration.
Data pane
The right-hand area of the project window displays the contents of the area selected in the → navigation
window, for example indications, measured values, etc. of the information lists or the function selection for
the device configuration.
DCF77
The extremely precise official time is determined in Germany by the "Physikalisch-Technische-Bundesanstalt
PTB" in Braunschweig. The atomic clock station of the PTB transmits this time via the long-wave time-signal
transmitter in Mainflingen near Frankfurt/Main. The emitted time signal can be received within a radius of
approx. 1,500 km from Frankfurt/Main.
Device container
In the Component View, all SIPROTEC 4 devices are assigned to an object of type Device container. This object
is a special object of DIGSI Manager. However, since there is no component view in DIGSI Manager, this object
only becomes visible in conjunction with STEP 7.
Double command
Double commands are process outputs which indicate 4 process states at 2 outputs: 2 defined (for example
ON/OFF) and 2 undefined states (for example intermediate positions)
Double-point indication
Double-point indications are items of process information which indicate 4 process states at 2 inputs: 2
defined (for example ON/OFF) and 2 undefined states (for example intermediate positions).
DP
→ Double-point indication

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Glossary
DP_I
→ Double point indication, intermediate position 00
Drag and drop

Copying, moving and linking function, used at graphics user interfaces. Objects are selected with the mouse,
held and moved from one data area to another.
Earth
The conductive earth whose electric potential can be set equal to zero at every point. In the area of earth elec-
trodes the earth can have a potential deviating from zero. The term "Earth reference plane" is often used for
this state.
Earth (verb)
This term means that a conductive part is connected via an earthing system to the → earth.
Earthing
Earthing is the total of all means and measures used for earthing.
Electromagnetic compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical apparatus to function fault-free in a specified
environment without influencing the environment unduly.
EMC
→ Electromagnetic compatibility
ESD protection
ESD protection is the total of all the means and measures used to protect electrostatic sensitive devices.
EVA
Limiting value, user-defined
ExBPxx
External bit pattern indication via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific → Bit pattern indication
ExC
External command without feedback via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific
ExCF
Command with feedback via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific
ExDP
External double point indication via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific → Double point indication
ExDP_I
External double point indication via an ETHERNET connection, intermediate position 00, device-specific →
Double point indication
ExMV
External metered value via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Glossary
ExSI
External single point indication via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific → Single point indication
ExSI_F
External single point indication via an ETHERNET connection, Spontaneous event, device-specific → Fleeting
indication, → Single point indication
Field devices
Generic term for all devices assigned to the field level: Protection devices, combination devices, bay control-
lers.
Fleeting Indication
Fleeting indications are single-point indications present for a very short time, in which only the coming of the
process signal is logged and further processed time-correctly.
FMS communication branch

Within an FMS communication branch, the users communicate on the basis of the PROFIBUS FMS protocol via
a PROFIBUS FMS network.
Folder
This object type is used to create the hierarchical structure of a project.
General interrogation (GI)

During the system start-up the state of all the process inputs, of the status and of the fault image is sampled.
This information is used to update the system-end process image. The current process state can also be
sampled after a data loss by means of a GI.
GOOSE message
GOOSE messages (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) according to IEC 61850 are data packets which
are transferred event-controlled via the Ethernet communication system. They serve for direct information
exchange among the relays. This mechanism implements cross-communication between bay units.
GPS
Global Positioning System. Satellites with atomic clocks on board orbit the earth twice a day on different paths
in approx. 20,000 km. They transmit signals which also contain the GPS universal time. The GPS receiver
determines its own position from the signals received. From its position it can derive the delay time of a satel-
lite signal and thus correct the transmitted GPS universal time.
Hierarchy level
Within a structure with higher-level and lower-level objects a hierarchy level is a container of equivalent
objects.
HV field description
The HV project description file contains details of fields which exist in a ModPara-project. The actual field infor-
mation of each field is stored in a HV field description file. Within the HV project description file, each field is
allocated such a HV field description file by a reference to the file name.
HV project description
All the data is exported once the configuration and parameterization of PCUs and sub-modules using ModPara
has been completed. This data is split up into several files. One file contains details about the fundamental
project structure. This also includes, for example, information detailing which fields exist in this project. This
file is called a HV project description file.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Glossary
ID
Internal double point indication → Double point indication
ID_S
Internal double point indication, intermediate position 00 → Double point indication
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission, international standardization body
IEC61850
International communication standard for communication in substations. The objective of this standard is the
interoperability of devices from different manufacturers on the station bus. An Ethernet network is used for
data transfer.
IEC address
Within an IEC bus a unique IEC address has to be assigned to each SIPROTEC 4 device. A total of 254 IEC
addresses are available for each IEC bus.
IEC communication branch

Within an IEC communication branch the users communicate on the basis of the IEC60-870-5-103 protocol via
an IEC bus.
Initialization string
An initialization string comprises a range of modem-specific commands. These are transmitted to the modem
within the framework of modem initialization. The commands can, for example, force specific settings for the
modem.
Inter relay communication

→ IRC combination
IntSP
Internal single point indication → Single point indication
IntSP_Ev
Internal indication Spontaneous event → Fleeting indication, → Single point indication
IRC combination
Inter Relay Communication, IRC, is used for directly exchanging process information between SIPROTEC 4
devices. You require an object of type IRC combination to configure an inter relay communication. Each user
of the combination and all the necessary communication parameters are defined in this object. The type and
scope of the information exchanged between the users is also stored in this object.
IRIG B
Time signal code of the Inter-Range Instrumentation Group
ISO 9001
The ISO 9000 ff range of standards defines measures used to assure the quality of a product from the develop-
ment stage to the manufacturing stage.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Glossary
LFO-Filter
(Low-Frequency-Oscillation) Filter for low frequency oscillations
Link address
The link address gives the address of a V3/V2 device.
List view
The right window section of the project window displays the names and icons of objects which represent the
contents of a container selected in the tree view. Because they are displayed in the form of a list, this area is
called the list view.
LPS
Line Post Sensor
LV
Limiting value
Master
Masters may send data to other users and request data from other users. DIGSI operates as a master.
Metered value
Metered values are a processing function with which the total number of discrete similar events (counting
pulses) is determined for a period, usually as an integrated value. In power supply companies the electrical
work is usually recorded as a metered value (energy purchase/supply, energy transportation).
MLFB
MLFB is the abbreviation for "MaschinenLesbare FabrikateBezeichnung" (machine-readable product designa-
tion). This is the equivalent of an order number. The type and version of a SIPROTEC 4 device is coded in the
order number.
Modem connection
This object type contains information on both partners of a modem connection, the local modem and the
remote modem.
Modem profile
A modem profile consists of the name of the profile, a modem driver and may also comprise several initializa-
tion commands and a user address. You can create several modem profiles for one physical modem. To do so
you need to link various initialization commands or user addresses to a modem driver and its properties and
save them under different names.
Modems
Modem profiles for a modem connection are stored in this object type.
MV
Measured value
MVMV
Metered value which is formed from the measured value

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Glossary
MVT
Measured value with time
MVU
Measured value, user-defined
Navigation pane
The left pane of the project window displays the names and symbols of all containers of a project in the form
of a folder tree.
Object
Each element of a project structure is called an object in DIGSI.
Object properties
Each object has properties. These might be general properties that are common to several objects. An object
can also have specific properties.
Off-line
In offline mode a connection to a SIPROTEC 4 device is not required. You work with data which are stored in
files.
On-line
When working in online mode, there is a physical connection to a SIPROTEC 4 device. This connection can be
implemented as a direct connection, as a modem connection or as a PROFIBUS FMS connection.
OUT
Output Indication
OUT_Ev
Output indication Spontaneous event→ Fleeting indication
Parameterization
Comprehensive term for all setting work on the device. The parameterization is done with DIGSI or sometimes
also directly on the device.
Parameter set
The parameter set is the set of all parameters that can be set for a SIPROTEC 4 device.
Phone book
User addresses for a modem connection are saved in this object type.
PMV
Pulse metered value
Process bus
Devices with a process bus interface allow direct communication with SICAM HV modules. The process bus
interface is equipped with an Ethernet module.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Glossary
PROFIBUS
PROcess FIeld BUS, the German process and field bus standard, as specified in the standard EN 50170, Volume
2, PROFIBUS. It defines the functional, electrical, and mechanical properties for a bit-serial field bus.
PROFIBUS address
Within a PROFIBUS network a unique PROFIBUS address has to be assigned to each SIPROTEC 4 device. A total
of 254 PROFIBUS addresses are available for each PROFIBUS network.
Project
Content-wise, a project is the image of a real power supply system. Graphically, a project is represented as a
number of objects which are integrated in a hierarchical structure. Physically, a project consists of a number of
directories and files containing project data.
Protection devices
All devices with a protective function and no control display.
Reorganizing
Frequent addition and deletion of objects results in memory areas that can no longer be used. By reorganizing
projects, you can release these memory areas again. However, a cleanup also reassigns the VD addresses. The
consequence is that all SIPROTEC 4 devices have to be reinitialized.
RIO file
Relay data Interchange format by Omicron.
RSxxx-interface
Serial interfaces RS232, RS422/485
Service interface
Rear serial interface on the devices for connecting DIGSI (for example, via modem).
SICAM PAS (Power Automation System)

Substation control system: The range of possible configurations spans from integrated standalone systems
(SICAM PAS and M&C with SICAM PAS CC on one computer) to separate hardware for SICAM PAS and SICAM
PAS CC to distributed systems with multiple SICAM Station Units. The software is a modular system with basic
and optional packages. SICAM PAS is a purely distributed system: the process interface is implemented by the
use of bay units / remote terminal units.
SICAM Station Unit

The SICAM Station Unit with its special hardware (no fan, no rotating parts) and its Windows XP Embedded
operating system is the basis for SICAM PAS.
SICAM WinCC
The SICAM WinCC operator control and monitoring system displays the state of your network graphically, visu-
alizes alarms, interrupts and indications, archives the network data, offers the possibility of intervening
manually in the process and manages the system rights of the individual employee.
Single command
Single commands are process outputs which indicate 2 process states (for example, ON/OFF) at one output.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Glossary
Single point indication

Single indications are items of process information which indicate 2 process states (for example, ON/OFF) at
one output.
SIPROTEC
The registered trademark SIPROTEC is used for devices implemented on system base V4.
SIPROTEC 4 device
This object type represents a real SIPROTEC 4 device with all the setting values and process data it contains.
SIPROTEC 4 Variant
This object type represents a variant of an object of type SIPROTEC 4 device. The device data of this variant
may well differ from the device data of the original object. However, all variants derived from the original
object have the same VD address as the original object. For this reason they always correspond to the same
real SIPROTEC 4 device as the original object. Objects of type SIPROTEC 4 variant have a variety of uses, such
as documenting different operating states when entering parameter settings of a SIPROTEC 4 device.
Slave
A slave may only exchange data with a master after being prompted to do so by the master. SIPROTEC 4
devices operate as slaves.
SP
→ Single point indication
SP_W
→ Single point indication Spontaneous event → Fleeting indication, → Single point indication
System interface
Rear serial interface on the devices for connecting to a substation controller via IEC or PROFIBUS.
TI
Transformer Tap Indication
Time stamp
Time stamp is the assignment of the real time to a process event.
Topological view
DIGSI Manager always displays a project in the topological view. This shows the hierarchical structure of a
project with all available objects.
Transformer Tap Indication

Transformer tap indication is a processing function on the DI by means of which the tap of the transformer tap
changer can be detected together in parallel and processed further.
Tree view
The left pane of the project window displays the names and symbols of all containers of a project in the form
of a folder tree. This area is called the tree view.
Ungrounded
Without any electrical connection to → ground.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Glossary
User address
A user address comprises the name of the user, the national code, the area code and the user-specific phone
number.
Users
From DIGSI V4.6 onward , up to 32 compatible SIPROTEC 4 devices can communicate with one another in an
Inter Relay Communication combination. The individual participating devices are called users.
VD
A VD (Virtual Device) includes all communication objects and their properties and states that are used by a
communication user through services. A VD can be a physical device, a module of a device or a software
module.
VD address
The VD address is assigned automatically by DIGSI Manager. It exists only once in the entire project and thus
serves to identify unambiguously a real SIPROTEC 4 device. The VD address assigned by DIGSI Manager must
be transferred to the SIPROTEC 4 device in order to allow communication with DIGSI Device Editor.
VFD
A VFD (Virtual Field Device) includes all communication objects and their properties and states that are used
by a communication user through services.
VI
VI stands for Value Indication.

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Index
1,2,3 ... E
173 Electrical Tests 164
EMC Tests for Immunity (Type Tests) 164
EMC Tests for Noise Emission (Type Test) 165
EN100-Module
A Interface Selection 36
Alternating Voltage 160

Analog Inputs 160
Auxiliary voltage 160 F
Fault Logging 185
Fault Messages
B Seting notes 27
Fault Recording 186
Binary Inputs 160 Fault Records 32
Binary Outputs 160 Fiber-optic Cables 142
Broken Wire Monitoring 63 Final Preparation of the Device 157
Buffer Battery 61 Frequency protection 46
Frequency Protection 81 O/U 171
Function Blocks 180
C
Change Setting Group 124 G
Changing Setting Groups 34
Checking the System Connections 142 General Device Pickup 101
Checking: Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs 150 General Tripping 101
Checking: Switching the Configured Operating
Devices 155
Checking: User-Defined Functions 152
Checking: Voltage Transformer Miniature Circuit Breaker H
(VT mcb) 153
Climatic Stress Tests 166 Hardware Monitoring 61
Clock 186 Hours Meter "CB open" 105
Commissioning Aids 186 Humidity 166
Communication Interfaces 161
Constructive Design 167
Cooling time 94
I
Insulation Test 164
D Interlocked 115
Direct Voltage 160

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Index
J S
Jump of Voltage Vector 21, 96, 179 Schalthoheit 116
Schaltmodus 117
Selection of Default Display
Start page 27
L Service Conditions 167
Setting Group Change 124
Limits CFC blocks 181 Setting Group Change Option of the Functional
Limits User-defined Functions 181 Settings 186
Load Restoration 172 Setting Groups Changing 34
Local Measured Values Monitoring 186 Software Monitoring 61
Standard Interlocking 115
Switchgear Control 112
Switching Device Control 188
M Synchrocheck 25 175
Malfunction Responses 69
Mechanical Tests 165
Mesurement Monitoring 61 T
Min / Max Report 185
Temperatures 166
Terminating the Trip Signal 101
Test fault record 156
N Testing: Phase Rotation 153
Testing: System Interface 145
Non-Interlocked Switching 115 Time Allocation 185
Time synchronization 186
Triggering Oscillographic Recording 156
Trip Circuit Supervision 186
O
Trip tests with circuit breaker 155
Trip/Close Tests for the Configured Operating
Offset Monitoring 62
Devices 155
Operating Hours Counter 186
Tripping Logic 101
Operational Measured Values 185
Ordering Information 192
Output Relays 161
Overecxitation Protection 21 U
Overecxitation Protection 24 177
Overexcit. Prote 91 Underfrequency 46
Overfrequency 46 Undervoltage Protection 27 39
Overvoltage Protection 59 38 User Interface 161
User-defined Functions (CFC) 180
P
V
Phase Rotation 100
Phase Rotation Testing 152 Vibration and Shock Stress during Steady-State Opera-
Phase sequence monitoring 63 tion 165
Pickup Logic 101 Vibration and Shock Stress during Transport 166
Port A 162 Voltage Inputs 160
Port B 162 Voltage Protection 169
Voltage supply 160
Voltage Symmetry monitoring 62
Voltage Testing 152
R
Regulations 164

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
Index
W
Watchdog 61

C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018
C53000-G1140-C233-4, Edition 07.2018

7RW80 Manual A4 V040300 Us

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

7RW80 Manual A4 V040300 Us

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

7RW80 Manual A4 V040300 Us

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Preface

Disclaimer of Liability Copyright

Purpose of the Manual

• Instructions for Installation and Commissioning → Chapter 3;

• Compilation of the Technical Data → Chapter 4;

Additional Standards IEEE Std C37.90 (see Chapter 4 "Technical Data")

This product is UL-certified according to the Technical Data. file E194016

SIPROTEC 4, 7RW80, Manual 3

Phone: +49 (911) 433-7415

4 SIPROTEC 4, 7RW80, Manual

Qualified Electrical Engineering Personnel

• Proper operation and maintenance

Typographic and Symbol Conventions

SIPROTEC 4, 7RW80, Manual 5

Device-internal logical input signal

Device-internal logical output signal

Internal input signal of an analog quantity

Example of a parameter switch designated FUNCTION with address

Analog input variable

AND-gate operation of input values

OR-gate operation of input values

Exclusive OR gate (antivalence): output is active, if only one of the

Coincidence gate: output is active, if both inputs are active or inactive

Dynamic inputs (edge-triggered) above with positive, below with

Formation of one analog output signal from a number of analog input

Limit stage with setting address and parameter designator (name)

Timer (pickup delay T, example adjustable) with setting address and

6 SIPROTEC 4, 7RW80, Manual

Timer (dropout delay T, example non-adjustable)

Dynamic triggered pulse timer T (monoflop)

SIPROTEC 4, 7RW80, Manual 7

SIPROTEC 4, 7RW80, Manual 9

2.2.2 Overvoltage Protection 59........................................................................................... 38

10 SIPROTEC 4, 7RW80, Manual

SIPROTEC 4, 7RW80, Manual 11

2.13.3 Command Sequence..................................................................................................113

3 Mounting and Commissioning................................................................................................................. 123

4 Technical Data.......................................................................................................................................... 159

12 SIPROTEC 4, 7RW80, Manual

4.2 Voltage Protection.......................................................................................................... 169

A Ordering Information and Accessories.....................................................................................................191

B Terminal Assignments.............................................................................................................................. 197

C Connection Examples............................................................................................................................... 201

D Default Settings and Protocol-dependent Functions............................................................................... 207

E Functions, Settings, Information..............................................................................................................215

SIPROTEC 4, 7RW80, Manual 13

SIPROTEC 4, 7RW80, Manual 15

1.1 Overall Operation

16 SIPROTEC 4, 7RW80, Manual

• Filtering and preparation of the measured quantities

• Continuous monitoring of the measured quantities

• Monitoring of the pickup conditions for the individual protective functions

• Interrogation of limit values and sequences in time

• Control of signals for the logic functions

• Output of control commands for switching devices

• Recording of messages, fault data and fault values for analysis

• The information is distributed via output amplifiers (OA).

Binary Inputs and Outputs

SIPROTEC 4, 7RW80, Manual 17